Home

YVP110 Advanced Valve Positioner

1. SELECTION IN 1 23 p IN_2 34 5 j y gt O OUT 32 5 IN_3 45 St IN 4 2 34 IN_5 23 6 y g gt Cl SELECTED 7 IN_6 15 5 p IN_7 32 5 p EE Wl SELECT_TYPE Maximum DISABLE_1 OFF gt m DISABLE 2 ON j le MIN_Goop 1 DISABLE_3 ON p DISABLE_4 OFF j DISABLE 5 0FF O gt DISABLE 6 0FF O gt DISABLE_7 OFF EI gt DISABLE_8 OFF OP_SELECT 0 OG bk F1706 ai Figure 17 6 Example 5 Because DISABLE_2 and DISABLE_3 are ON IN_2 and IN_3 are disabled and the IN with the maximum value among the remaining IN_n is selected for output In the above example since IN_7 has the maximum value among the remaining valid INs it is output IM 21B04C01 01E lt 17 IS Function Block gt 17 8 When SELECT TYPE is Middle If there is more than one valid input and the number of such input is an odd number the value of the middle input will be transmitted to OUT If there is an even number of valid inputs the average of the middle two inputs is transmitted to OUT If the average is used for OUT the block transmits O to SELECTED while it transmits the number of the input used for the middle for other cases If the number of valid inputs is 1 it is irrelevant to selection by Middle selector action The following shows an example of selection by Middle selector action
2. Table 16 3 CONTROL_OPTS of PID Block Options in Bit CONTROL_ Description OPTS 0 Bypass Switch for activating the control Enable action bypass 1 SP PV Track Equalizes SP to PV when MODE_ in Man BLK target is set to Man 2 SP PV Track Equalizes SP to PV when MODE in Rout BLK target is set to ROut 3 SP PV Track Equalizes SP to PV when MODE _ in LO or IMan BLK actual is set to LO or IMan 4 SP Track Equalizes SP to RCAS_IN or retained CAS_IN when MODE_BLK target Target is either in IMan LO Man or ROut and MODE_BLK actual is set to RCas or Cas 5 DirectActing Set the PID block to be a direct acting controller 7 Track Enable While this option is set if the value of TRK_IN_D becomes 1 the mode transfers to LO 8 Track in Set this option when the mode Manual should be transfered to LO even when MODE_BLK target is set to Man This option is invalid when Track Enable option is not set 9 Use PV for Sets the value of PV in BKCAL_ BKCAL_OUT OUT and RCAS_OUT instead of the value of SP 12 Obey SP limits Puts the setpoint high low limits in if Cas or RCas force in the Cas or RCas mode 13 No OUT limits Disables the high low limits for in Manual OUT in the Man mode IM 21B04C01 01E 16 4 lt 16 PID Function Block gt 16 13 Initialization and Manual Fallback IMan Initialization and manual fallback denotes a set of abnormality handling ac
3. 3 Check that the feedback lever is at around the horizontal level If its incline deviates from the horizontal level by 15 degrees or more shut off the air supply for safety Then after confirming that the air has been completely exhausted out of the actuator readjust the clamp position 4 After the incline from the horizontal level has been adjusted to within 15 degrees shut off the air supply and turn the A M selector switch counterclockwise until it stops to change the selector position to A automatic See also Section 3 2 3 A M Switching Lever Ch Valve stem The incline of lever from the horizontal level A0 when the stroke of the stem is 50 must be A lt 15 degrees A M selector switch FA0501 ai Figure A5 1 Checking Position at Which Clamp Should Be Fixed IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 6 Manual Tuning Guideline gt A 38 Appendix 6 Manual Tuning Guideline A6 1 General The YVP110 can improve controllability by properly performing the manual tuning of control parameters for each valve and actuator The following shows the whole tuning procedure Set basic parameters 5 2 Carry out Auto Tuning 5 3 Adjust zero point and span and set control parameters Check value Good Adjust zero point and span at fully actions 5 4 closed opened positions 5 3 12 4 and travel calibration 5 3 12 5 Manua
4. Subindex Element pine Description 1 SlotTime 20 4095 V ST 3 MaxResponseDelay 6 5 V MRD 6 MinInterPduDelay 12 12 V MID 3 Inthe LAS settings of the YVP set the values of V FUN and V NUN so that they include the node addresses of all nodes within the same segment See also Figure 3 ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord YVP Index 369 SM Sub index Element Default Value Description A FirstUnpolledNodeld 0x25 V FUN 7 NumConsecUnpolledNodeld OxBA V NUN A2 4 LM Functions No Function Description 1 LM initialization When a fieldbus segment starts the LM with the smallest V ST x V TN value within the segment becomes the LAS At all times each LM is checking whether or not a carrier is on the segment 2 Startup of other Transmits a PN Probe Node nodes PN and Node message and Node Activation Activation SPDU SPDU message to devices transmissions which return a new PR Probe Response message 3 PT transmission Passes a PT Pass Token including final bit message to devices included monitoring in the live list sequentially and monitors the RT Return Token and final bit returned in reply to the PT 4 CD transmission Transmits a CD Compel Data message at the scheduled times 5 Time synchronization Supports periodic TD Time Distribution transmissions and transmissions of a reply to a CT Compel Time 6 Domain download Sets the
5. Note 3 Operation e Note a warning label worded as follows WARNING OPEN CIRCUIT BEFORE REMOVING COVER e Take care not to generate mechanical spark when accessing to the instrument and peripheral devices in hazardous locations Note 4 Maintenance and Repair e The instrument modification or parts replacement by other than authorized representative of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited and will void the approval of Factory Mutual Research Corporation C FM Nonincendive approval Model YVP110 Advanced Valve Positioner with optional code FN15 e Applicable standard FM3600 FM3611 FM3810 e Nonincendive Approval Class Division 2 Groups A B C and D Class Il Division 2 Groups F and G Class III Division 1 and Class Zone 2 Group IIC in Hazardous Classified Locations Temperature Class T4 Ambient Temperature 40 to 60 C Enclosure NEMA Type4X e Electrical Parameters Vmax 32 Vdc Ci 1 76 nF Li OuH e Caution for FM Nonincendive type Following contents refer to DOC No NFM010 A12 p 1 and p 2 H NFM010 A12 Installation Diagram I Terminator o o Ke YvP 1 Valve Positioner o4 t rO _ i l Le Field Instruments WE os Co a ee cect feed 1 KE E Ee TE E Er 4 O Ay O O f 8 Safe Area i i Nonincendive IP l 1 ower Supply o o F0105 ai Note 1 Dust tight conduit seal must be used when installe
6. A 26 Appendix 3 DD Methods and DD Menu A3 1 Overview Fieldbus technology has enabled a broad range of functions to be covered by a field device alone Conversely it has resulted in increased parameters to support these increased functions To alleviate intricate operations due to the multiplied parameters and to provide easier to use user interfaces fieldbus technology offers a menu facility and interactive guidance facility called methods to be incorporated in device descriptions DDs Witha field device whose DD contains a pre embedded menu and methods users can easily and intuitively access desired parameters and perform a series of setup operations ADD menu and DD methods are features embedded in a DD file for a field device therefore software supporting them needs to be used on the host computer for fieldbus system configuration Make an inquiry to the software supplier about whether and how the software you use supports DD menus and DD methods This User s Manual describes only the DD menu and DD methods of the YVP110 A3 2 DD Methods DD methods guide you in setting parameter procedures properly Simply following instructions given by DD methods will accomplish the intended parameter setting without accessing a wrong parameter or failing to follow the correct setting procedure Note that in principle accessing the individual parameters can also make the settings that can be made using DD methods As fo
7. G11 IM 21B04C01 01E lt 7 Standard Specifications gt 7 5 1 Applicable for Connections code 3 2 Applicable for Connections code 3 and 6 3 Applicable for Connections code 1 3 and 6 4 If cable wiring is to be used to a TIIS flameproof type transmitter do not fail to add the YOKOGAWA assured flameproof packing adapter 5 Applicable for Option code EE E Dimensions For Single Acting Actuator Unit mm approx inch 77 3 0 80 3 1 117 4 6 60 2 4 76 3 0 64 2 5 35 1 3 17 Pressure Gauge Electrical Connection 1 0 7 Optional with blind plug GC Shaft DIE igi TS J FES eg A 1 Kei x 109 4 3 Air Supply Connection Out1 Connection Wd 44 Ground Terminal Electrical Connection 8563 3 1 7 oy Li M8x1 25 11 0 4 deep Shaft i i or Valve Mounting 3 G Details of shaft Si 74 2 9 o Y D of FI p F 8 d gt e Se RE 5 o Ar 12 M8x1 25 POD G JES Be j h Air Supply Connection for Valve Mounting lt 18 gt lt TP with blind plug 0 6 1 Blind plug for Connection code 1 5 and 6 0 2 to 0 24
8. 0x00008000 TB in Signature Signature is proceeding executing 0x00004000 0x00002000 0x00001000 PID in Bypass Bypass is activated in PID active block 0x00000800 DI2 in Simulate SIMULATE is activated in active DI2 block 0x00000400 DI1 in Simulate SIMULATE is activated in active DI1 block 0x00000200 AO in Simulate SIMULATE is activated in active AO block 0x00000100 TBinAuto tuning Auto tuning is proceeding 0x00000080 0x00000040 0x00000020 OSinO S mode OS block is in O S mode 0x00000010 PIDin O S mode PID block is in O S mode 0x00000008 DI2 in O S mode DI2 block is in O S mode 0x00000004 DI1 in O S mode DI block is in O S mode 0x00000002 AO in O S mode AO block is in O S mode 0x00000001 TBinO S mode TB block is in O S mode IM 21B04C01 01E lt 11 Resource Block gt 11 4 Table 11 5 DEVICE_STATUS_ 2 with EE Table 11 6 DEVICE_STATUS_3 Indication Hexadecimal Indication when Hexadecimal when Device SES Device Description is Meaning Deeg egies 4 Meaning Indication Indication Description is installed installed 0x80000000 0x80000000 0x40000000 0x40000000 0x20000000 0x20000000 0x10000000 0x10000000 PID2 BLOCK Block Error has occurred in 0x08000000 ERR the PID2 block
9. 2 Attached with 4 mounting bolts M8 25 mm and spring washers applicable 3 to 6 mm thick brackets 3 Available when unable to mount securely with the 4 bolts in 2 F0701 ai IM 21B04C01 01E lt 7 Standard Specifications gt 7 6 For Double Acting Actuator Unit mm approx inch 77 3 0 80 3 1 117 4 6 88 3 5 76 3 0 64 2 5 35 60 2 4 1 3 47 Pressure Gauge Electrical Connection 1 Optional with blind plug l Shaft wo o UOA TEE ch ei an WN li Gy 3 E Air Supply E Connection Sg Out2 Connection GI Ze A4 Ground Terminal 15 0 6 Electrical Connection 85 3 3 1 7 ey Gm M8x1 25 11 0 4 deep Shaft i d for Valve Mounting 10 0 4 1 6 74 2 9 42 D Cl z 5 AE 12 fe _ 29 i rN 24 N y Details of shaft o AX e Q Air Supply Connection with blind plug M8x1 25 20 0 8 deep for Valve Mounting 2 1 Blind plug for Connection code 1 5 and 6 5 to6 0 2 to 0 24 2 Attached with 4 mounting bolts M8 25 mm and spring washers applicable 3 to 6 mm thick brackets
10. Not Connected sub status In this case the number of inputs that are not in Not Connected sub status is regarded as N lt 18 AR Function Block gt 18 4 18 4 Output Section After executing the computing equation the block applies a gain to the calculated result and then adds a bias to it It then substitutes the result into PRE_OUT and if the mode is in AUTO the value of PRE_OUT is taken as OUT PRE_OUT func x gain bias where func result of computing equation execution OUT PRE_OUT when the mode is in AUTO Next the block performs limitation processing OUT HI UM OUT_LOW_LIM This processing is described as follows with respect to the value of PRE_OUT If PRE_OUT gt OUT_HI_LIM PRE_OUT OUT_HI_LIM The high limited processing is applied to the status of PRE_OUT If PRE_OUT lt OUT LO LIM PRE_OUT OUT_LO LIM The low limited processing is applied to the status of PRE_OUT 18 4 1 Mode Handling Mode Output Auto OUT PRE_OUT MAN For OUT the OUT value in the Auto mode just OS before change to MAN or O S is retained In the Manual mode including O S the value of OUT in the Auto mode just before a change to the Manual mode is held or the value written to OUT is output If the mode is switched from Manual to Auto the value of OUT that is linearly changed with respect to the value of PRE_OUT for time set by BAL_TIME is output The PRE_OUT al
11. Single Acting Actuator 3 G9615EE Applicable Actuator code Connection code 2 1 5 and 6 G9615EG G9615AS G9615EH Double Acting Actuator 3 G9615EJ All Rights Reserved Copyright 2000 Yokogawa Electric Corporation MPL 21 B 4 1 i 1 E YOKOGAWA gt i i i j S 5th Edition er e Yokogawa Electric Corporation Item Part No 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 F9177WA 23 F9165DF 24 F9300AG 25 Below G9330DP G9612EB F9340NW F9340NX 26 Below G9612EK G9612EM 27 Below F9176HA F9176HD 28 F9176HC 29 30 31 Y9414JY 32 F9176GZ 33 Below F9177MJ F9177ML F9177PS F9177PU F9177PW F9177PY 34 Below F9176GD F9176HG 35 Below F9176GE F9176HH 36 G9I307MQ 37 Below F9177ME F9177MG F9177PJ F9177PL F9177PN F9177PQ 38 F9176GC 39 F9176JZ Aug 2006 Qty Description zc wt ey o aha N AA s A 23 24 Position Sensor Assembly O Ring Bolt Hex Socket Connector Assembly Connector Assembly Amplifier Assembly Screw Machine Screw Machine Connector Assembly Tag Plate Screw Plug G 1 2 1 2 NPT Pg13 5 M20 Plug R 1 4 1 4 NPT Lever Assembly For Option code LV1 For Option code LV2 Lever for Option code LV1 Case Assembly Control Relay Assembly Screw Washer Control Relay Assembly with Screws For Single Acting Actuator For Single Acting Actuator and Option code X1
12. The voltage on the fieldbus segment falls below the specified limit 9 volts Check the capacity of the field bus power supply used and the voltage at the terminal There was an error in a checksum or Check SOFTDWN_ERROR in the resource block and obtain the correct file Check the setting of the download tool the number of transmission bytes The download tool does not allow download with same software revision The fieldbus segment is noisy Check the noise level on the fieldbus segment Check whether communication with the field device has recovered after a while Obtain the correct file The download takes far longer than expected or fails frequently An error occurs after activation Transient error caused by the internal resetting of the field device The file of the current revision was The new software does not work after the activation downloaded Failure of the memory in field device Check SOFTDWN_ERROR in the etc resource block and re try downloading If fails place a service call A4 8 Resource Block s Parameters Relating to Software Download Table A4 3 Additional Parameters of Resource Block Relative Default Write nogi Index Index Parameter Name Factory Set Mode Description 53 1053 SOFTDWN_PROTECT 0x01 Defines whether to accept software downloads 0x01 Unprotected 0x02 Protected 54 1054 SOFTDWN_FORMAT 0x01 Selects the soft
13. Adjust the pressure balance of 6 3 4 is too large control relay IM 21B04C01 01E lt 20 Troubleshooting gt 20 3 20 5 Troubleshooting Auto Tuning Problem Auto tuning requests are rejected Presumed Cause Either or both of the A O block and transducer block are not in O S mode Remedy and transducer block to O S Change the target modes of the AO Ref Section Appendix 1 When auto tuning has finished AUTO_TUNE_ RESULT changes value to an index from 21 to 23 There is something wrong with the air supply pressure or spring range Check whether the measured pressure reading nearly equals the actual pressure See the descriptions for auto tuning 5 3 12 4 When auto tuning has finished AUTO_TUNE_ RESULT changes value to index 40 or 120 There is something wrong with the operation point of the I P module SERVO_OFFSET could not be measured If there is nothing wrong with the air supply pressure and piping contact the nearest service station or representative office When auto tuning has finished AUTO_TUNE_ RESULT changes value to an index from 42 to 44 or from 120 to 123 The measured time delay constant hysteresis and or slip width of the valve is excessively large Check whether they meet the characteristics specified for the valve See the descriptions for auto tuning 5 3 12 4 When auto tuning has finished AUTO_TUNE_ RESULT
14. OS Function Block 41400 41401 41402 41403 12 DEV REV 1 IS Function Block 41700 41701 41702 41703 AR Function Block 41750 41751 41752 41753 13 DD_REV 1 14 GRANT_DENY 2 15 HARD TYPES 2 9 6 4 Function Block Parameters 16 RESTART Function block parameters can be read from the 17 FEATURES 2 18 FEATURE SEL 7 host or can be set For a list and details of the 19 CYCLE TYPE 7 parameters of blocks held by the YVP110 refer to 20 ICYCLE SEL 2 the chapter for each function block and the list of 21 MIN CYCLE T 4 parameters in the latter part of this manual 22 MEMORY GLZE 2 293 NV_CYCLE_T 4 24 FREE_SPACE 4 25 FREE TIME A A 26 SHED RCAS 4 27 SHED_ROUT 4 28 FAULT STATE 1 1 29 SET_FSTATE 20 CLR_FSTATE 31 MAX_NOTIFY 1 32 UM NOTIEN 1 23 CONFIRM_TIME 4 34 WRITE_LOCK 1 35 UPDATE EVT 36 BLOCK_ALM 37 ALARM_SUM 8 8 38 ACK_OPTION 2 39 WRITE_PRI 1 A0 WRITE_ALM 41 ITK_VER 2 42 SOFT_REV 43 SOFT_DESC A4 SIM_ENABLE_MSG 45 DEVICE_STATUS 1 4 2 46 DEVICE_STATUS 2 4 47 DEVICE_STATUS 3 4 2 48 DEVICE_STATUS 4 4 1 49 DEVICE_STATUS 5 4 50 DEVICE_STATUS 6 4 51 DEVICE_STATUS_7 4 52 DEVICE_STATUS 8 4 Total in bytes 22 30 54 31 IM 21B04C01 01E lt 10 Actions of YVP110 During Operation gt 10 1 10 Actions of YVP110 During Operation 10 1 Block Modes All function blocks have modes All blocks have their mode expressed by MODE_BLK parameter It is a structure of four c
15. Option used to specify the handling of various statuses SELECT_TYPE Determines the input selection algorithm MIN GOOD Parameter specifying the minimum required number of inputs with good status If the number of inputs that are good is less than the value of MIN GOOD input selection is canceled Mode O S Allows configuration change but disables input value output Man Allows internal processing but the output value may vary depending on the definition of usage conditions Auto Outputs the input value The Input Selector IS block offers a maximum of eight input alternatives and generates the output according to the configured action This block generally receives inputs from the Analog Input Al function block The function of the IS block is to select a maximum minimum middle average first good or latched good signal The block combines parameter configuration DISABLE_n and option first good to give priority to alternative s or to function as a rotary position switch When used as a rotary position switch the block can receive operator inputs or switch information from connected inputs The IS block supports the concept of middle selection This function outputs the average of two middle signals if even multiple valid signals are configured or a middle signal if odd multiple valid signals are configured Application of the block is to supply a selected control signal in the forward
16. The number of devices max 32 possible on a fieldbus link depends on factors such as the power consumption of each device the type of cable used use of repeaters etc E Entity Model Non hazardous Hazardous Locations Locations Supply Unit Terminator o4U U o rH Terminator Hand held Data Terminal Xf Field Instruments Passive F0107 ai Exi LS fieldbus system complying with Entity model IM 21B04C01 01E LS values Power supply field device Po lt Pi Uo lt Ui lo lt li Calculation of max allowed cable length Ccable lt Co ci gt ci Terminator Leable lt Lo Li Number of Devices The number of devices max 32 possible on a fieldbus link depends on factors such as the power consumption of each device the type of cable used use of repeaters etc B ATEX Flameproof Type Caution for ATEX flameproof type Note 1 Model YVP110 Valve Positioner with optional code KF2 is applicable for potentially explosive atmospheres e Applicable standard EN60079 0 2009 EN60079 1 2007 e Certificate KEMA 10ATEX0023 X e Group Il e Category 2G e Type of Protection and Marking Code Exd IIC T6 or T5 Gb e Ambient Temperature T6 40 to 65 C T5 40 to 80 C Note 2 Electrical Data e Supply voltage 32 V DC max e Output signal 17 mA DC Note 3 Installation Instructions e The cable glands and blanking elements
17. ccccesscesseeseeeseeeseesseeseeeeseeseeesseeseeeeseeeneess 15 2 15 5 STATUS OPTS corsini aa 15 2 15 6 Alarm ProcCeSsiing siiscicccciccccscccccecectcccecenttcce cane cane cane cace cane cace cane caze cantdacecenetaze cate 15 2 PID PUmetion BIOCK sissies cicscccecstcectecenstrctcnsiceceeitietannmeliccuasasestbuenerticnetceccee 16 1 16 1 EI E 16 1 16 2 MOOS sissies A T A E E T E A 16 1 16 3 Input Processing stsuERSEESSEEESEESREERSEESSEEESEEESEEESEESEEEESEEESEEESEEEEEEESEEESEERSEESSEEESCEeEE 16 1 16 4 Setpoint SP LIMITOTS srureeiani ai eN NENANA REKNER 16 1 16 5 PID Computations e a e e E E a Ea 16 2 16 6 Control Out putes cccicciscecccettcececasscsiacnetsaaacadessvanceacstecndecavsnesaanersnteccsasecscnetcateccunere 16 2 16 7 Direction of Control ACtion cccecceeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeeeeenseeenseeenseeensenenes 16 2 16 8 Control Action Bypass csecssnsseeseneeeeeeeeenseesseenseeaseenseesseenseesseesseesseenseesenes 16 2 16 9 Feed TORWANG cisizs ccnvecsnsnchsaecannrxsteankecensunsesttexaxebahsanstssutenveasduncexduscabedshsaextxenease 16 3 16 10 External output Tracking LO sssccccesccosesccnssonceinonenersns 16 3 16 11 Measured value Tracking cssccsscsseesseesseesseessessesseesseesseesseesseessenseesseeneees 16 3 Lake el Wee KE 16 3 16 13 Initialization and Manual Fallback IMan cecsecsecseeseeneeenseenseenseeneeeneees 16 4 16 14 Manual Fallback aie cicesccccicccsescdncecsecescaceacceczconcessncescceeesnne
18. 15 FINAL_VALUE_CUTOFF_ HI 16 FINAL_VALUE_CUTOFF_ LO 17 FINAL_POSITION_VALUE 5 18 SERVO_GAIN 19 SERVO_RESET 20 SERVO_RATE 21 ACT_FAIL_ACTION 22 ACT_MAN _ID 23 ACT_MODEL_NUM 24 ACT_SN 25 VALVE_MAN_ID 26 VALVE_MODEL_NUM 27 VALVE_SN 28 VALVE_TYPE 29 XD_CAL_LOC 20 GD CAL DATE 21 LD CAL WHO 32 ALARM_SUM 8 33 POSITION _CHAR_TYPE 1 34 POSITION_ CHAR 35 LIMSW_HI_LIM 4 36 UMW LO UM A 37 ELECT_TEMP 4 38 TEMPERATURE_UNIT 2 39 SUPPLY_PRESSURE 4 40 SPRING_RANGE 11 41 OUT_PRESSURE 4 42 SERVO_OUTPUT_SIGNAL 4 43 SERVO_RATE_GAIN 44 SERVO_DEADBAND 45 SERVO_OFFSET 46 BOOST_ON_THRESHOLD 47 BOOST_OFF_ THRESHOLD 48 BOOST_VALUE 49 SERVO_ _SLEEP_LMT 50 SERVO_P_ALPHA IM 21B04C01 01E lt 9 Configuration gt Relative Gage VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW index 1 2 34st 32nd 4 1st 42nd 4 3rd 4 4th 45th 4 6th 47th 4 8th 51 INTERNAL_GAIN 4 52 MEAS GAIN 4 53 VALVE_TC 4 54 VALVE_HYS 4 55 VALVE_SLIP_WIDTH 4 56 MEAS PRESS AIR 4 57 MEAS PRESS SUPPLY 4 58 MEAS_SPRING_RANGE 8 59 CONTROL_DIR 1 60 THETA_HI 4 ei THETA_LO 4 62 THETA_P 4 63 TRAVEL_CALIB_EXEC 1 64 TRAVEL_CALIB_RESULT 1 ep OPEN_STOP_ADJ 4 66 AUTO_TUNE_EXEC 1 67 AUTO_TUNE_RESULT 1 68 AUTO_TU
19. 32788 File endcode error 32789 File type error UPDATE ORIGINAL 32790 FlashROM driver undefined number error 32791 On start state error other than DWNLD_NOT_READY 32792 Start segment error in module 1 32793 Binary file error 32794 Binary file error 32795 Device error in module 2 32796 Detection of EEPROM state other than backup after activation 32797 Checksum error in module 2 32798 Not in DWNLD_READY state when receiving GenericDomainInitiate 32799 Not in DWNLD_OK state when receiving GenericDomainTerminate 32800 Not in DOWNLOADING state when receiving GenericDomainSegment 32801 Firmware error 36863 Unused IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 4 Software Downloads A 34 A4 9 System Network Management VFD Parameters Relating to Software Download Table A4 5 System Network Management VFD Parameters Write Mode R W read write R read only on Parameter Name rie Sub parameter Name Bien as W i Remarks 400 DWNLD_PROPERTY 0 R 1 Download Class 1 2 Write Rsp Returned For 1 ACTIVATE 3 Write Rsp Returned For 1 PREPARE 4 Reserved 0 5 ReadyForDwnlid Delay Secs 300 6 Activation Delay Secs 60 410 DOMAIN_DESCRIPTOR 0 R W Read write permitted only for sub index 1 1 Command 3 2 State 1 3 Error Code 0 4 Download Domain Index 440 5 Download Domain Header 420 Index 6 Activated Domain Header 430 Index T Domain Name Device name
20. Air supply is not being fed Supply proper air pressure 4 2 The valve has failed Apply a pneumatic pressure directly 3 2 3 to the valve actuator and check whether there is valve action The I P module or control relay Ifthe output pressure does has failed or there is breakage not increase even though the in the cable between the I P SERVO_OUTPUT_SIGNAL value module and control relay is at maximum contact the nearest service station or representative office The valve s full stroke is The air supply pressure is not Check the air supply pressure rating 4 2 5 3 insufficient for the setpoint high enough to drive the valve for the valve actuator and supply air input actuator at the correct pressure and write 4 or 2 to AUTO_TUNE_EXEC to redo autotning The range of the setpoint is Check the values of SP_HI_LIM 13 3 limited by software and SP_LO_LIM in the AO block Appendix 1 and FINAL_VALUE_RANGE in the transducer block The deviation between The tight shut or full open action Check the values of FINAL_VALUE_ 12 2 4 the setpoint and readback _ is active CUTOFF_HI and FINAL_VALUE__ Appendix 1 signal remains CUTOFF_LO The travel calibration has not Write 2 to AUTO_TUNE_EXEC to 5 3 been performed correctly perform 0 amp 100 point adjustment The valve oscillates The friction of grand packing is 1 Write 4 or 3 toAUTO_TUNE_ 5 3 cyclically limit cycle large EXEC to redo auto tuning 2 Use the actuator of proper siz
21. F1709 ai Figure17 9 Example 8 When SELECT TYPE is Latched Good The valid input with the smaller input number is selected as an output and is held until it becomes invalid When it becomes invalid the next valid input will be selected as an output regardless of the magnitude of the value Even if an input with the input number smaller than that of the currently selected input recovers the current selection is held Assuming that IN_2 is the valid input with the smallest input number the order of input selection is IN_2 gt IN_3 gt 5IN 8 gt IN_1 If the power is turned OFF and then ON with SELECT TYPE set to Latched Good input selection starts with the IN that was selected before the power was turned OFF IM 21B04C01 01E 17 11 lt 17 IS Function Block gt 17 4 Output Processing 17 4 1 Handling of SELECTED For the value output to SELECTED when OP_SELECT has been selected that is not O the number specified by OP_SELECT will be stored as is However 0 is stored in the SELECTED in the following cases 1 If there is no valid input 2 If the value of MIN_GOOD is greater than the number of valid inputs 3 Ifthe input status is bad or uncertain when the value of OP_SELECT is anything other than 0 with the exception of the case where the Uncertain as good bit in STATUS_OPTS is set 4 Ifthe value of OP_SELECT is greater than 8 which is the maximum nu
22. Transmitter ere EE 4 Hazardous Location Non hazardous Location Terminator EE Safety Barrier o feo Zeg use F0102 ai Note 4 FISCO rules The FISCO concept allows the interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus to associated apparatus not specifically examined in such combination The criterion for such interconnection is that the voltage Ui the current li and the power Pi which intrinsically safe apparatus can receive and remain intrinsically safe considering faults must be equal or greater than the voltage Uo Voc Vt the current lo and the power Po which can be provided by the associated apparatus supply unit In addition the maximum unprotected residual capacitance Ci and inductance Li of each apparatus other than the terminators connected to the fieldbus must be less than or equal to 5 nF and 10 uH respectively In each l S fieldbus segment only one active source normally the associated apparatus is allowed to provide the necessary power for the fieldbus system The allowed voltage Uo of the associated apparatus used to supply the bus is limited to the range of 14 V d c to 24 V d c All other equipment connected to the bus cable has to be passive meaning that the apparatus 1 4 lt 1 Notes on Handling gt is not allowed to provide energy to the system except to a leakage current of 50 pA for each connected device Supply unit trapezoidal or rectangular outp
23. it turns to OFF again only when the value of FINAL _POSITION_VALUE becomes smaller by 1 or less than the value of LIMSW_HI_LIM Also while limit switch of low side stays ON it turns to OFF again only when the value of FINAL POSITION_VALUE becomes greater by 1 or more than the value of LIMSW_LO_LIM IM 21B04C01 01E lt 12 Transducer Block gt 12 3 12 4 Auto Tunin Table 12 3 AUTO_TUNE_RESULT amp TRAVEL_ g CALIB_RESULT 2 A CAUTION Kam Comment Se Description 1 Succeeded Auto tuning Travel This function strokes the valve over its full range calibration has succeeded Do not execute while valve is controlling the 2 Canceld A has been process Keep away from the movable parts to 21 Exhaust air W The measured exhaust avoid Injury pressure warning pressure exceeds 60 Kpa 22 Small supply air W The measured supply air Auto tuning checks the valve responses and pressure warning pressure is less than 100 automatically tunes control parameter settings The kPa actions to be performed can be chosen as shown 23 Large supply air W The measured Se air ressure warnin ressure is greater than in the table below for how to carry out auto tuning 9 a kPa a see Chapter 5 Setup Before carrying out auto 40 Offset drift warning W The offset falls outside the tuning change the modes of th
24. may be used See Figure 4 2 A WARNING For JIS flameproof type and intrinsically safe type grounding should satisfy Class D requirements grounding resistance 100 Q or less IM 21B04C01 01E lt 5 Setup gt 5 1 During the setup especially when autotuning is being executed the valve stem may happen to move suddenly to an unexpected direction Before starting the setup check and confirm that the process has been shut down or the control valve is isolated from the process During the setup keep away from the movable parts to avoid injury 5 1 General After mechanically attaching the YVP110 to an actuator and finishing the wiring and piping connect the YVP110 to a fieldbus and make settings such as carrying out auto tuning and setting the tight shut option using a parameter setting tool or the like AA IMPORTANT For the operation of a parameter setting tool read the manual of each tool Also read the Chapters 8 through 10 and 12 of this manual to become familiar with the configuration of the fieldbus instrument and the function of the transducer block before starting adjustment Check that the piping and wiring connections are all correct and then supply the specified input voltage and air pressure For the connection to the fieldbus see the chapters 4 3 Wiring and 8 4 System Configuration Parameter settings for the actuator and valve are to be made in the parameters in the transducer blo
25. shall be certified in type of protection flameproof enclosure d suitable for the conditions of use and correctly installed e With the use of conduit entries a sealing device shall be provided either in the flameproof enclosure or immediately on the entrance thereto e To maintain the degree of ingress protection IP65 according to EN 60529 special care must be taken to avoid water entering the breathing and draining device when the valve positioner is mounted with the feedback shaft in the upright position Note 4 Operation e Keep strictly the WARNING on the label on the positioner AFTER DE ENERGIZING DELAY 5 MINUTES BEFORE OPENING WHEN THE AMBIENT TEMP 2 70 C USE HEAT RESISTING CABLE amp CABLE GLAND 2 90 C lt 1 Notes on Handling gt 1 9 Note 5 Maintenance and Repair e The instrument modification or parts replacement by other than authorized representative of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited and will void KEMA Flameproof Certification C ATEX Intrinsically safe Ex ic Type n Ex nA Note 1 Model YVP110 Advanced Valve Positioner with optional code KN25 e Applicable standard EN60079 0 2009 EN60079 0 2012 Ex ic Ex nA EN60079 11 2012 Ex ic EN60079 15 2010 Ex nA e Exic Il 3G Ex ic IIC T4 Gc Intrinsically safe e ExnA Il 3G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc Non sparking e Ambient Temperature 30 to 75 C e Ambient Humidity 0 to 100 RH No condensation e Enclosure IP65 e Installation catego
26. users can continue measurement while uploading the measured data e The following can be set in a setting parameter EXT_ACT_SIGN_SET Lower Setpoint point to start the measurement Upper Setpoint point to finish the measurement Recommended Scan Time seconds not used in this function Scan Time seconds Deviation Margin Sampling Rate milliseconds The sampling rate can be set within the range of 200 through 1000 milliseconds The total number of measured samples can be obtained by the following formula Scan time sampling rate x 1000 points e Performing measurement sets the pressure data in SIGN_DATA_X and the position data in SIGN_DATA_Y 4 Step Response Test The step response test measures time series changes in the valve position in response to a sudden change step in the setpoint of the positioner from the preset initial setpoint to the destination setpoint e The following can be set in a setting parameter STEP_RESP_SET Initial Setpoint Destination Setpoint Sampling Rate milliseconds Number of Samples points The sampling rate can be set within the range of 20 through 1000 milliseconds corresponding to the measurement period of 0 4 through 600 seconds The number of samples can be set to up to 600 e Performing measurement sets the positioner setpoints in SIGN DATA XS and the position data in SIGN_DATA_Y IM 21B04C01 01E lt 19 Diagnostics gt 19 4 5 Positioner S
27. vary the value of FINAL_VALUE value see caution to move the stem and adjust the stem to the desired point that you want to set as the 100 position 2 Next write 3 to TRAVEL_CALIB_EXEC This changes the span while leaving the zero point unchanged TRAVEL_CALIB_EXEC 1 off 2 0 point calibration no change to span 3 span calibration no change to 0 point 4 50 point calibration no change to either span or 0 point A caution Only when the target mode s in both the AO and transducer blocks are O S can FINAL_VALUE value be written The result of the travel calibration will be written to TRAVEL_CALIB_ RESULT IM 21B04C01 01E 5 4 Checking Valve Actions After carrying out auto tuning check step responses by changing the value of the transducer block s final valve position setpoint FINAL_VALUE value Also check whether the valve acts correctly over the 0 100 position range N NOTE Only when the target mode is in MODE_BLK parameters in both the AO and transducer blocks are O S can FINAL_VALUE value be written It is not usually necessary to readjust the control parameters after auto tuning However when using the Double Acting Type or if the expected response characteristics cannot be obtained using auto tuning either conduct manual tuning in reference to APPENDIX 6 or refer to Section 18 5 Troubleshooting Auto Tuning 5 5 Setting Parameters of Transducer Block Set the following paramet
28. 114 SERVO_WARN_COUNT 115 X_BST_ON_THRESHOLD 116 X_BST_OFF_THRESHOLD 8 117 X_BOOST_VALUE 8 ER 14 60 ar 7 Total in bytes 41 59 99 104 96 95 97 103 95 89 90 26 4 These parameters are not usually used TEST_48 Relative index 165 applies to option code EE Table 9 9 View Object for AO Function Block Gees Parameters St E a Ei ce Batter wis Ke Ka nT 1 ST_REV 2 2 2 2 17 CAS_IN 5 5 2 TAG_DESC 18 SP_RATE_DN 4 3 STRATEGY 2 19 SP_RATE_UP 4 4 ALERT_KEY 1 20 SP HI UM A 5 MODE_BLK 4 4 21 ep Lo LIM 4 6 BLOCK_ERR 2 2 22 CHANNEL 2 7 PV 5 5 23 FSAFE_TIME 4 8 SP 5 5 24 FSAFE_VAL 4 9 OUT 5 5 25 BKCAL_OUT 5 10 SIMULATE 26 RCAS_IN 5 11 PV_SCALE 11 27 SHED_OPT 1 12 XD_SCALE 11 28 RCAS_OUT 5 13 GRANT_DENY 2 29 UPDATE EVT 14 IO_OPTS 2 30 BLOCK_ALM 15 STATUS_OPTS 2 16 READBACK 5 5 Total in bytes 33 34 48 28 IM 21B04C01 01E lt 9 Configuration gt 9 9 Table 9 10 View Object for DI DI2 Function Block Table 9 11 View Object for OS Function Block ae Parameters n GH a Hai Ge Param t rs T E KN Ka 1 ST_REV 2 2 2 2 1 ST_REV 2 2 2 2 2 TAG DESC 2 TAG_ DESC 3 STRATEGY 2 3 STRATEGY 2 4 ALERT_KEY 1 4 ALERT_KEY 1 5 MODE_BLK 4 4 5 MODE_BLK 4 4 6 BLOCK_ERR 2 2 6 BLOCK_ERR 2 2 7 DVD 2 2 7 SP 5 5 8 OUT D 2 2 8 OUT 5
29. 12 4 lt 12 Transducer Block gt 12 5 Travel Calibration A caution This function strokes the valve over its full range Do not execute while valve is controlling the process Keep away from the movable parts to avoid injury Calibrate the travel of the valve stem i e the stroke of the valve as follows First set the valve stem to the desired position by changing the value of FINAL_VALUE value Next write the value from the following choices according to your purpose of calibration At this time the AO block and the transducer block need to be in the O S mode 1 off 2 0 point calibration calibrates only the 0 point and shifts the 100 point by the resulting amount of the change in 0 point while leaving the span unchanged 3 span calibration calibrates only the 100 point while leaving the 0 point unchanged 4 50 point calibration calibrates at the 50 point while leaving the 0 point and 100 point unchanged The 50 point calibration in other words linearity calibration is intended to minimize the linearity error at the 50 point Also if the feedback lever is slightly deviates from a horizontal level due to careless installation of the YVP110 positioner an error caused by this shift can be corrected by the 50 point calibration Note that carrying out travel calibration of Index 2 or 3 clears the 50 calibration result If you want to carry out the 50 point calibration do it after oth
30. 17 IS Function Block gt Mode O S Man Value e The previous value is output At startup the initial value is used Writable the operator may change the value oO ent Value specified by MIN Good gt the number of valid inputs If there is no valid input The previous value is output If the input status is bad or uncertain when Not writable the value of OP_SELECT is anything other than 0 with the exception of the case where the Uncertain as good bit in STATUS_OPTS is set If the value of OP_SELECT is greater than 8 e Zero which is the maximum number of inputs e Not writable Op SELECT is enabled e The value of the selected input is output e Not writable If the value is out of the SELECT_TYPE setting e The previous value is output range when the value of OP_SELECT is 0 e Not writable e The value of a valid input with the smallest input number is If SELECT_TYPE is First Good output e Not writable e The minimum value among the values of the valid inputs is If SELECT_TYPE is MINIMUM output e Not writable The maximum value among the values of the valid inputs is If SELECT_TYPE is MAXIMUM output e Not writable If SELECT_TYPE is MIDDLE There is an even multiple number of valid inputs Because two inputs are positioned in the middle of the values of even multiple valid inputs the average of the values of these two inputs is outpu
31. 2 or 3 the output characteristics of the barrier must be the type of trapezoid which are certified as the FISCO model e The safety barrier may include a terminator e More than one field instruments may be connected to the power supply line Note 3 Installation e Dust tight conduit seal must be used when installed in Class II and Class III environments e Control equipment connected to the Assoiciated Apparatus must not use or generate more than 250 Vrms or Vdc Installation should be in accordance with ANSI ISA RP12 6 Installation of Intrinsically Safe Systems for Hazardous Classified Locations and the National Electrical Code ANSI NFPA 70 Sections 504 and 505 e The configuration of Associated Apparatus must be Factory Mutual Research Approved under FISCO Concept e Associated Apparatus manufacturer s installation drawing must be followed when installing this equipment e The YVP series are approved for Class l Zone 0 applications If connecting AEx ib associated Apparatus or AEx ib I S Apparatus to the YVP series the l S circuit is only suitable for Class Zone 1 or Class L Zone 2 and is not suitable for Class Zone 0 or Class Division 1 Hazardous Classified Locations IM 21B04C01 01E Installation Diagram Intrinsically safe Division 1 Installation Terminator o Valve Positioner 10 o _ 0 Transmitter LES Ee _ 0
32. 2006 1 6 Add C FM Nonincendive approval 1 9 Add C CENELEC ATEX Type of Protection n 1 12 Add 1 10 Low Voltage Directive 2 1 Add appearance and part names of Double Acting Type 3 5 Add explanations of Double Acting Type to 3 2 3 A M Switching 4 1 Add explanations of Double Acting Type to 4 2 2 Pneumatic Piping 4 2 Add explanations of Double Acting Type to 4 2 2 Pneumatic Piping CAUTION 5 3 Add control parameters for Double Acting Type Add notes for Double Acting Type 5 4 Add Camflex Percentage Add SERVO_WARN_COUNT 6 2 Add explanations of Double Acting Type to 6 3 Part Replacement 6 3 Add 6 3 4 Tuning the Pressure Balance of Control Relay 7 1to7 7 Add specifications of Double Acting Type 9 6 to9 8 Add VIEW_4 8th Add Relative index 111 to 165 11 1 Add items of download to DEVICE_STATUS_1 11 2 Modify explanations for Servo Output Drift in DEVICE_STATUS_3 12 2 Add Camflex Percentage 12 4 Modify explanations for Servo Output Drift in XD_ERROR 12 5 Add SERVO_WARN_COUNT Add control parameters for Double Acting Type 17 1 Modify explanations for Servo Output Drift in 17 2 Integration Functions 17 3 Add notes of Code BP 18 2 Add explanations for the pressure balance of control relay 18 3 Add explanations for manual tuning A 8 Add Relative index 111 to 117 A 28 to A 35 Add APPENDIX 4 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD A 36 Add APPENDIX 5 POSION ADJUSTMENT OF FEEDBACK LEVER A 37 to A 43 Add APPEN
33. 40 to 185 F Double Acting Actuator 40 to 60 C 40 to 140 F for standard 10 to 85 C 14 to 185 F for high temperature use with option code HT Ambient Humidity Limits 5 to 95 RH at 40 C 104 F EMC Conformity Standards CE n200 EN61326 1 Class A Table 2 For use in industrial locations Degrees of Protection IP65 NEMA4X Connections Air Connection Rc 1 4 or 1 4 NPT female Electrical Connection G 1 2 1 2 NPT M20 and Pg13 5 female Pressure Gauge Connection Pressure With pressure gauge gauge connection Optional 1 5 f and Rc 1 8 female GP GM and GB Connections 6 Get 1 8 NPT female IGE lt 7 Standard Specifications gt 7 2 Mounting Front of Actuator with bracket Direct Connection for rotary valve Weight Single Acting Actuator 2 4 kg 5 3 Ib Double Acting Actuator 2 8 kg 6 2 Ib E Performance Specifications Linearity Single Acting Actuator 0 5 of Span including linkages Double Acting Actuator 1 0 of Span including linkages Hysteresis Single Acting Actuator 0 3 of Span Double Acting Actuator 0 5 of Span Ambient Temperature Effect 0 08 of Span C Position Effect 0 3 of Span 90 deg Vibration Effect 2 of Span at 2G 15 to 2000 Hz IM 21B04C01 01E lt 7 Standard Specifications gt 7 3 H Model and Suffix Codes Model Suffix Codes Description YVP11
34. 420 DOMAIN_HEADER 1 0 1 Header Version Number 0 2 Header Size 0 3 Manufacturer ID 4 Device Family 5 Device Type 6 Device Revision 0 T DD Revision 0 8 Software Revision 9 Software Name 10 Domain Name 430 DOMAIN_HEADER 2 0 1 Header Version Number 1 2 Header Size 44 3 Manufacturer ID 0x594543 4 Device Family DEV_TYPE of RB 5 Device Type DEV_TYPE of RB 6 Device Revision DEV_REV of RB 7 DD Revision DD_REV of RB 8 Software Revision SOFT_REV of RB 9 Software Name ORIGINAL 10 Domain Name Device name 440 DOMAIN Read write prohibited Get OD permitted IM 21B04C01 01E A 35 lt Appendix 4 Software Download gt A4 10 Comments on System Network Management VFD Parameters Relating to Software Download AA IMPORTANT Do not turn off the power to a field device immediately after changing parameter settings Data writing actions to the EEPROM are dual redandant to ensure reliability If the power is turned off within 60 seconds after setup the parameters may revert to the previous settings 1 DWNLD_PROPERTY Sub Size rare index Element Bytes Description 1 Download Class 1 Indicates the download class 1 Class 1 2 Write Rsp Returned For 1 Indicates whether a write response is returned to the ACTIVATE ACTIVATE command 1 Write Response Returned 3 Write Rsp Returned For 1 Indicates whether a write response is returned to the PREPARE PREPARE
35. AO BOCK aiai 12 1 12 2 2 Position to flow Rate Characteristic Conversion 12 2 12 2 3 FINAL _VALUE and Rang 0 cccccccccecceseceseeeseecseeseeeseeeseeseeeaeeses 12 2 12 2 4 Tight shut and Full open Actions 0 ccecceeceeceeeeeeteeeneeeeeseeeeeeeeaes 12 2 12 3 Backward Paty iscicscaccsicccscnes cass scascestencasecicatic aides sanedecutecasduesecndecsuecasdvecscntasetcne 12 2 12 3 1 FINAL POSITION _VALUE ois ccsectcesecae cei anein sciences 12 2 12 3 2 Limit e 12 2 12 4 Auto TUNING TT 12 3 12 5 Travel Calibration iis csiccscisccsdtieconssteteccsserconeseciecnacerssostasstecscsevsceessantrestansecertanne 12 4 12 6 Online DAG Oe gEEE ee 12 4 12 6 1 XDABRROR ws ticedvisevacevesvesdvisevecsvinvendvinvecctinvecdvinveclinvenvanventis 12 4 12 6 2 Fall sate ACO EE 12 5 12 6 3 Operation Result Integration ecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteesneeteeeseeeeneeeneees 12 5 12 6 4 Recording of EE ET 12 5 12 7 Control Eatatwetetseergeben eege eseou eege ee 12 5 12 8 Temperature and Pressure Measurementh cccecceeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeees 12 5 13 AO Function BlOGK i cieccscisiacescsentecegencentnsacteccnneccecntntenbsvestteaedriecnstactonnnes 13 1 13 1 STN eA sa en aca wn cu sna ww ncn cess neve ny ota eek wo op nate ate an ee em 13 1 13 2 MOOS E P a E A 13 1 13 3 Forward Pat iiiiiniiicieccssnvcssne vente cwsseeesseecanseenesectcsescendeeneeeessivestnedencesvaseetsseresnerexe 13 1 13 3 1 F ltstate gausen ere eseou ee aA AERA EAA
36. EEA 13 1 13 4 ACK WAN Pa th i iiaiai aa a a a Eea A EE RA EEES Ra EAE AEROB ANEREN 13 2 IM 21B04C01 01E 14 15 16 13 5 IO OPTS and STATUS OPUS 6 sccsciccscescsccnccestesaccccstceseesiecccccesectseestecasescevercnexs 13 2 13 6 Mode Shedding upon Computer Failure ccessceeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeeeneees 13 3 13 7 Initialization at Start cceecccseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeesaeeesseeeesneseseeeneeeeees 13 3 13 8 Alarm Processing iis jsesiseicatacs lt sccesines cnsncschcncyancenabee lt heeesdncrcscenesteresaeesesteeassenesa 13 3 DI Function BOCK iisccencicncvecesicesceceeresntazaiieiGensatstacenssdnansteoiabctessscuutecectenns 14 1 14 1 GO Me ial ss iciscnissssccsancsssceascetecxtesudncecsdncecuesscnankxusdetascassndecxesessnsnendhincxnseecnsnescasaccenees 14 1 14 2 WOO 5 E o5 coo seca E A r E sesesecens 14 1 14 3 PV Value PV_ EE 14 1 14 4 ell E 14 1 14 5 Etude EEN EES 14 2 14 6 IO_OPTS and STATUS _OPTS cccssceseesesseseeeneesseseeeseeneesseseeeneenaesenseeennenaets 14 2 14 7 Alarm ProcCeSsing sisisissctesscesstecccccetecseccecsccescececcessececcescetecsesceesccesseeeccessecssaeeate 14 2 14 7 1 ee E 14 2 14 7 2 Discrete Alan ca Seege e ccna eka EE dee ee aoa 14 2 OS Function BIOGK eegene 15 1 15 1 GTN eA 28a assem ht esc we ncn tsa ene ne S 15 1 15 2 E 15 1 15 3 OUTPUT PROCESSING cese cance tcuvecteccunteicteustessecunteuctcusaevscevsieuseensaeesces 15 1 15 4 Backward Path BKCAL_OUT
37. Fault State to value is set as true in O_OPTS 24 5024 FSTATE_VAL 0 Preset output level for fault state See above 25 5025 BKCAL_OUT Value to be input to BKCAL_IN of the downstream block used by the downstream block to prevent reset windup and perform bumpless transfer to closed loop control 26 5026 RCAS_IN Remote cascade setpoint set by the host computer etc 27 5027 SHED_OPT 1 Defines the mode shedding action to be taken upon occurrence of time out of communication in a mode using the remote setpoint 28 5028 RCAS_OUT Remote setpoint sent to a host computer etc 29 5029 UPDATE_EVT Shows the contents of an update event upon occurrence 30 5030 BLOCK_ALM Shows the contents of a block alarm upon occurrence IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 1 Function Block Parameters gt A 10 A1 4 Parameters of DI Block e Index Default Ces on pr D factory Write Description setting 0 6000 6100 BLOCK Block tag Information about this block including the block tag DD HEADER O S revision execution time i 6001 6101 IST REM 0 Incremented when a change is made to the parameter settings for the DI block to indicate the revision level of the settings and used to see whether there is a change in parameter settings 2 6002 6102 TAG_DESC Spaces Universal parameter storing the description o
38. For Double Acting Actuator For Double Acting Actuator and Option code X1 For Double Acting Actuator and Option code HT For Double Acting Actuator and Option code X1 HT Plate For Single Acting Actuator For Double Acting Actuator Gasket For Single Acting Actuator For Double Acting Actuator Screw M4x8 Control Relay Assembly For Single Acting Actuator For Single Acting Actuator and Option code X1 For Double Acting Actuator For Double Acting Actuator and Option code X1 For Double Acting Actuator and Option code HT For Double Acting Actuator and Option code X1 HT Filter O Ring Subject change without notice Printed in Japan elt CMPL 21B04C01 01E Revision Record Model YVP110 Advanced Valve Positioner Title Manual No IM 21B04C01 01E Edition Date Page Revised Item 1st July 2000 New Publication 2nd Apr 2001 1 2 1 8 EMC Conformity Standard Change standards 1 3 Add 1 9 Installation of Explosion Protected Type Positioner 15 2 Modify explanations for 15 5 PID Computation and 15 6 Control Output 15 5 Add Local override in 15 17 1 Block Alarm BLK_ALM 3rd July 2001 1 4 Add B CENELEC KEMA Flameproof type Add 1 9 3 JIS Certification 4 2 Add Wiring Instructions in 4 3 2 Precautions on Wiring Add 4 4 Grounding 6 1 Add CAUTION for flameproof type 7 3 Add Optional Specifications KF1 J
39. If there is an even number of valid inputs SELECTION IN_1 23 bb IN 2 345 p gt C OUT 19 55 N_3 45 O gt IN_5 IN_6 2 19 55 IN_4 2 34 IN_5 236 Cl p gt SELECTED 7 N_6 155 Cl p IN_7 32 5 IN_8 27 4 p gt Eg SELECT_TYPE Middle DISABLE_1 ON op STATUS_OPTS DISABLE_2 ON p 1 MIN_GOOD 1 DISABLE_3 OFF _ DISABLE_4 OFF O gt DISABLE_5 OFF _ gt DISABLE_6 OFF DISABLE_7 ON br DISABLE_8 ON _ gt OP_SELECT 0 gt F1707 ai Figure 17 7 Example 6 Because DISABLE_1 DISABLE_2 DISABLE_7 and DISABLE_8 are ON the corresponding IN_1 IN_2 IN_7 and IN_8 are disabled and the remaining four INs are enabled Furthermore because IN_3 has the maximum value and IN_4 has the minimum value among the valid INs they are not selected and the average of IN_5 and IN_6 inputs is output When the average is selected for OUT SELECTED is set to 0 IM 21B04C01 01E lt 17 IS Function Block gt 17 9 If there is an odd number of valid inputs IN_1 23 p gt IN_2 34 5 p gt IN_3 45 p IN_4 2 34 p gt IN_5 23 6 p gt IN_6 15 5 p gt IN_7 32 5 i IN_8 27 4 p gt DISAB
40. Input Selector AR One Arithmetic PID One or Two PID Control Functions Optional A NOTE IS AR and PID 2 blocks function blocks are applicable for only software download function EE Link Master Function Pressure Sensor Optional Flow Characterization Feature Linear Equal Percentage 50 1 Equal Percentage 30 1 Quick Opening Camflex Percentage Customer Characterization 10 segments Auto Tuning Function Valve Position Detecting Function Contiuous Diagnostics Function Total Travel Number of Cycles Time Open Time Close Time Near Close Housing Materials Case Aluminum die cast Paint Polyurethane resin baked finish Color Deep sea moss green Munsell 0 6GY3 1 2 0 or equivalent Communication Digital FOUNDATION fieldbus Supply Voltage 9 to 32V DC for general use and flameproof type 9 to 24V DC for intrinsically safe type Entity model 9 to 17 5V DC for intrinsically safe type FISCO model Conditions of Communication Line Supply Voltage 9 to 32V DC Current Draw Steady state 17 mA max Software download state 41 mA max Output Signals and Pressure Gauge Scale No gauge in standard Pressure gauge can be selected as option The supply pressure unit on the name plate for non gauge model is Pa Diaphragm Single acting Cylinder Calibration Supply Air Pressure Gauge Scale unit Pressure Supply Air Output Signal Pa 140 to 400 kPa 400 kPa 400 kPa kgf cm2 1 4 to 4 kgf fcm2 4 kg
41. Only the Propagate Fault Backward option is available in STATUS_ OPTS of the AO block Table 13 2 STATUS_OPTS of AO Block Bit Meaning Description 4 Propagate Stipulates the handling of the value Fault data status and related alarm of Backward BKCAL_OUT and RCAS_OUT to be performed If this option is true then Set the quality and sub status components of the status of BKCAL_OUT to Bad and sensor failure respectively Do nothing special for the BKCAL_OUT value If this option is false then Set the quality and sub status components of the status of BKCAL_OUT to Bad and non specific respectively Generates a block alarm IM 21B04C01 01E 13 3 lt 13 AO Function Block gt 13 6 Mode Shedding upon Computer Failure When the data status of RCAS _IN falls to Bad while the block in question is running in RCas remote cascade mode mode shedding occurs in accordance with the setting in SHED_OPT Table 13 3 shows the available selections for SHED OPT Man Higher priority level Auto Cas RCas ROut Lower priority level 2 Only when Auto is set as permitted mode NOTE If a control block is connected as a cascade primary block of the AO block a mode transition of the AO block to Cas occurs in the following sequence due to initialization of the cascade connection RCas Auto gt Cas 13 7 Initialization at Start To prevent a sudden change in output when
42. Range for IN 1 and 2 f l L l L l l o e 1 Range for nee Pd Sg l l l RANGE_LO RANGE_HI IN F1802 ai Figure 18 2 Range Extension Function and PV lt 18 AR Function Block gt 18 2 PV is a parameter with status information and PV status is determined by the value of g If g lt 0 5 The status of IN_LO is used If g 2 0 5 The status of IN is used Determination of the status is made with a hysteresis of 10 provided for 0 5 If RANGE_LO gt RANGE_HI the statuses of PV and OUT are Bad Configuration Error Then Configuration Error is output to BLOCK_ERR If there is only one main input the input is incorporated into the computation section as is not taking into account RANGE_HI and RANGE_LO Example Assuming that RANGE_HI 300 the following are established IN 310 IN LO 20 gt PV 310 IN 230 IN LO 20 gt g 230 20 300 20 0 75 PV 0 75 x 230 1 0 75 x 20 177 5 IN 90 IN_LO 20 g 90 20 300 20 0 25 PV 0 25 x 230 1 0 25 x 20 37 5 IN 19 IN_LO 10 gt PV 10 18 2 2 Auxiliary Inputs There are bias and gain parameters for the IN_1 IN_2 and IN_3 auxiliary inputs The following shows the equation using them t_i IN_i BIAS_IN_i x GAIN_IN_i The bias parameter is used for calculating absolute temperature or absolute pressure while the gain parameter is used for normalizat
43. Use WARNING e Electrostatic charge may cause an explosion hazard Avoid any actions that cause the generation of electrostatic charge such as rubbing with a dry cloth on coating face of product e When the lightning protector option is specified A the apparatus is not capable of withstanding the 500V insulation test required by EN60079 11 This must be taken into account when installing the apparatus e WHEN THE AMBIENT TEMP 270 C USE THE HEAT RESISTING CABLE AND CABLE GRAND290 C e POTENTAIAL ELECTROSTATIC CHARGING HAZARD SEE USER S MANUAL Note 9 Ex nA Installation e Screws of terminals for field wiring connections shall be tightened with specified torque values 1 2 N m A WARNING When using a power supply not having a nonincendive circuit please pay attention not to ignite in the surrounding flammable atmosphere In such a case we recommend using wiring metal conduit in order to prevent the ignition lt 1 Notes on Handling gt 1 1 0 Note 10 Ex nA Specific Conditions of Use A WARNING e Electrostatic charge may cause an explosion hazard Avoid any actions that cause the generation of electrostatic charge such as rubbing with a dry cloth on coating face of product e WHEN THE AMBIENT TEMP 270 C USE THE HEAT RESISTING CABLE AND CABLE GRAND290 C e POTENTAIAL ELECTROSTATIC CHARGING HAZARD SEE USER S MANUAL e DO NOT OPEN IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE WHEN ENERGIZED 2 Ele
44. and very large valve and full open positions the rotation angle span F exceeds 100 degrees 255 Self check only Execution of self E diagnostics only without 102 50 angle error E VALVE_TYPE is linear and x the rotation angle at the parameter tuning 50 position exceeds 25 degrees 103 Linear adjust error E FINAL_VALUE value falls IMPORTANT outside 50 10 at 50 position Auto Tuning in YVP 110 sets the 0 point at the 120 Offset E Offset measurement has position where the valve is fully closed and 100 oe BS point at the position where the valve stem stops 121 Gain measurement E Gain measurement has against the mechanical stopper fully open If it failed error failed is necessary to adjust the zero point and span 122 Response speed E Response speed measurement failed measurement has failed precisely to the rated stroke of the valve carry error out travel calibration which is described later in 123 Hysteresis E Hysteresis measurement this chapter after the Auto Tuning al failed has failed 255 In operation Auto tuning is being The result of auto tuning which is written to AUTO executed TUNE_RESULT may be an error or warning An 4 Number 103 is not shown for AUTO_TUNE_RESULT error invalidates the tuning and does not update the Number 1 through 44 and 120 through 123 are not shown for TRAVEL_CALIB_RESULT parameter settings 2 Estands for Error and W stands for Warning IM 21B04C01 01E
45. and will void the certification 6 Name Plate e Name plate for e Name plate for intrinsically safe type flameproof type gt r gt F9176LL F9176LK YVP KS25 YVP KF2 ea aaa ZN WARNING DONT OPEN WHEN ENERGIZED WHEN THE AMBIENT TEMP 270 C USE THE HEAT RESISTING CABLE 290 C AFTER DE ENERGIZING DELAY 5 MINUTES 11 1D Ex iaD 20 IP65 T100 C Tamb 40 to 60 C BEFORE OPENING 114D Ex tD A20 IP65 T100 C Tamb 40 to 80 C WHEN THE AMBIENT Ti ENCLOSURE IP65 For No KEMA QBATEXO114 X 111G Ex ia IBMIC T4 Tamb 40 to 60 C HE Al EMP270 C USE THE HEAT RESISTING CABLE amp CABLE GLAND 290 C Lee POTENTIAL ELECTROSTATIC CHARGING HAZARD i 1 2W Ci 1 76nF LisOuH SEE USER S MANUAL BEFORE USE field device No KEMA 10ATEX0023X rom Ex d IIC T6 T5 Gb SUPPLY 32V DC MAX Lu cu A Tamb 40 TO 65 C T6 80 C TS ENCLOSURE IP 65 C amp ven amp N200 Ce ee 112G VALVE POSITIONER Onzo meng VALVE POSITIONER YVP110 STYLE SUPPLY STYLE NO SUPPLY INPUT Foundation Fieldbus NO 9 17 5 24 V DC Ex ia iaD 33 DC Ex tD AN INPUT 9 32 V DC Foundation Fieldbus YOKOGAWA aco i Janan O Tokyo 1808750 Japan Made in Japan YOKOGAWA Made Japan O Tokyo 180 8750 yapay Made in Japan A Sas e Name plate for KN25 Ex ic Ex nA e F9176MQ YVP KN25 WARNING WHEN THE AMBIENT TEMP270 C USE THE HEAT RESISTING CABLE amp CABLE GLA
46. are preferable Temperature 40 to 85 C Humidity 5 to 100 RH at 40 C 3 The performance of the positioner may be impaired if stored in an area exposed to direct rain and water To avoid damage to the positioner install it immediately after removal from the shipping container Follow wiring instructions in this manual 1 4 Choosing the Installation Location Although the advanced valve positioner is designed to operate in a vigorous environment to maintain stability and accuracy the following is recommended 1 Ambient Temperature It is preferable not to expose the instrument to extreme temperatures or temperature fluctuations If the instrument is exposed to radiation heat a thermal protection system and appropriate ventilation is recommended 2 Environmental Requirements Do not allow the positioner to be installed in a location that is exposed to corrosive atmospheric conditions When using the positioner in a corrosive environment ensure the location is well ventilated The unit and its wiring should be protected from exposure to rainwater 3 Impact and Vibration It is recommended that the positioner is installed in a location that is subject to a minimum amount of impact and vibration 1 5 Use of a Transceiver Although the positioner is designed to resist influence from high frequency noise use ofa transceiver in the vicinity of installation may cause problems Installing the transmitter in
47. being 6 Channel 6 1 0x80 Unused executed 7 Channel 7 1 0x80 Unused 8 Channel 8 1 0x80 Unused 14 DImeScheduleDescriptor 11 PlmeBasicInfo This parameter exists for the same number as the total number of domains and each describes the ane Element Ise Value Description LAS schedule downloaded to the corresponding 7 HEEN CO SC domain For the domain to which a schedule l 1 Full duplex has not yet been downloaded the values in this 2 LoopBackMode 1 Jo 0 Disabled parameter are all zeros 1 MAU 3 XmitEnabled 14 0x01 Channel 1 is index enabled 1 version Indicates the version A RcvEnebled 1 lox01 Channel1 is number of the LAS enabled schedule downloaded to the 5 PreferredReceive 1 0x01 Channel corresponding domain Channel is used for 2 Macrocycle Indicates the macro cycle reception Duration of the LAS schedule 6 Mediatype Selected 1 0x49 Wire medium Ge voltage mode and 31 25 kbps 3 _ TimeResolution Indicates the time resolution are selected that is required to execute the 7 ReceiveSelect 1 0x01 Channel 1 SE FE S is used for reception IM 21B04C01 01E 15 Domain Read write impossible get OD possible Carrying out the GenericDomainDownload command from a host writes an LAS schedule to Domain A2 6 FAQs Q1 Whenthe LAS stops a YVP does not back it up by becoming the LAS Why Is that YVP running as an LM Check that the value of BootOperatFunctionalClass index 3
48. change in control output APVn change in measured controlled value PVn PVn 1 AT control period period_of_execution in block header K proportional gain GAIN 100 proportional band UE integral time RESET TD derivative time RATE The subscripts n and n 1 represent the sampling time and thus PVn and PVn 1 denote the PV value sampled most recently and the PV value sampled at the preceding control period respectively The table below shows the PID control parameters Table 16 1 PID Control Parameters Parameter Description Valid Range GAIN Proportional gain 0 05 to 20 RESET Integral time 0 1 to 10 000 seconds RATE Derivative time 0 to infinity 16 6 Control Output The final control output value OUT is computed based on the change in control output AMVn which is calculated at each control period in accordance with the aforementioned algorithm The PID block in a YVP110 performs the velocity type output action for the control output This means that the PID block determines the value of the new control output OUT by adding the change in control output calculated in the current control period AMVn to the current read back value of the MV OUT MVRB BKCAL_IN This action can be expressed as OUT BKCAL_IN AMVn AMVn AMVn which is scaled by PV_SCALE and OUT_SCALE 16 7 Direction of Control Action The direction of the control action is determined by the Direct A
49. deviation is TH continuously equal to or greater than DEVIATION_LIM has reached the time set for the first value in this parameter a block alarm is generated If it has reached the time set for the second value the instrument transfers to fault state Negative value means off 90 2090 RELEASE As specified Used to release the block from the fail safe state FAILSAFE upon ordering When the value of this parameter is 3 writing 1 will release the block from the fail safe state 1 clear non latch normal state 2 active latched during fail safe state 3 clear latched cause has been cleared but fail safe action is still on 91 2091 MODEL As specified Model code upon ordering 92 2092 DEV_OPTIONS 0x0000 Indicates whether any software options are or 0x0001 if provided PID option is specified 93 2093 PRESS_SENS 1 Indicates whether a pressure sensor is equipped INSTALLED 1 equipped 2 not equipped 94 2094 ACTUATOR_TYPE __ As specified Actuator type upon ordering 1 single acting 2 double acting 95 2095 RELAY_TYPE 1 Control relay type 1 direct acting 96 2096 SIGN_MEAS_EXEC 1 O S Carries outs signature measurement 1 off 97 2097 SIGN_MEAS 1 Indicates the signature measurement status and RESULT result 1 succeeded 98 2098 SIGN_MEAS_STATE 0 Indicates the progress of signature measurement 99 2099 SIGN_MEAS_ 0 Indicates the number of measured data sets The COUNTER count is rese
50. generated as a block alarm Update alerts Generated whenever a change is made to the settings of the certain parameters Table 10 3 shows the elements composing an alert object IM 21B04C01 01E lt 10 Actions of YVP110 During Operation gt 10 3 Table 10 3 Alert Objects Subindex E elole g lt 2 Parameter Description ge T Name P SES 2 2 8 Edisib 1 1 Block Index Leading Index to the block in which the alert has occurred 2 2 Alert Key Copy of ALERT_KEY 3 313 Standard Type of the alert that occurred Type Mfr Type The name of the alert defined alala in the device description DD file written by the device manufacturer 5 51 15 Message Cause of the alert Type 6 6 6 Priority Priority level of the alert Time Stamp Time when the alert occurred aa first Subcode Subcode that indicates the 8 8 cause of the alert 9 9 Value Value of the related data Relative Relative Index to the related 10 10 Index data 8 Static Value of ST_REV in the block Revision 11111 9 Unit Index Unit code of the related data 10 3 Simulation Function The YVP110 has a function to simulate input signals to its internal function blocks and makes the blocks to carry out the specified actions with the simulated input signals in order to allow for testing applications in the host computer or alarm handling processes Each function block has a parameter to switch on off the si
51. great care during mounting wiring and piping Safety requirements also place restrictions on maintenance and repair activities Users absolutely must read Installation and Operating Precautions for JIS Flameproof Equipment at the end of this manual A caution When selecting cables for TIIS flameproof type positioners use cables having a maximum allowable heat resistance of at least 70 C IM 21B04C01 01E lt 2 Part Names gt 2 1 2 Part Names 2 1 Appearance and Part Names Single Acting Type Feedback lever Optional Terminal cover For mounting Normally not used Electrical Air supply connection Air supply connection connection Feedback shaft Output pressure Control relay connection Ground terminal Output pressure Air supply pressure gauge For M8 mounting bolt gauge Optional Optional Double Acting T eege i Feedback lever Optional For mounting Terminal cover Normally not used Name plate Output pressure connection gt E Output pressure k A Air supply Air supply gauge Optional oe connection connection IN 4 Za N Electrical K connection Output presSure Ef Feedback shaft Output pressure gauge Option connection Ground terminal Control relay Output pressure Air supply pressure gauge i gauge Optional Optional SS For M8 mounting bolt F0201 ai 2 2 Block Diagram Supply Air Pressure Control Relay I P
52. gt DISABLE_4 ON p gt DISABLE_5 OFF p gt DISABLE_6 ON p gt DISABLE_7 ON p DISABLE_8 ON p OP_SELECT 1 p gt F1702 ai Figure 17 2 Example 1 This example restricts the valid inputs using DISABLE_n and the inputs are enabled only at DISABLE_3 and DISABLE_5 Because the effective number of MIN_Good is 3 the input specified by OP_SELECT will not be output IM 21B04C01 01E lt 17 IS Function Block gt 17 4 17 3 Selection The following processing is performed after completing input processing If the number of valid inputs is less than the value of MIN_Good no input selection is made 17 3 1 OP_SELECT Handling When a value other than 0 that is 1 to 8 is selected for OP_SELECT The IS block selects the input of the number specified by OP_SELECT regardless of the setting of SELECT _ TYPE propagates the value of that input to OUT and transmits the input number to SELECTED SELECTION IN_1 23 j IN_2 34 5 p x Se IN_3 45 p IN_4 2 34 p deeg o gt SELECTED 3 IN_6 15 5 p IN_7 32 5 yp aS SELECT_TYPE Minimum DISABLE_1 OFF gt STATUS_OPTS DISABLE_2 OFF gt 1 MIN_GOOD 1 DISABLE_3 OFF p DISABLE_4 OFF p DISABLE_5 OFF p DISABL
53. i The exception is that if the input status is Bad Not Connected INPUT_OPTS does not apply and the input is considered bad as is 18 2 4 Relationship between the Main Inputs and PV The value and PV status are determined by the statuses of two main inputs INPUT_OPTS and RANGE_LO and RANGE_HI e Ifthe statuses of two main inputs are both good or anything other than good See 18 2 1 Main Inputs e H only one of two main inputs has good status after application of INPUT_OPTS the PV value is determined as follows e Ifthe status of IN is good and that of IN_LO is anything other than good IN gt RANGE_LO PV IN IN lt RANGE LO See 18 2 1 e Ifthe status of IN is anything other than good and that of IN_LO is good IN_LO lt RANGE_HI PV IN_LO IN_LO 2RANGE_H See 18 2 1 If the status of IN is good and that of IN_LO is anything other than good PV g x IN 1 g x IN_LO PV IN rs IN RANGE_LO If the status of IN is anything other than good and that of IN_LO is good PV IN_LO PV g x IN 1 g x IN LO d s IN_LO RANGE_HI F1803 ai 18 3 Computation Section 18 3 1 Computing Equations This subsection shows computing equations used in the computation section 1 Flow compensation linear func PV x f f t_1 t_2 2 Flow compensation square root func PV x f f sqrt t_1 t_2 t_
54. larger value is recommended to avoid unnecessary mode transfer which is caused when subscriber failed to receive data correctly Link objects are not factory set 9 6 2 Trend Object It is possible to set the parameter so that the function block automatically transmits Trend YVP110 has seven or twelve with EE Trend objects five or ten with EE of them are for analog data and two of them are for discrete data A single Trend object specifies the trend of one parameter Each Trend object has the parameters listed in Table 9 6 The first four parameters are the items to be set Table 9 6 Parameters for Trend Objects Sub index Parameters Block Index Description Sets the leading index of the function block that takes a trend Parameter Relative Index Sets the index of parameters taking a trend by a value relative to the beginning of the function block Sample Type Specifies how trends are taken Choose one of the following 2 types 1 Sampled upon execution of a function block 2 The average value is sampled Sample Interval Specifies sampling intervals in units of 1 32 ms Set the integer multiple of the function block execution cycle 5 Last Update The last sampling time 6 to 21 List of Status Status part of a sampled parameter 21 to 37 List of Samples Data part of a sampled parameter Objects are not fact
55. lt 19 Diagnostics gt 19 2 Each integrated value is associated with a parameter specifying a threshold Setting the desired value for a threshold will raise a block alarm when that value is reached The total travel is useful for various purposes such as for anticipating possible degradation of the valve and determining appropriate timing for maintenance To reset these integrated values write 0 to the respective parameters Use caution as the previous value cannot be restored after being reset 19 3 Signature Measurement Functions Acquisition of detailed data is essential to ensure that changes in valve s characteristics are captured and on target maintenance is performed The signature functions measure the input to position characteristics of the valve and the input to position characteristics and step response of the positioner while off line As for a valve s input to position characteristics a function of performing in detail measurement is provided to enable miniscule changes to be captured without fail Nevertheless since a vast amount of measured data cannot be stored in the limited memory of the positioner and most of the data would be lost in the event of a power failure measured data should be uploaded from a host as necessary Further the data thus uploaded needs to be processed for analyses These requirements make it difficult to use a general purpose tool or application for these tasks ValveNavi R2 2
56. modification for each parameter may cause inconsistent operation 9 5 2 Function Block Execution Control According to the instructions given in Section 9 3 set the execution cycle of the function blocks and schedule of execution IM 21B04C01 01E lt 9 Configuration gt 9 5 9 6 Block Setting Set the parameter for function block VFD 9 6 1 Link Object Link object combines the data voluntarily sent by the function block with VCR YVP110 has 25 or 50 with EE link objects A single link object specifies one combination Each link object has the parameters listed in Table 9 5 Parameters must be changed together for each VCR because the modifications made to each parameter may cause inconsistent operation Table 9 5 Link Object Parameters Sub index 1 Parameters Locallndex Description Sets the index of function block parameters to be combined set 0 for Trend and Alert VerNumber Sets the index of VCR to be combined If set to 0 this link object is not used Remotelndex Sets the index of remote object associated with this link object ServiceOperation Set one of the following Set only one each for link object for Alert or Trend 0 Undefined 1 Local 2 Publisher 6 Alert 7 Trend D StaleCountLimit Set the maximum number of consecutive stale input values which may be received before the input status is set to BAD Setting of 2 or
57. number of the domain header to which the download Index is performing 6 Activated Domain Header 4 Indicates the index numbers of the domain header currently running Index 7 Domain Name 8 Indicates the domain name With this product Domain Name indicates the field device name IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 4 Software Download A 36 3 DOMAIN_HEADER Sub index Element Bytes Description 1 Header Version Number 2 Indicates the version number of the header 2 Header Size 2 Indicates the header size 3 Manufacturer ID 6 Indicates the value of resource block s MANUFAC_ID manufacturer ID as character string data 4 Device Family 4 Indicates the device family With this product Device Family indicates the value of resource block s DEV_TYPE as character string data 5 Device Type 4 Indicates the value of resource block s DEV_TYPE as character string data 6 Device Revision 1 Indicates the value of resource block s DEV_REV 7 DD Revision 1 Indicates the value of resource block s DD_REV 8 Software Revision 8 Indicates the value of resource block s SOFT_REV 9 Software Name 8 Indicates the attribute of the binary file With this product Software Name indicates either of the following ORIGINAL followed by one space Original file UPDATE followed by two spaces Update file 10 Domain Name 8 Indicates the domain name With this product Domain Name indicate
58. of OP_SELECT is 0 Auto IM 21B04C01 01E lt 17 IS Function Block gt 17 13 17 4 3 STATUS_OPTS Bit Description Use Uncertainas Causes all inputs OP_SELECT Good IN_n and DISABLE_n the status of which is uncertain to be handled as good NC status inputs and the others to be handled as bad status inputs Uncertain if Man When the mode is Man the mode status of OUT is interpreted as uncertain This does not apply to SELECTED 17 5 Application Example The following describes the temperature control system of a fixed bed type reactor In this case there are instances where the point showing the maximum temperature changes due to catalytic deterioration raw material flow etc Therefore a large number of measurement points are provided and the maximum value obtained among these measurement points is input to the controller to control reactor temperature Raw material Joysees 20IEIEH Refrigerant F1710 ai Figure 17 10 Temperature Control System of a Fixed Bed type Reactor An M IS h PID AO OUT FH E N14 out Hin out Hcas_in i kl Ee BKCAL_IN F4BKCAL_OUT F1711 ai Figure 17 11 Example of Scheduling Al1 Temperature 1 Al2 Temperature 2 Al3 Temperature 3 Al4 Temperature 4 IS SELECT_
59. of whether a device on the same segment is live or not The leading bit corresponds to the device address 0x00 and final bit to OxFF The value of LiveListStatusArrayVariable in the case where devices having the addresses 0x10 and 0x15 in the fieldbus segment is shown below 0x00 00 84 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Bit correspondences 00000000000 0x00 0000010000100 0x10 0x15 5 MaxTokenHoldTimeArray An 8 64 byte array variable in which each set of 2 bytes represents the delegation time set as an octet time assigned to a device The delegation time denotes a time period that is given to a device by means of a PT message sent from the LAS within each token circulation cycle The leading 2 bytes correspond to the device address 0x00 and the final 2 bytes to the device address OxFF Specify the subindex to access this parameter 6 BootOperatFunctionalClass Writing 1 to this parameter in a device and restarting the device causes the device to start as a basic device On the contrary writing 2 to this parameter and restarting the device causes the device to start as an LM 7 CurrentLinkSettingRecord and ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord CurrentLinkSettingRecord indicates the bus parameter settings currently used ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord indicates the bus parameter settings to be used when the device becomes the LAS Thus when a device is the LAS its C
60. open 12 is specified to be linked is not open 0x00000008 Link Op 13 The VCR 1 to which link object not open 13 is specified to be linked is not open 0x00000004 Link Obj 14 The VCR 1 to which link object not open 14 is specified to be linked is not open 0x00000002 Link Obj 15 The VCR 1 to which link object not open 15 is specified to be linked is not open 0x00000001 Link Obj 16 The VCR 1 to which link object not open 16 is specified to be linked is not open 1 VCR Virtual Coummunications Relationship Table 11 3 DEVICE_STATUS_1 with EE Indication Hexadecimal when Device Meaning Indication Description is installed 0x80000000 0x40000000 0x20000000 0x10000000 0x08000000 0x04000000 Abnormal Abnormal boot process Boot Process 0x02000000 Download fail Download fail 0x01000000 Download Download incomplete incomplete 0x00800000 Sim enable The SIM ENABLE switch on the Jmpr On amplifier is set to ON 0x00400000 RB in O S The Resource block is in O S mode mode 0x00200000 0x00100000 0x00080000 EEPROM EEPROM failure Failure 0x00040000 0x00020000 0x00010000 0x00008000 Link The VCR 1 to which link object Obj 1 17 33 49 1 17 33 or 49 is specified to be not open linked is not open 0x00004000 Link The VCR 1 to which link object Obj 2 18 34 50 2 18 34 or 50 is specified to be not open linked is not open 0x00002000 Link The VCR 1 to w
61. other than good and that of IN_LO is good IN_LO lt RANGE_H The status of IN LO applies IN_LO 2 RANGE _HI See 18 2 1 Main Inputs The exception is that if RANGE_LO gt RANGE_ HI the PV status is made Bad Configuration Error The input status irrelevant to the computing equation selected by ARITH_TYPE will be ignored and does not affect other statuses The statuses of outputs OUT Status and PRE_OUT Status are interpreted as the status of the worst input among the statuses of PV and auxiliary inputs IN_1 IN_2 and IN_3 to which INPUT_OPTS has been applied Example Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 PV Good IN_1 Uncertain IN_2 Bad IN_3 Bad Handled asa IN_1 fe if No option INPUT its status is OPTS uncertain Handled as a good IN_2 input if its No option status is bad IN 3 No option 1 Flow compensation linear in CRETE 18 3 1 ee het OUT Status Good Uncertain Bad IM 21B04C01 01E lt 19 Diagnostics gt 19 1 19 Diagnostics 19 1 Overview A spotlighted benefit of fieldbus is the capability of gaining a wealth of information from the field via field devices Particularly for a control valve it is expected to become possible to determine the status of valves which have been difficult to identify without traveling to the field and physically examining them to some extent from a distant control room through t
62. packing and load characteristics of the cylinders used but in general approx 50 to 90 of the supply air pressure is said to be appropriate The pressure balance of the YVP110 is set to approx 75 at the time of shipment It is possible to reduce the hunting phenomenon and air consumption by adjusting the balance pressure However if the pneumatic piping is connected to the valve actuator the pressure of a cylinder on one side becomes higher and the balance cannot be maintained If you want to increase the balance pressure turn the screw for adjusting the balance pressure shown in Figure 6 6 counterclockwise If you want to decrease the balance pressure turn the screw clockwise At this time you do must not to loosen the screw beside the adjustment screw Si Ta Control relay al Pressure balance adjustment screw Do not loosen this screw 100 QUT2 OUT1 Output air lt Pressure balance point pressure 0 Servo Output F0606 ai Figure 6 6 Tuning the Pressure Balance of Control Relay IM 21B04C01 01E lt 7 Standard Specifications gt 7 1 7 Standard Specifications E Standard Specifications Applicable Control Valve Linear or Rotary Motion Control Valve Diaphragm Actuator and Cylinder Functions Function Blocks AO One Analog Output DI Two Discrete Inputs OS One Splitter Block IS One
63. port is capped with a blind plug Thus to use the rear SUP port remove the blind plug and cap the side SUP port with it At this time be very careful that no foreign matter or dust caught in the sealing tape is allowed to enter inside the pipe Figure 4 1 shows the pneumatic piping ports The port specification can be chosen when ordering the YVP110 IM 21B04C01 01E lt 4 Wiring and Piping gt 4 2 rza T Gi D Output pressure port OUT2 Output pressure port Applicable only for Double OUT1 Acting Type Air supply port SUP F0401 ai Figure 4 1 Pneumatic Piping Ports A caution e To obtain the maximum air processing flow rate of the YVP110 the inner diameter of the piping tube needs to be at least 6 mm When the YVP110 is combined with a high capacity actuator and a minimum response speed is required use a tube whose inner diameter is 6 mm or larger e Do not use an unnecessarily long tube or piping as it will decrease the air flow rate thus leading to a decrease in response speed e Perform sufficient flushing of the piping tubes and fittings before use to ensure that no foreign matter such as metal refuse may enter the piping e When performing the piping connection be sufficiently careful that a piece of sealing tape or other solid or fluid sealin
64. schedule data server The schedule data can be equalized only when the Domain Download command is carried out from outside the LM in question The version of the schedule is usually monitored but no action takes place even when it changes 7 Live list equalization Transmits SPDU messages to LMs to equalize live lists 8 LAS transfer Transfers the right of being the LAS to another LM 9 Reading writing of See Section A2 5 NMIB for LM 10 Round Trip Delay Not yet supported in the current Reply RR Reply to version DLPDU 11 Long address Not yet supported in the current version IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 2 Link Master Functions gt A 21 A2 5 LM Parameters A2 5 1 LM Parameter List The tables below show LM parameters of a YVP positioner Meanings of Access column entries RW read write possible R read only index Parameter Name Sub parameter Name Sub Index Default Factory Access Remarks SM Setting 362 DLME_LINK_MASTER_CAPABILITIES_VARIABLE 0x04 RW 363 DLME_LINK_ 0 RW MASTER_INFO_ 1 MaxSchedulingOverhead 0 RECORD 2 DefMinTokenDelegTime 100 3 DefTokenHoldTime 300 4 TargetTokenRotTime 4096 5 LinkMaintTokHoldTime 400 6 TimeDistributionPeriod 5000 7 MaximumInactivityToClaimLasDelay 8 8 LasDatabaseStatusSpduDistributionPeriod 6000 364 PRIMARY_
65. the AO block carries out the specified actions for the first time after the power is turned on it 1 Equalizes SP to PV if the Faultstate Type option bit no 7 in O_OPTS is false 2 Equalizes OUT to READBACK If the Faultstate Type option bit no 7 in O_OPTS is true it restores FSTATE_VAL in SP 13 8 Alarm Processing When a condition shown in the table below is met the AO block changes the bit statuses of BLOCK ERROR accordingly and generates a block alarm Table 13 4 BLOCK_ERROR in AO Block Name of Error 7 Bit Represented Condition SIMULATE is active Fault state is on and Propagate Fault Backward is false 2 Simulate Active 4 Local Override Input Failure process variable has BAD status Propagate Fault Backward in STATUS_OPTS is false and the sub status component of the status of READBACK is setting for the AO block Table 13 3 SHED_OPT of AO Block bit Available Setting Actions upon Computer for SHED_OPT Failure 1 Normal shed Sets MODE_BLK actual to normal return Cas 1 and leaves MODE __ BLK target unchanged 2 Normal shed no Sets both MODE_BLK actual return and MODE_BLK target to Cas 2 Shed to Auto Sets MODE_BLK actual to normal return Auto 2 and leaves MODE BLK target unchanged 4 Shed to Auto no Sets both MODE_BLK actual return and MODE_BLK target to Auto 2 5 Shed to Manual Sets MODE_BLK actual to normal return Man and leaves MODE BLK t
66. the relevant operation has been set If no bit is set it is evident that the operations have been executed successfully 13 17513 INPUT_ 0 Determines whether an input is used as a good input OPTS when the input status is bad or uncertain Bit Function 0 Handles IN as good input if its status is uncertain 1 Handles IN_LO as good input if its status is uncertain 2 Handles IN_1 as good input if its status is uncertain 3 Handles IN_1 as good input if its status is bad 4 Handles IN_2 as good uncertain 5 Handles IN_2 as good 6 Handles IN_3 as good input if its status is input if its status is bad input if its status is uncertain 7 Handles IN_3 as good input if its status is bad 8 to Reserved 15 IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 1 Function Block Parameters gt A 17 pies Index Parameter ale geng Write Description ndex Name Range setting 14 17514 IN 0 Input block 15 17515 IN_LO 0 Input for a low range transmitter This is used for the range extension function 16 17516 IN_1 0 Auxiliary input 1 17 17517 IN_ 2 0 Auxiliary input 2 18 17518 IN_3 0 Auxiliary input 3 19 17519 RANGE_HI 0 High limit for switching to
67. the same way to negate the effect At this time you do not need to change the values of X_BST_ON_THRESHOLD and X_BST_OFF_THRESHOLD Theses parameters are valid only for double acting actuators SERVO_ _SLEEP_LMT Tuning range 0 to 10 sec Default 0 sec If the deviation changes the integration operation is stopped for the time of SERVO_I_SLEEP_LMT to reduce excessive integral components IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 6 Manual Tuning Guideline gt A 43 If the hysteresis of a valve is large the valve may not react for a while after an input change and a delay in response may occur This delay in response is accompanied by a large deviation and the accumulation of excessive integral components can cause an overshoot This parameter is effective in cases such as this If the deviation from the set point value exceeds the SERVO_DEADBAND this function starts If 0 is set to SERVO_DEADBAND this function is invalid Set point FA0608 ai SERVO_P_ALPHA Tuning range 0 to 100 Default 0 Setting this parameter adds more values to the proportional term for a large step compared to a small step Use this parameter when a large value cannot be set to the proportional gain because of the large hysteresis of a value and the response speed for a large step is insufficient A usual operation in the proportional term covers the deviation only however unless 0 is set for this parameter a value calculated based on th
68. the table below Also note that a change in the number of parameters or blocks requires the DD and capabilities files corresponding to the new software revision IM 21B04C01 01E A 32 lt Appendix 4 Software Download gt Table A4 1 Contents of Software Update Actions after Software Update Action Re setup of parameters not needed Setup of the added parameter needed Reengineering and setup of the added block s parameters needed Reengineering needed Does not change the number of parameters Adds a block parameter Adds a block Changes the number of system network management VFD parameters A4 7 Troubleshooting For information on the download tool s error messages see also the software s User s Manual Table A4 2 Problems after Software Update Cause The selected download file is not for the selected field device You attempted to update the device revision by downloading a file which is not an original file The selected field device does not support software downloading Symptom Remedy Check SOFTDWN_ERROR in the resource block and obtain the correct file Check SOFTDWN_ERROR in the resource block and obtain the original file An error occurs before starting a download disabling the download An error occurs after starting a download disabling the download Check whether the option code EE is included in the model and suffix codes of the device
69. the valve to the full open position There is a hysteresis of 1 at the release time If the value of FINAL_VALUE becomes 1 less than the value set in this parameter this function is released 16 2016 FINAL_VALUE_ If the value of FINAL_VALUE is less than the CUTOFF_LO value set in this parameter the YVP110 moves the valve to the shut off position There is a hysteresis of 1 at the release time If the value of FINAL_VALUE becomes 1 greater than the value set in this parameter this function is released 17 2017 FINAL_POSITION_ Stores the position data read by the valve position VALUE sensor 18 2018 SERVO_GAIN 1 120 Static control loop gain set by auto tuning 0 5 to 1300 19 2019 SERVO_RESET 1 15 sec Integral time set by auto tuning 20 2020 SERVO_RATE 1 0 22 sec Derivative time set by auto tuning 21 2021 ACT_FAIL_ACTION 1 Specifies the actuator action direction in case of losing of air supply pressure 1 Air to Open 2 Air to Close 22 2022 ACT_MAN_ID ID of actuator manufacturer 23 2023 ACT_MODEL_NUM _ Null Model number of actuator 24 2024 ACT_SN 0 Serial number of actuator 25 2025 VALVE_MAN_ID 0 ID of valve manufacturer 26 2026 VALVE_MODEL_ Null Model number of valve NUM 27 2027 VALVE_SN 0 Serial number of valve 28 2028 VALVE_TYPE 1 O S Valve type 1 linear motion valve 2 rotary motion valve 29 2029 XD_CAL_LOC Null Shows and is used to record the location where the positioner w
70. to the device hardware side YVP110 as a valve positioner are packed in the 12 2 1 Input from AO Block transducer block Major functions of the transducer blocks include The OUT value of the AO block is input to the e Transmission and reception of setpoint and transducer block This input action is halted when readback signals for valve position e The channel number of the AO block is not set e Setpoint high low limiters as 1 or e Auto tuning e The AO block is in O S mode e Valve tight shut and full open actions e Valve position to flow rate characteristics conversion e Travel calibration e Diagnostics of valve and positioner e Valve position limit switches e Pressure and temperature measurement Based on the input value from the AO block transducer block e Performs the flow rate to valve position conversion e Limits the setpoint within a specified range and e Performs tight shut or full open action as necessary pressure measurement requires the optional sensor The input from the AO block is always a percentage e Fail safe value where the transducer block always regards 0 to be the shut off position Make The transducer block in a YVP110 is connected the correct settings at initial setup according to to anAO function block and two DI blocks via its the specifications of the valve in reference with channels as shown below Chapter 5 Setup Table 12 1 Correspondence between Channels and I O Signals C
71. value of Manual if BAD MODE_BLK target to Man when IN IN falls to Bad status 9 Target to next Automatically changes the value permitted of MODE_BLK target to Auto or to mode if BAD Man if Auto is not set in Permitted CAS IN when CAS _IN falls to Bad status 16 15 Auto Fallback Auto fallback denotes an action in which a PID block changes mode from Cas to Auto and continues automatic PID control with the user set setpoint To enable the auto fallback action to take place e The Target to next permitted mode if BAD CAS IN option must be preset to true in STATUS OPTS AND e Auto must be preset in MODE_BLK permitted If the above settings are made auto fallback takes place automatically when the following condition is met e CAS_IN status data status of cascade setpoint is Bad except when the control action bypass is on 16 16 Mode Shedding upon Computer Failure When 1 the data status of RCAS_IN which is the setting received from a computer as the setpoint SP falls to Bad while the PID block is running in the RCas remote cascade mode or when 2 the data status of ROUT_IN which is the setting received from a computer as the remote output signal falls to Bad while the PID block is running in the ROut remote output mode mode shedding occurs in accordance with the SHED_OPT setting IM 21B04C01 01E lt 16 PID Function Block gt 16 5 Table 16 5 SHED OPT of PID Block Available Setti
72. values of SIGN_DATA_X and SIGN_DATA_Y SIGN_UPLOAD_DATABASE 1 Current Standard Actuator Signature 2 Current Extended High Resolution Actuator Signature 3 Current Step Response Test 4 Current Positioner Signature 5 Factory Standard Actuator Signature result stored in non volatile memory 6 Record Standard Actuator Signature result stored in non volatile memory kV If the number of the measured data is 20 or more specify in SIGN_UPLOAD_POINTER the leading position of the data to be uploaded For example setting 21 in SIGN_UPLOAD_POINTER will upload the twenty first through fortieth data Refer to the value of SIGN_MEAS_COUNTER which indicates the number of data actually measured F1901 ai IM 21B04C01 01E lt 19 Diagnostics gt 19 3 19 3 2 Signatures and Relevant Parameters The following describes each signature and the relevant parameters 1 Standard Actuator Signature 1 The standard signature is the fundamental input to position characteristics of the valve measured at 10 through 90 of the full stroke in 10 intervals over a round trip e The following can be set in a setting parameter STD_ACT_SIGN_SET Recommended Scan Time seconds Scan Time seconds Deviation Margin e Performing measurement sets the pressure data in SIGN_DATA_X and the position data in SIGN_DATA_Y e This signature can be saved to non volatile memory within the YVP110 To do so Selec
73. valve actions has greatly changed write 3 control parameter tuning The time needed to complete the adjustments which varies with the actuator size and the hysteresis of the actions is roughly 4 minutes for a mid capacity capacity of around 3 liters actuator If you want to abort auto tuning for some reason such as when you have started it while leaving the air supply shut off write 5 cancel execution IM 21B04C01 01E The tuning result will be written to AUTO_ TUNE_RESULT The value of AUTO_TUNE_ RESULT is 255 and is displayed as In operation while auto tuning is running and will change to 1 which is displayed as Succeeded when auto tuning has finished successfully In the event of a warning or error a value other than those below will be displayed For details see the specifications for the transducer block 1 succeeded 2 canceled 255 in operation The values of the hysteresis of valve actions and the air supply pressure measured during auto tuning are stored in parameters of the transducer block inside the YVP110 Note that pressure data such as air supply pressure data are available only for a YVP110 with an optional pressure sensor A caution Ensure that the pressure of the air supply to the YVP110 positioner is regulated within the specified range If it differs from the pressure during actual operation or if it is unstable optimum tuning results may not be obtained The fol
74. 0 2 iinet een A Ne eg Valve positioner Input Signal ee eee eran Digital communication FOUNDATION Fieldbus protocol Applicable Control E Single Acting Actuator Valve ONCE CROCS Double Acting Actuator WER Always A Connections EH Electrical Connection G 1 2 Pneumatic Connection Re 1 4 K BEER Electrical Connection 1 2 NPT Pneumatic Connection 1 4 NPT Dias ENEE Electrical Connection DIN Pg 13 5 Pneumatic Connection Re 1 4 EE Electrical Connection M20 Pneumatic Connection Re 1 4 N Lara Always N Optional Codes O Optional Specifications E Optional Specifications Item Description Code Lightning protection a A 1x 40 us repeating 1000 A 1x 40 ps 100 times A Coating change Epoxy resin coating X1 Painting Munsell notation code N1 5 Black P1 Color change Terminal Cover only Munsell notation code 7 5BG4 1 5 jade green P2 Metallic silver P7 PID function PID control function one block LC1 PID control function two blocks 7 LC2 Output monitor Built in output pressure sensor 3 and signature function 4 BP Scale and calibration unit Pa 1 GP Dee Scale and calibration unit kgf cm 1 GM Scale and calibration unit bar 1 GB Scale and calibration unit psi 2 GE Two levers stroke limit of 10 to 100 mm LV One lever stroke limit of 5 to 10 mm When using this lever set following performance specifications shall be applied Valve linkage
75. 0 or later YVP management software a YVP specific tool is designed to perform these tasks with ease and offers dedicated functions ValveNavi facilitates executions signature measurement uploads of measured data display of measured data ina graph and comparisons of measured data with previously measured data This User s Manual outlines the contents of each type of signature and explains the signature pertaining parameters in the transducer block For instructions on performing signature measurement see the User s Manual for ValveNavi IM 21B04C50 01E second edition or later which explains its functions and operation procedures 19 3 1 Signature Measurement Procedure The fundamental procedure for measuring signatures is as follows Set the measurement conditions for the signature s you want to measure in reference with Section 19 3 2 H Set SIGN_MEAS_EXEC to select the signature s to be measured and carry out the measurement At this time the value of MODE_BLK target in both the transducer and AO blocks needs to be O S SIGN_MEAS_EXEC 1 Off 2 Measure All executing 3 4 6 7 3 Measure Standard Actuator Signature 4 Measure Extended Actuator Signature 5 Measure High Resolution Actuator Signature 6 7 2 Measure Step Response Test Measure Positioner Signature 55 Cancel Execution d After the measurement has finished set SIGN_UPLOAD_DATABASE to select the data you want to upload and upload the
76. 0008000 TB in Signature Signature is proceeding of range ERROR for details executing 0x00000020 Temperature sensor 0x00004000 out of range 0x00002000 0x00000010 Total near close limit 0x00001000 PID1 in Bypass Bypass is activated in PID exceed active block 0x00000008 Total close limit 0x00000800 DI2 in Simulate SIMULATE is activated in exceed active DI2 block 0x00000004 Total open limit 0x00000400 DI1 in Simulate SIMULATE is activated in exceed active Di block 0x00000002_ Travel limit exceed 0x00000200 AO in Simulate SIMULATE is activated in 0x00000001 Cycle count limit active AO block exceed 0x00000100 TB in Auto tuning Auto tuning is proceeding 0x00000080 ARinO Smode_ AR block is in O S mode 0x00000040 IS in O S mode IS block is in O S mode 0x00000020 OSinO S mode OS block is in O S mode 0x00000010 PID1 in O S mode PID block is in O S mode 0x00000008 DI2 in O S mode DI2 block is in O S mode 0x00000004 DI1 in O S mode DI1 block is in O S mode 0x00000002 AOinO Smode_ AO block is in O S mode 0x00000001 TBinO S mode TB block is in O S mode IM 21B04C01 01E lt 12 Transducer Block gt 1 2 1 12 Transducer Block 12 1 General 12 2 Forward Path The transducer block works as an interface The following describes the signal input from the between the hardware I O actuator sensor and AO block to the transducer block and then passed internal function blocks Most functions of the
77. 0079 0 2006 EN60079 11 2007 EN60079 26 2007 EN60079 27 2006 EN61241 0 2006 EN61241 1 2004 EN61241 11 2006 and EN60529 e Certificate KEMA O8ATEX0114 X Note 2 Ratings Type of Protection Il 1G Ex ia IIB IIC T4 Il 1D Ex iaD 20 IP65 T100 C II 1D Ex tD A20 IP65 T100 C Maximum Surface Temperature for dust proof T100 C Ambient Temperature Ex ia or Ex iaD 40 C to 60 C Ambient Temperature Ex tD 40 C to 80 C Ambient Humidity 0 to 100 RH No condensation lt 1 Notes on Handling gt 1 7 Degree of Protection of the Enclosure IP65 Electrical Parameters For Ex ia IIC or Ex iaD Ui 24 0 V li 250 mA Pi 1 2 W Cint 1 76 nF Lint 0 pH or For Ex ia IIB IIC or Ex iaD FISCO model Ui 17 5 V li 380 mA Pi 5 32 W Cint 1 76 nF Lint 0 pH For Il 1D Ex tD Input signal 32 Vdc Output current 17 mA Note 3 Installation All wiring shall comply with local installation requirements Refer to the installation diagram Note 4 Maintenance and Repair The instrument modification or parts replacement by other than authorized representative of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited and will void KEMA Intrinsically safe Certification Note 5 Special Conditions for Safe Use Because the enclosure of the Valve Positioner is made of aluminium if it is mounted in an area where the use of category 1G apparatus is required it must be installed such that even in the event of rare incident
78. 0x04000000 not Zero S 0x02000000 0x08000000 PID2 in Bypass Bypass is activated in PID2 0x01000000 active block 0x00800000 0x04000000 PID2 O S mode PID2 block is in O S mode x E 0x00400000 0x02000000 TB TRAVEL_ Travel Calibration has not CALIB_RESULT been succeeded E not Succeeded 0x00100000 0x01000000 TBAUTO_ Auto tuning has not been 0x00080000 TUNE_RESULT succeeded 0x00040000 not Succeeded 0x00020000 0x00800000 AR BLOCK ERR Block Error has occurred in 0x00010000 not Zero the AR block 0x00008000_ Servo output drift 0x00400000 ISBLOCK_ERR Block Error has occurred in warning not Zero the IS block 0x00004000 A D Converter failure 0x00200000 OS BLOCK ERR Block Error has occurred in 0x00002000 Position sensor failure not Zero the OS block l 0x00001000 Deviation error 0x00100000 PID1 BLOCK Block Error has occurred in 0x00000800 Severe servo output ERR not Zero the PID block drift 0x00080000 DI2 BLOCK ERR Block Error has occurred in 0x00000400 Pressure sensor not Zero the DI2 block failure 0x00040000 DI1 BLOCK_ERR Block Error has occurred in 0x00000200 Temperature sensor not Zero the DI1 block failure 0x00020000 GER SC eg occurred in 0x00000100 Deviation warning Shows the contents of dak 0x00000080 Position sensor out of the XD_ERROR in the 0x00010000 TBXD_ERROR XD Error has occurred in range transducer block not Zero me UE blok 0x00000040 Pressure sensor out Refer to 12 6 1 XD_ 0x0
79. 1 2 0 rad Angle signal equal to 50 from position sensor in radians 63 2063 TRAVEL_CALIB_ Switch for starting a travel calibration EXEC 64 2064 TRAVEL_CALIB_ Indicates the result of a travel calibration RESULT 65 2065 OPEN_STOP_ADJ Not used for YVP110 66 2066 67 2067 AUTO_TUNE_ Indicates the result of auto tuning RESULT 68 2068 Indicates auto tuning sequence number 69 2069 SERVO_RET_TO_ Writing 2 to this parameter resets all control DFLT parameters to the defaults 1 off 2 set to the defaults 70 2070 ADVAL_FW Digital value of valve control signal setpoint equivalent to A D value of valve position signal 71 2071 ADVAL_BW A D value of valve position signal 72 2072 ADVAL_PRESS A D value of pressure from sensor 73 2073 ADVAL_T A D value of temperature from sensor 74 2074 TOTAL_CYCLE_ Total number of cycles To reset the count write 0 COUNT 75 2075 CYCLE_DEADBAND 0 25 Dead band of cycle counting 76 2076 CYCLE_COUNT_LIM 2432 1 High limit alarm setting for TOTAL CYCLE COUNT When TOTAL_CYCLE_COUNT has reached this setting a block alarm is generated 77 2077 TOTAL_TRAVEL Total amount of travel To reset the count write 0 78 2078 TRAVEL_ Dead band of travel integration DEADBAND 79 2079 TRAVEL_LIM High limit alarm setting for TOTAL_TRAVEL When TOTAL_TRAVEL has reached this setting a block alarm is generated 80 2080 TOTAL_OPEN_TIME 0 hour Total time other than counted for
80. 149 F for T6 40 to 80 C 40 to 176 F for T5 Special fastener Class A2 50 or more KF2 ATEX Intrinsically Safe Approval 2 Applicable standard EN60079 0 2006 EN60079 11 2007 EN60079 26 2007 EN60079 27 2006 EN61241 0 2006 EN61241 1 2004 EN61241 11 2006 and EN60529 Certificate KEMA O8ATEX0114 X Il 1G Ex ia IIB IC T4 Il 1D Ex iaD 20 IP65 T100 C Il 1D Ex tD A20 IP65 T100 C Maximum Surface Temperature for dust proof T100 C Ambient Temperature for Ex ia Ex iaD 40 to 60 C 40 to 140 F Ambient Temperature for Ex tD 40 to 80 C 40 to 176 F Enclosure IP65 For Ex ia IIC or Ex iaD Ui 24 0 V li 250 mA Pi 1 2 W Ci 1 76 nF Li 0 uH For Ex ia IIB IIC or Ex iaD FISCO model Ui 17 5 V li 380 mA Pi 5 32 W Ci 1 76 nF Li 0 uH For Il 1D Ex tD Input signal 32 Vdc Output current 17 mA KS25 ATEX Intrinsically safe Ex ic Type n Ex nA 2 5 Applicable standard EN60079 0 2009 EN60079 0 2012 Ex ic Ex nA EN60079 11 2012 Ex ic EN60079 15 2010 Ex nA Amb Temp 30 to 75 C 22 to 167 F Enclosure IP65 Ex ic Il 3G Ex ic IIC T4 Ge Intrinsically safe Ui 32 V Ci 3 52 nF Li 0 uH Ex nA II 3G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc Non sparking 32 V DC MAX KN25 TIIS Flameproof Approval 3 Certificate TC15453 TC 15452 for option code BP Ex d IIC T6 Amb Temp 20 to 60 C JF3 Attached flameproof packing adapter 4 Electrical connection G1 2 female Applicable cable O D 8 to 12 mm
81. 2 2 16 IN 5 17 DISABLE 3 2 2 17 IN 2 5 18 IDISABLE 4 2 2 18 IIN_3 5 19 SELECT_TYPE 1 19 RANGE_HI 4 20 MIN_GOOD 1 20 RANGE_LO 4 21 SELECTED 2 2 21 BIAS_IN_1 4 22 OP_SELECT 2 2 22 GAIN_IN_1 4 23 UPDATE EVT 23 BAG IN 3 A 24 BLOCK_ALM 24 GAIN_IN 2 4 25 IN_5 5 5 25 BIAS_IN_3 4 26 IN 6 5 5 26 GAIN_IN 3 4 27 IN 5 5 27 COMP_HI_LIM 4 28 IN 8 5 5 28 CONP_LO_LIM 4 29 DISABLE_5 2 2 29 ARITH_TYPE 1 30 DISABLE 6 2 2 20 BAL TIME A 31 DISABLE_7 2 2 31 DIAS A 32 DISABLE 8 2 2 32 GAIN 4 33 OUT HI UM A Total in bytes 73 15 73 9 34 OUT LO LIM 4 35 UPDATE EVT 36 BLOCK_ALM Total in bytes 23 26 48 68 IM 21B04C01 01E lt 9 Configuration gt 9 11 Table 9 14 View Object for PID Function Block Ge Parameters Be T Ka K ae Parameters Ke Ke Sc WC 1 ST_REV 2 2 2 2 36 ROUT_OUT 5 2 TAG_DESC 37 TRK_SCALE 11 3 STRATEGY 2 38 TRK_IN_D 2 2 4 ALERT_KEY 1 20 TRK_VAL 5 5 5 MODE_BLK 4 4 A0 EE MAL 5 6 BLOCK_ERR 2 2 41 FF_SCALE 11 7 DV 5 5 42 EE GAN 4 8 JSP 5 5 43 UPDATE EVT 9 OUT 5 5 44 BLOCK_ALM 10 PV_SCALE 11 45 RM_SUM 8 8 11 OUT SCALE 11 46 ACK_OPTION 2 12 GRANT_DENY 2 47 ALARM_HYS 4 13 CONTROL_OPTS 2 48 HI HI PPM 1 14 STATUS_OPTS 2 49 HI HI UM 4 15 JIN 5 DO HU PI 1 Ip PV_FTIME 4 DI H
82. 3 3 Flow compensation approximate expression func PV x f f sqrt t_1xt_2xt_3 xt_3 4 Quantity of heat calculation func PV x f f t_1 t_2 5 Multiplication and division func PV x f f t_1 t_2 t_3 6 Average calculation func PV t_1 t_2 t_3 N where N number of inputs 7 Summation func PV t_1 t_2 t3 IM 21B04C01 01E 8 Polynomial computation func PV t_17 t_2 t_34 9 HTG level compensation func PV t_1 PV t_2 10 Polynomial computation func PV t_1 x PV t_2 x PV t_3x PV4 Precaution for computation Division by 0 If a value is divided by 0 the calculation result is interpreted as 10 and depending with core a plus sign is added to it Negative square root The square root of an absolute value is extracted and a minus sign is added to it 18 3 2 Compensated Values In computing equations 1 to 5 in 18 3 1 the value f is restricted by the COMP_HI_LIM or COMP__ LO_LIM parameter In this case the value f is treated as follows If P gt COMP_HI_LIM f COMP_HI_LIM If P lt COMP_LO_LIM f COMP_LO_LIM 18 3 3 Average Calculation In computing equation 6 in 18 3 1 the average of input value is calculated Here it is necessary to obtain the number of inputs N For this determination is made to see if the sub status of each input is Not Connected Note that the main inputs may be accepted if IN or IN_LO is not in
83. 3 Available when unable to mount securely with the 4 bolts in 2 F0702 ai IM 21B04C01 01E lt 7 Standard Specifications gt 7 7 Unit mm approx inch Lever 1 Option code LV1 Lever 2 Option code LV1 wel H Kee e gt Kei S A d 9 WE a d A WE ole 13 0 5 91 3 6 S i 91 3 6 104 4 0 R lt lL 125 4 9 A 120 4 7 140 5 5 lt S 152 6 0 E R 168 6 6 al WE i No d W 3 Ns Lever 3 Option code NZ o alg E 4 d SS ole 91 3 6 S 104 4 0 120 4 7 D a F0703 ai Terminal Wiring p S Power supply and signal terminal Ground terminal Power supply and signal terminal Ground terminal Se IM 21B04C01 01E lt 8 About Fieldbus gt 8 1 8 About Fieldbus 8 1 Outline Fieldbus is a bi directional digital communication protocol for field devices which offers an advancement in implementation technologies for process control systems and is widely employed by numerous field devices YVP110 employs the specification standardized by The Fieldbus Foundation and provides interoperability between Yokogawa devices and those produced by other manufacturers Fieldbus comes with software consisting of AO function block two DI function blocks OS function block IS fu
84. 3 Deviation The deviation between the setpoint and warning measured valve position has exceeded DEVIATION_LIM continuously for the period specified by DEVIATION_TIME_ TH 1 This is not applicable for tight shut or full open actions or when the period specified by DEVIATION_TIME_TH 1 is less than 0 114 Servo output SERVO_OUTPUT_SIGNAL has drift warning reached SERVO_WARN_LO_LIM or SERVO_WARN_HI_LIM and has continued in excess of SERVO_TIME_ TH This is not applicable for tight shut or full open actions or when the period specified by SERVO_TIME_TH is less than 0 120 Temperature Temperature sensor failed 121 Pressure sensor failure Pressure sensor failed 122 Severe servo output drift SERVO_OUTPUT_SIGNAL has reached 10 or 90 and has continued in excess of SERVO_TIME_TH This is not applicable for tight shut or full open actions or when the period specified by SERVO_TIME_TH is less than 0 123 Deviation error The deviation between the setpoint and measured valve position has exceeded DEVIATION_LIM continuously for the period specified by DEVIATION_TIME_ TH 2 This is not applicable for tight shut or full open actions or when the period specified by DEVIATION_TIME_TH 2 is less than 0 124 Position sensor failure Position sensor failed 125 A D converter failure A D converter failed IM 21B04C01 01E 12 6 2 Fail safe Action If the A D converter fai
85. 5 9 SIMULATE_D 9 OUT 2 5 5 10 XD_STATE 2 10 OUT 1 RANGE 11 11 J OUT_STATE 2 11 OUT 2 RANGE 11 12 GRANT_DENY 2 12 GRANT_DENY 2 13 IO_OPTS 2 13 STATUS_OPTS 2 14 STATUS_OPTS 2 14 CAS IN 5 5 15 CHANNEL 2 15 BKCAL_OUT 5 Ip PV_FTIME 4 16 IN_ARRAY 16 17 FIELD_VAL_D 2 2 17 OUT_ARRAY 16 18 UPDATE_EVT 18 LOCKVAL 1 19 BLOCK_ALM 19 BKCAL_IN_1 5 20 ALARM_SUM 8 8 20 BKCAL_IN 2 5 21 ACK_OPTION 2 21 BAL TIME A 22 DISC_PRI 1 22 HYSTVAL 4 23 DISC_LIM 1 23 UPDATE EVT 24 DISC_ALM 24 BLOCK_ALM Total in bytes 22 8 22 19 Total in bytes 28 26 43 48 IM 21B04C01 01E lt 9 Configuration gt 9 10 Table 9 12 View Object for IS Function Block Table 9 143 View Objects of AR Function Block ae Parameters K Va RE WE Ge Param t rs r E Ke Ka 1 ST_REV 2 2 2 2 1 ST_REV 2 2 2 2 2 TAG_DESC 2 TAG_DESC 3 STRATEGY 2 3 STRATEGY 2 4 WERT KEY 1 4 ALERT_KEY 5 MODE_BLK 4 4 5 MODE_BLK 4 4 6 BLOCK_ERR 2 2 6 BLOCK_ERR 2 2 7 OUT 5 5 7 PV 5 5 8 OUT_RANGE 11 8 OUT 5 5 9 GRANT_DENY 2 9 PRE_OUT 5 5 10 STATUS OPTS 2 10 PV_SCALE 11 11 IN 5 5 11 OUT RANGE 11 12 IN 2 5 5 12 GRANT_DENY 2 13 NA 5 5 13 INPUT_OPTS 2 14 JIN 4 5 5 14 IIN 5 15 DISABLE 1 2 2 15 IN LO 5 16 DISABLE 2
86. 594543 device family _ device type domain name _ software name software revision ffd oon oon For example the name of the download file for an YVP may have the following name 594543000C_0007_YVP_ORIGINAL_R101 ffd Refer to A4 10 3 DOMAIN HEADER about each keyword of the file name The device type is 0007 for an YVP transmitter The software name is ORIGINAL or UPDATE The former indicates an original file and the latter an update file Whenever performing a download to update the device revision obtain the original file In general an addition to the parameters or blocks requires a device revision update A4 6 Steps after Activating a Field Device When the communication with a field device has recovered after activating the device check using the download tool that the software revision of the field device has been updated accordingly The value of SOFT_REV of the resource block indicates the software revision The PD tag node address and transducer block calibration parameters that are retained in the nonvolatile memory inside the target device will remain unchanged after a software download However after a software update which causes an addition to the block parameters or blocks or to the system network management VFD parameters some parameters may be reset to the defaults thus requiring parameter setup and engineering again For details see
87. 67 is 2 indicating that it is an LM A1 2 Check the values of V ST and V TN in all LMs on the segment and confirm that the following condition is met YVP V ST xV TN lt Other LMs V ST xV TN Q2 How can I make a YVP become the LAS A2 1 Check that the version numbers of the active schedules in the current LAS and the YVP are the same by reading LinkScheduleListCharacteristicsRecord index 374 for a YVP ActiveScheduleVersion subindex 3 A2 2 Make the YVP declare itself as and become the LAS by writing e 0x00 false to PrimaryLinkMasterFlagVariable in the current LAS and e OXFF true to PrimaryLinkMasterFlagVariable index 364 in the YVP Q3 On a segment where a YVP works as the LAS another device cannot be connected How come A3 1 Check the following bus parameters that indicate the bus parameter as being the LAS for the YVP and the capabilities of being the LAS for the device that cannot be connected e V ST V MID V MRD of YVP ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord index 369 e V ST V MID V MRD of problematic device DlmeBasicInfo A 25 lt Appendix 2 Link Master Functions gt Then confirm that the following conditions are met YVP Problematic Device V ST gt V ST V MID gt V MID V MRD gt V MRD A3 2 Check the node address of the problematic device is not included in the V FUN V NUN of the YVP IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 3 DD Methods and DD Menu gt
88. Change Figure 3 1 3 2 Change Figure 3 3 3 3 Change Figure 3 5 3 6 and 3 7 3 4 Change Figure 3 8 3 5 Change Figure 3 9 and 3 10 4 3 Change Figure 4 2 6 1 Change Figure 6 1 7 4 Change specifications of KS25 and KF2 8 2 Change URL 12 4 Modify description of Table 12 4 12 5 Change temperature parameter of 12 8 13 2 Modify meaning of Table 13 1 16 5 Modify table of 16 17 1 19 4 Add 19 3 3 Signature Measuring Result A 4 Change description of Index 2015 and 2016 A 5 Change description of Index 2038 and 2051 A 18 Modify the table A1 9 A 37 Change Figure A5 1 A 40 Modify the table of A6 3 10th Dec 2013 i CENELEC ATEX KEMA ATEX Delete 1 10 1 3 Change EMC Conformity Standards 1 7 CENELEC ATEX KEMA ATEX 1 9 CENELEC ATEX KEMA ATEX Change specifications of ATEX Intrinsically safe Ex ic Type n Ex nA Change Notes 10 Change Notes and Installation Diagram 1 11 Add name plate for KN25 1 12 Delete 1 10 Low Voltage Directive 6 1 Change CAUTION of General 7 1 Change conditions of communication line 7 2 Change EMC Conformity Standards 7 4 CENELEC ATEX KEMA ATEX Change specifications of KN25 16 5 Change specifications of Block Alarm A 1 Correct relative index 11 12 13 and 15 A 7 Correct relative index 92 A 13 Correct relative index 52 to 55 62 and 63 A 30 Change specifications of current draw IM 21B04C01 01E
89. DIX 6 MANUAL TUNING GUIDELINE CMPL Add parts of Double Acting Type 8th Nov 2008 Change format CDOORMONNN gt ARWNA AWA Oo Ka CH Add type nA to CENELEC ATEX Type of Protection n Add IS AR PID 2 blocks to Functions Add option code LC2 Add type nA to option code KN25 Add OS IS and AR function blocks in subsection 8 1 Change the IMPORTANT Add Table 9 4 Execution Time of YVP Function Blocks Add number of VCRs for EE Add number of link objects for EE and trend objects for EE Add Table 9 12 View Object for IS Function Block Add Table 9 13 View Object for AR Function Block Add IS AR and PID2 function blocks to Table 9 16 Add IS and AR function blocks to Table 10 1 Add OS IS and AR function blocks to subsection 10 2 Change Table 11 2 DEVICE_STATUS_1 without EE Add Table 11 3 DEVICE_STATUS_1 with EE Change Table 11 4 DEVICE_STATUS_2 without EE Add Table 11 5 DEVICE_STATUS_2 with EE Add section 17 IS FUNCTION BLOCK Add section 18 AR FUNCTION BLOCK Add PID2 Index Add A1 7 Parameters of IS Block Add A1 8 Parameters of AR Block Add IS to A1 10 IM 21B04C01 01E Edition Date Page Revised Item 9th Sep 2011 1 3 1 8 Revise standards 1 7 Change 1 9 2 1 A CENELEC ATEX KEMA Intrinsically Safe Type 1 9 Change B CENELEC ATEX KEMA Flameproof Type 1 10 Change Marking A to N Add Wiring Procedure for Ground Terminals 1 11 Change 6 Name Plate 3 1
90. E 1 5 lt 1 Notes on Handling gt SAFE AREA HAZARDOUS AREA Supply Unit b Terminator FISCO Model FISCO Model Exi OU i U Q I E y y y Terminator Data E Field Instruments 1 Passive F0103 ai Note 5 Maintenance and Repair The instrument modification or parts replacement by other than authorized representative of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited and will void Factory Mutual Intrinsically Safe and Non incendive Approval Installation Diagram Nonincendive Division 2 Installation Terminator o Valve Positioner Hazardous Location Non hazardous Location Nonincendive Power Supply i i FM Approved Associated Nonincendive Field Wiring Apparatus Vt or Voc It or Isc Ca La F0104 ai WE 2 KS 4 Ken 76 T 8 0 Dust tight conduit seal must be used when installed in Class Il and Class III environments Installation should be in accordance with the National Electrical Code ANSI NFPA 70 Sections 504 and 505 The configuration of Associated Nonincendive Field Wiring Apparatus must be FM Approved Associated Nonincendive Field Wiring Apparatus manufacturer s installation drawing must be followed when installing this equipment No revision to drawing without prior FM Approvals Terminator and supply unit must be FM Approved If use ordinary
91. EXPLOSION PROTECTED ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION in the USER S GUIDELINES for Electrical Installations for Explosive Gas Atmospheres in General Industry 1 Maintenance servicing with the power on Flameproof apparatus shall not be maintenance serviced with its power turned on However in cases where maintenance servicing is to be conducted with the power turned on with the equipment cover removed always use a gas detector to check that there is no explosive gas in that location If it cannot be checked whether an explosive gas is present or not maintenance servicing shall be limited to the following two items a Visual inspection Visually inspect the flameproof apparatus metal conduits and cables for damage or corrosion and other mechanical and structural defects b Zero and span adjustments These adjustments should be made only to the extent that they can be conducted from the outside without opening the equipment cover In doing this great care must be taken not to cause mechanical sparks with tools 2 Repair If the flameproof apparatus requires repair turn off the power and transport it to a safety non hazardous location Observe the following points before attempting to repair the apparatus a Make only such electrical and mechanical repairs as will restore the apparatus to its original condition For the flameproof apparatus the gaps and path lengths of joints and mating surfaces and mechanical strength of
92. E_6 OFF p DISABLE_7 OFF p DISABLE_8 OFF p OP_SELECT 3 o F1703 ai Figure 17 3 Example 2 In the above example SELECT_TYPE is set to Minimum However because OP_SELECT specifies the value and number of IN_3 the value and number of this specified IN are transmitted to OUT and SELECTED Note Even if the IN specified by OP_SELECT is an invalid input the corresponding DISABLE parameter is ON or the IN s status is bad the value and status of that IN are transmitted to OUT IM 21B04C01 01E lt 17 IS Function Block gt 17 5 17 3 2 SELECTION Handling If the value of OP_SELECT is 0 input selection using SELECT_TYPE is enabled When SELECT TYPE is first good The IS block selects the input with the smallest input number among valid inputs and transmits the value of that input to OUT The number of the selected input is transmitted to SELECTED SELECTION IN1 23 EI gt IN_2 345 EI gt OUT 34 5 IN3 45 O gt IN 4 234 CT ch IN 5 236 DI cb gt SELECTED 2 IN6 15 5 gt IN_7 32 5 FJ IN_8 27 4 SELECT_TYPE First Good STATUS_OPTS MIN_GOOD 1 DISABLE_1 ON DISABLE_2 OFF DISABLE_3 OFF DISABLE_4 OFF DISABLE_5 OFF DISABLE_6 OFF DISABLE_7 OFF U UUUUUUU DISABLE_8 OFF OP_SELECT 0 F1704 ai Figure 17 4 Example 3 Because DISAB
93. F3 and G11 EX BO3E Add Installation and Operating Precautions for JIS Flameproof Equipment CMPL CMPL 21B04C01 01E 1st 2nd Add Item 12 Cable Gland Assy 4th Sep 2002 3 2 Add Optional Specifications LV2 Add notes for stopper 3 4 Add notes for stopper 7 2 Add Optional Specifications LV2 and BP 8 2 Website address for downloading DD 9 6 Add parameters through 9 8 9 10 Add OS block 11 1 411 3 Device Status 15 1 15 OS Function Block 17 1 17 OS Function Block A 8 Add parameters A 12 A1 5 Parameters of OS Block A16 A2 Link Master Function A 24 A3 DD Method and DD Menu 5th Apr 2003 1 5 Add Optional Specifications KS25 Manual Change 1 6 Add Optional Specifications KF2 Manual Change CMPL CMPL 21B04C01 01E 2nd 3rd Add Part No Item Part No 4 G9303AG 6 Y9408ZU 7 F9177BZ 22 F9177WA 27 F9176HD 33 F9177MJ 37 F9177ME Change Part No Item Part No 32 F9177GZ F9176GZ 34 F9176GA F9176GD 35 F9176GB F9176GE 6th Jan 2005 Viii Add ATEX Documentation 1 3 to 1 4 Change Installation Diagram Intrinsically safe Division 1 Installation 1 5 Add Installation Diagram Nonincendive Division 2 Installation 1 6 Modify explanations for Technical Data of CENELEC ATEX KEMA Intrinsically Safe type 7 4 Modify explanations for Description of FS15 and KS25 A 27 toA 31 Delete DD Menu IM 21B04C01 01E Edition Date Page Revised Item 7th Aug
94. FF_THRESHOLD 1 2 1 0 1 0 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 BOOST_VALUE 1 2 8 0 10 0 8 0 10 0 8 0 10 0 6 0 10 0 6 0 8 0 SERVO_ _SLEEP_LMT 0 0 1 4 1 4 1 8 1 7 SERVO_P_ALPHA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 INTERNAL_GAIN 5 0 6 8 6 8 14 1 14 1 X_BST_ON_THRESHOLDJ1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X_BST_OFF_THRESHOLDJ 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X_BOOST_VALUE 1 2 0 0 0 0 4 0 5 0 8 0 10 0 3 0 6 0 3 0 4 0 The above adjusted values are only for reference Adjust parameters depending on the individual valve actuator and operating conditions X_BST_ON_THRESHOLD X_BST_OFF_THRESHOLD and X_BOOST_VALUE are parameters that are only valid for double acting models IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 6 Manual Tuning Guideline gt A 41 A6 4 Description of Control Parameters The YVP110 s basic method of controlling the valve position is PI D control This control is characterized by the fact that a rapid output change is prevented by the derivative term of D being added to the feedback In addition YVP110 has a boost function that serves as an output acceleration function after an input change because it compensates the nonlinearity caused by the structure of a valve or YVP When you set these parameters change the mode of the transducer block and AO function block to O S SERVO_GAIN Tuning range 0 1 to 1300 Default 120 Set the loop gain of PI D control The proport
95. High and low scale values when displaying the PV parameter and the parameters which have the same scaling as PV 12 5012 XD_SCALE High and low scale values used with the value obtained from or sent to the transducer block for a specified channel 13 5013 GRANT_DENY 0 Option to control access from the host computer and local control panel to tuning and alarm parameters 14 5014 IO_OPTS 0x000A O S Settings for the I O processing of the block 15 5015 STATUS_OPTS 0x0000 O S Defines block actions depending on block status conditions 16 5016 READBACK Readback signal of valve position from transducer block 17 5017 CAS_IN Cascade input 18 5018 SP_RATE_DN INF Rate of decrease limit for SP effective in AUTO CAS and RCAS modes If this parameter is 0 no limit is applied to the rate of decrease 19 5019 SP_RATE_UP INF Rate of increase limit for SP effective in AUTO CAS and RCAS modes If this parameter is 0 no limit is applied to the rate of increase 20 5020 SP_HI_LIM 100 Upper limit for setpoint SP 21 5021 SP_LO_LIM 0 Lower limit for setpoint SP 22 5022 CHANNEL 1 O S Defines the channel number of the hardware channel connected to the transducer block Always set to 1 for the AO block ina YVP110 23 5023 FSTATE_TIME 0 second Defines the time from when the fault state of the RCAS_IN or CAS_IN is detected to when the output should be set to the level preset in FSTATE_VAL this action takes place only if
96. IM_SW_HI_LIM Fault Control DEVIATION_LIM DEVIATION_TIME_TH 1 DEVIATION_TIME_TH 2 Others NEAR_CLOSE_THRESHOLD Exit lt Appendix 3 DD Methods and DD Menu gt A 27 7 Release Fail Safe This is a method for releasing the device latched by the fail safe actions restoring it to the normal state Procedure of releasing fail safe e Check whether the device is in the latched state e Write Clear latched to parameter RELEASE FAIL_SAFE if the device is in the latched state to release it from the latched state 8 Instant Trouble Shooting This is a help utility which provides troubleshooting instructions such as indicating the points and parameters to be checked for troubleshooting This method does not contain a utility to change parameter settings For troubleshooting of device statuses see Chapter 18 Troubleshooting Instant troubleshooting procedure e Commanded to check DEVICE_STATUS in the resource block e Check XD_ERROR and the remedy will be displayed if an error has been detected e Check RELEASE _FAIL_SAFE e Commanded to check the mechanical linkage piping and installation conditions e Commanded to check the correct operation of the device hardware 9 Self Check Execution The self check measures the valve s characteristics in the same fashion as in auto tuning and makes no changes to parameter settings Self Check Execution procedure e AO TB block mode check e Self check execution AUTO_
97. LE_1 OFF gt DISABLE _2 OFF p DISABLE_3 OFF p gt DISABLE_4 OFF gt DISABLE_5 OFF p DISABLE_6 OFF p gt DISABLE_7 OFF p gt DISABLE_8 ON p OP_SELECT 0 p SELECTION SELECT_TYPE Middle STATUS_OPTS LI MIN GOOD 1 Figure 17 8 Example 7 OUT 23 6 SELECTED 5 F1708 ai If the number of valid INs is an odd multiple the IN with the middle value will be output In the above example the IN_5 input having the middle value is output IM 21B04C01 01E lt 17 IS Function Block gt 17 10 When SELECT TYPE is Average The block calculates the average of the valid inputs and transmits it to OUT The number of inputs used to calculate its value is indicated in SELECTED SELECTION IN_1 23 p IN_2 34 5 j gt OUT 25 48 ve IN_1 IN_8 8 25 48 IN_4 2 34 p IN_5 23 6 p i gt SELECTED 8 IN 6 15 5 p IN_7 32 5 p H SELECT_TYPE Average DISABLE 1 OFF p vw STATUS_OPTS DISABLE _2 OFF gt MIN_GooD 1 DISABLE_3 OFF p DISABLE_4 OFF p DISABLE_5 OFF p DISABLE_6 OFF p DISABLE_7 OFF p DISABLE_8 OFF p OP_SELECT 0 p
98. LE_1 is ON IN_1 is disabled and IN_2 is selected for output If DISABLE _1 is turned OFF the output changes from IN_2 to IN_1 That is the valid IN with the smaller input number is always selected for output IM 21B04C01 01E lt 17 IS Function Block gt 17 6 When SELECT TYPE is Minimum The IS block selects the input with the minimum value among valid inputs and transmits the value of that input to OUT The number of the selected input is transmitted to SELECTED SELECTION IN_1 23 p geg SS gt OUT 2 34 IN_3 45 p IN_4 2 34 gt p geg gt SELECTED 4 IN 6 15 5 p IN 7 325 OG MESSE Wl SELECT_TYPE Minimum DISABLE_1 OFF _ p 1 STATUS_OPTS DISABLE_2 OFF _ p MIN_GOOD 1 DISABLE_3 OFF ET Kb DISABLE_4 OFF gt Kb DISABLE_5 OFF gt Kb DISABLE_6 OFF T gt DISABLE_7 OFF ET p gt DISABLE_8 OFF gt Kb OP_SELECT 0 O gt F1705 ai Figure 17 5 Example 4 IM 21B04C01 01E lt 17 IS Function Block gt 17 7 When SELECT TYPE is Maximum The IS block selects the input with the maximum value among valid inputs and transmits the value of that input to OUT The number of the selected input is transmitted to SELECTED
99. LINK_MASTER_FLAG_VARIABLE RW LAS True OxFF non LAS False 0x00 365 LIVE_LIST_STATUS_ARRAY_VARIABLE R 366 MAX_TOKEN_HOLD_ 0 0x0000 16 RW TIME_ARRAY 0x012cx16 1 Element 0x012cx5 0x0000 27 2 Element2 0x0000x32 3 Element3 0x0000x32 4 Element4 0x0000x32 5 Element5 0x0000x32 6 Element6 0x0000 31 0x012c 7 Element 0x012cx32 8 Element8 0x02 367 BOOT_OPERAT_FUNCTIONAL_CLASS As specified upon RW 0x01 basic device ordering 0x02 LM 368 CURRENT_LINK_ 0 Settings for LAS SETTING RECORD 1 SlotTime 2 PerDlpduPhlOverhead 3 MaxResponseDelay 4 FirstUnpolledNodeld 5 ThisLink 6 MinInterPduDelay 7 NumConseeUnpolledNodeld 8 PreambleExtension 9 PostTransGapExtension 10 MaxInterChanSignalSkew 11 TimeSyncClass 369 CONFIGURED_LINK_ 0 SETTING RECORD 1 SlotTime 2 PerDlpduPhlOverhead 3 MaxResponseDelay 4 FirstUnpolledNodeld 5 ThisLink 6 MinInterPduDelay 12 7 NumConseeUnpolledNodeld 186 8 PreambleExtension 2 9 PostTransGapExtension 1 10 MaxInterChanSignalSkew 0 11 TimeSyncClass 4 IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 2 Link Master Functions gt A 22 Index Parameter Name Sub parameter Name Sub Index Default Factory Access Remarks SM Setting 370 PLME_BASIC_ 0 CHARACTERISTICS 1 ChannelStatisticsSupported 0x00 2 MediumAndDataRatesSupported 0x4900000000000000 3 lecVersion 1 0x1 4 NumOfCha
100. Linearity LV2 Single Acting Actuator 1 0 of span Double Acting Actuator 2 0 of span Hysteresis Single Acting Actuator 0 6 of span Double Acting Actuator 1 0 of span High temperature use 5 Ambient temperature limits 10 to 85 C 14 to 185 F HT Software download Based on Foundation Fieldbus Specification FF 883 function 6 Download class Class1 EE 4 Applicable for Connections code 1 5 and 6 2 Applicable for Connections code 3 3 For double acting actuator OUT1 connection is available 4 Single acting actuator type with DP supports 5 types of signature functions 5 Applicable for double acting actuator 6 Not applicable for Option code FS15 and KS25 7 Applicable for option code EE IM 21B04C01 01E lt 7 Standard Specifications gt WR Optional Specifications For Explosion Protected types Item Explosionproof type Description CSA Explosionproof Approval 1 Applicable standard C22 2 No 0 No 0 4 No 0 5 No 25 No 30 No 94 No 1010 1 Certificate 1186507 Explosionproof for Class Division 1 Class B C amp D Class II Groups E F amp G Class Ill Enclosure Type NEMA4X Temp Class T5 T6 Amb Temp 40 to 82 C 40 to 180 F for T5 40 to 75 C 40 to 167 F for T6 Code CF1 FM Explosionproof Approval 1 Applicable standard FM3600 FM3615 FM3810 ANSI NEMA250 Explosion proof for Class 1 Division 1 GroupsA B C and D Dust ignitionproof for C
101. M alarm 59 8059 DN LO LIM INF Setting for DV_LO_ALM alarm 60 8060 HU HI AM Alarm that is generated when the PV value has exceeded the HI_HI_LIM value and whose priority order is defined in HI_HI_PRI Priority order Only one alarm is generated at a time When two or more alarms occur at the same time the alarm having the highest priority order is generated When the PV value has decreased below HI_HI_LIM ALM_HYS HI_HI_ALM is reset 61 8061 HI_ALM As above 62 8062 LO_ALM As above Reset when the PV value has increased above LO_LIM ALM_HYS 63 8063 LO_LO_ALM As above 64 8064 DV_HI_ALM An alarm that is generated when the value of PV SP has exceeded the DV_HI_LIM value Other features are the same as HI_HI_ALM 65 8065 DV_LO_ALM Alarm that is generated when the value of PV SP has decreased below the DV_LO_LIM value Other features are the same as LO_LO_ALM IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 1 Function Block Parameters gt A 14 A1 7 Parameters of IS Block Relative Parameter Default Index Valid Range factory Write Description Index Name 5 setting 0 17000 BLOCK_ TAG IS OI Information relating to this function block such as HEADER block tag DD revision and execution time 1 17001 ST_REV Indicates the revision level of the set parameters associat
102. M017 A12 P 1 1 1 2 2 1 and 2 2 Note 1 Model YVP110 Advenced Valve Positioner with optional code FS15 are applicable for use in hazardous locations e Applicable standard FM3600 FM3610 FM3611 FM3810 ANSI NEMA250 e Intrinsically safe with FISCO parameters for use in Class Il III Division 1 Groups A B C D E F G and Class Zone 0 AEx ia IIC e Non incendive for Class Division 2 Groups A B C D and Class Zone 2 Group IIC e Indoor Outdoor hazardous locations NEMA AN e Ambient Temperature 40 to 60 C Note 2 Electrical Data Rating 1 For Groups A B C D E F and G or Group IIC Maximum Input Voltage Vmax 24 V Maximum Input Current Imax 250 mA Maximum Input Power Pmax 1 2 W Maximum Internal Capacitance Ci 1 76 nF Maximum Internal Inductance Li 0 UH lt 1 Notes on Handling gt 1 3 or Rating 2 For Groups A B C D E F and G or Group IIC Maximum Input Voltage Vmax 17 5 V Maximum Input Current Imax 360 mA Maximum Input Power Pmax 2 52 W Maximum Internal Capacitance Ci 1 76 nF Maximum Internal Inductance Li 0 yH or Rating 3 For Groups C D E F and G or Group IIB Maximum Input Voltage Vmax 17 5 V Maximum Input Current Imax 380 mA Maximum Input Power Pmax 5 32 W Maximum Internal Capacitance Ci 1 76 nF Maximum Internal Inductance Li 0 yH e Inthe rating 1 the output current of the barrier must be limited by a resistor Ra such that lo Uo Ra e Inthe rating
103. Manual switch must not be moved by anyone except for the authorized engineer b Wiring e The instrument must be installed by an expert engineer or skilled personnel The procedures described about WIRING are not permitted for operators Please confirm voltages between the power supply and the instrument before connecting the power cables and that the cables are not powered before connecting c Operation e Wait three minutes after power is turned off before opening the covers d Maintenance e Only the procedures written in maintenance descriptions are allowed for users When further maintenance is needed please contact nearest YOKOGAWA office Care should be taken to prevent the build up of drift dust or other material on the data plate In case of its maintenance use clean soft and dry cloth e The instrument modification or parts lt Introduction gt ix replacement for explosion protected type instruments by other than authorized representative of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited and will void the approval m Warranty The warranty period of the instrument is written on the estimate sheet that is included with your purchase Any trouble arising during the warranty period shall be repaired free of charge Inquiries with regard to problems with the instrument shall be accepted by the sales outlet or our local dealer representative Should the instrument be found to be defective inf
104. Module Commu Fieldbus nication Fieldbus Circuit Regulator Position Sensor Conversion F0202 ai IM 21B04C01 01E lt 3 Installing YVP110 on Actuator gt 3 1 3 Installing YVP110 on Actuator 3 1 General For installation of a YVP110 see Section 1 4 Choosing the Installation Location For the ambient environmental conditions required for installation see Chapter 7 General Specifications A WARNING To avoid injury or the process being affected when installing or replacing a positioner on a control valve ensure that e All inputs to the valve actuator and other accessories of the valve and actuator including the air supply and electric signal are cut off e The process has been shut down or the control valve is isolated from the process by using bypass valves or the like e No pressure remains in the valve actuator 3 2 Installing YVP110 on Actuator AYVP110 can be installed on a valve actuator with a mounting bracket Prepare the bracket and clamp which are necessary to install the valve according to the valve In general the installation method is determined by the combination of the control valve and positioner as well as by the valve manufacturer who performs the adjustment For details consult the control valve manufacturer Required Tools To install a YVP110 you need to prepare e Nominal 13 mm open end or box end wrench for M8 bolts used to fix the mo
105. ND 200 C POTENTIAL ELECTROSTATIC CHARGING HAZARD P SKE USERS MANUAL DO NOT OPEN IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE WHEN ENERGIZED Ex nA IIC T4 Go Tamb 30 TO 75 C ENCLOSURE IP 65 SUPPLY 32V DC MAX Exic IIC Ta Ge Tamb 30 TO 75 C ENCLOSURE IP 65 32V Ci 3 52nF Uran CROSS OUT UNNECESSARY MARKING OTHER THAN THE SELECTED TYPE OF PRPTECTION CE amp n200 VALVE POSITIONER YVP110 STYLE SUPPLY NO INPUT Foundation Fieldbus 3 YOKOGAWA jade Sapan TOKYO 180 8750 JAPAN J F0110 ai MODEL Specified model code SUFFIX Specified suffix code STYLE Style code SUPPLY Air supply pressure NO Serial number and year of production INPUT Type of electrical input FOUNDATION FIELDBUS YOKOGAWA TOKYO 180 8750 JAPAN The manufacturer name and the address 2 1 The third figure from the last of the serial number shows the year of production For example the production year of the product engraved in NO column on the name plate as follows is 2001 12A220566 108 The year 2001 2 180 8750 is a zip code which represents the following address 2 9 32 Nakacho Musashino shi Tokyo Japan 3 The production year is shown on the place of 3 for example 2013 02 IM 21B04C01 01E 1 9 3 CSA Certification A CSA Explosionproof Type Cautions for CSA Explosionproof type Note 1 Model YVP110 Advanced Valve Positioner with optional code CF1 ar
106. NEL of the DI block to e 2 for reading the on off status of the upper limit switch e 3 for reading the on off status of the lower limit switch 5 Thresholds for Operation Result Integration Alarms The YVP110 has a function to integrate the following operation result quantities individually e TOTAL_CYCLE_COUNT incremented by 1 at each change in the direction of the action e TOTAL_TRAVEL in where full stroke 100 e TOTAL_OPEN_TIME in hours e TOTAL_CLOSE_TIME in hours e TOTAL_NEAR_CLOSE_TIM total at nearly closed time in hours e SERVO_WARN_COUNT Total number of times of Servo output drift warning When these values exceed the respective thresholds below corresponding alarms are output Set the thresholds as necessary e CYCLE COUNT UM e TRAVEL_LIM e OPEN TIME UM e CLOSE TIME UM e NEAR CLOSE TIME UM Also set NEAR_CLOSE_THRESHOLD which defines the threshold of the valve position for counting NEAR_CLOSE_TIME as necessary For other alarms and self diagnostic functions see 12 6 Online Diagnostics IM 21B04C01 01E lt 6 Maintenance gt 6 1 6 Maintenance 6 1 General The modular structure of the YVP110 increases the ease of maintenance work This chapter describes cleaning and part replacement procedures that should be done for maintenance of the YVP110 The YVP110 is a precision instrument read the following carefully when carrying out maintenance For calibration
107. NE_STATE 1 69 SERVO_RET_TO_ e DEFAULT 70 ADVAL_FW 2 71 ADVAL_BW 2 72 ADVAL_PRESS 2 73 ADVAL_T 2 74 TOTAL_CYCLE_COUNT 4 75 CYCLE_DEADBAND 4 76 CYCLE_COUNT_LIM 4 77 TOTAL_TRAVEL 4 78 TRAVEL_DEADBAND 4 79 TRAVEL_LIM 4 80 TOTAL_OPEN_TIME 4 81 Trora CLOSE TIME 4 82 OPEN_CLOSE_ F THRESHOLD 83 OPEN_TIME_LIM 4 84 CLOSE TIME UM 4 85 TOTAL_NEAR_CLOSE_ 4 TIM 86 NEAR_CLOSE_ j THRESHOLD 87 NEAR_CLOSE_TIME_LIM 4 88 DEVIATION_LIM 4 89 DEVIATION_TIME_TH 8 90 RELEASE FAILSAFE 1 91 MODEL 32 92 DEV_OPTIONS 2 93 PRESS_SENS_INSTALLED 1 94 ACTUATOR_TYPE 1 95 RELAY_TYPE 1 96 SIGN_MEAS_EXEC 1 97 SIGN_MEAS_RESULT 1 98 SIGN_MEAS STATE 1 99 SIGN_MEAS COUNTER 2 1 100 SIGN_DATA_SAVE IM 21B04C01 01E lt 9 Configuration gt Relative Baraniaiars VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW index 1 2 3 1st 3 2nd 4 1st 4 2nd 4 3rd 4 4th 4 5th 4 6th 4 7th 4 8th 101 SIGN_UPLOAD_ DATABASE 102 SIGN_UPLOAD_POINTER 103 SIGN_DATA_X 104 SIGN_DATA_Y 105 SIGN MEAS DATE 106 SIGN_HEADER_DATA 107 STD_ACT_SIGN_SET 108 EXT_ACT_SIGN_SET 109 STEP_RESP_SET 110 POSITIONER_SIGN_SET 111 SERVO_WARN_HI_LIM 112 SERVO_WARN_LO_LIM 113 SERVO_TIME_TH
108. OTAL_CLOSE_TIME e TOTAL_NEAR_CLOSE_TIM Total time period in hours when the valve position is within the threshold set in NEAR CLOSE_THRESHOLD e SERVO_WARN_COUNT Total number of times the servo output drift warning occurred Indicates the total number of times a drift warning occurred regarding the output current to the I P module lt 12 Transducer Block gt 1 2 5 12 6 4 Recording of Revisions When the user makes a change to the setting of a static parameter the change is counted up in the parameter ST_REV and update event is generated 12 7 Control Parameters The following control parameters in a YVP110 can be set up by auto tuning For details see section AG 4 SERVO_GAIN SERVO_RESET SERVO_RATE SERVO_RATE_GAIN SERVO_DEADBAND SERVO_OFFSET BOOST_ON_ THRESHOLD BOOST_OFF_THRESHOLD BOOST_VALUE SERVO_I_SLEEP_LMT SERVO_P_ALPHA INTERNAL_GAIN X_BOOST_ON_THRESHOLD X_BOOST_OFF_THRESHOLD X_BOOST_VALUE Applicable only for Double Acting Type 12 8 Temperature and Pressure Measurement The YVP110 measures the surface temperature of the amplifier and sets it in the parameter ELECT_TEMP in the transducer block The unit of temperature is defined by TEMPERATURE_UNIT and can be selected from 1001 C 1002 F AYVP110 with an optional pressure sensor can measure the output air pressure to the valve actuator and sets it in the parameter OUT PRESSURE The unit of pressure is define
109. OUT_ARRAY P2 IN_ ARRAY OUT_ARRAY P3 IN_ARRAY OUT_ARRAY P4 IN ARRAY OUT_ARRAY e Set LOCK_VAL IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 4 Software Download A 30 Appendix 4 Software Download A4 1 Benefits of Software Download This function enables you to download software to field devices via a FOUNDATION Fieldbus to update their software Typical uses are to add new features such as function blocks and diagnostics to existing devices and to optimize existing field devices for your plant Update Program New Diagnostics FA0401 ai Figure A4 1 Concept of Software Downloading A4 2 Specifications Steady state current Max 17 mA Current Draw Steady state 17 mA max Current Draw Software Download state 41 mA max Based on Fieldbus Foundation Specification Download class Class 1 A NOTE Class 1 devices can continue the specified measurement and or control actions even while software is being downloaded to them Upon completion of a download however the devices will be reset internally to make the new downloaded software take effect and this will halt fieldbus communication and function block executions for about one minute A4 3 Preparations for Software Downloading For software downloading you need to prepare the following e Software download tool e Software for downloading file for each of the target field devices For the software download tool use only a program developped for that pur
110. RANGE 20kPa 100kPa O S Defines the pressure range and unit for valve operation with no direct effect on control The unit defined here also applies to OUT PRESSURE 1133 kPa 1137 bar 1141 psi 1145 kgf cm2 41 2041 OUT_PRESSURE Output pressure to valve actuator 42 2042 SERVO_OUTPUT_ Output current to I P module SIGNAL 43 2043 SERVO_RATE_GAIN 5 O S Derivative gain a control parameter set by auto 1 tuning 2 to 20 44 2044 SERVO_DEADBAND 0 5 O S Derivative action dead band a control parameter 1 set by auto tuning 0 to 50 45 2045 SERVO_OFFSET 55 of MV O S Derivative action offset a control parameter set by 1 auto tuning 0 to 100 of MV 46 2046 BOOST_ON_ 1 9 2 9 O S Threshold for switching on boost action a control THRESHOLD 1 parameter set by auto tuning 0 0 1 to 10 47 2047 BOOST_OFF_ 1 0 1 0 O S Threshold for switching off boost action a control THRESHOLD 1 parameter set by auto tuning 0 1 to 10 48 2048 BOOST_VALUE 1 8 10 of MV O S Boost value a control parameter set by auto tuning 0 to 50 of MV 49 2049 SERVO_I_SLEEP_ Osec O S Integral action sleep timer setting a control LMT 1 parameter set by auto tuning 0 to10 sec 50 2050 SERVO_P_ALPHA 0 O S Multiplication coefficient for the square of 1 proportional factor a control parameter set by auto tuning 0 to 100 51 2051 INTERNAL_GAIN 5 rad mA O S Gain for internal computation a
111. S Scalar input Bit string indicating the hardware types Scalar output Bit 0 Scalar input Discrete input Bit 1 Scalar output Bit 2 Discrete input Bit 3 Discrete output IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 1 Function Block Parameters gt A 2 Relative Default Index Index Parameter Name factory setting Write Description 16 1016 RESTART Restart the YVP110 in the selected way 1 Running 2 Restart Resource 3 Restart with the default settings defined in FF specifications 1 4 Restart CPU 17 1017 FEATURES Shows supportable optional features of the block 18 1018 FEATURE_SEL Parameter used to select the optional features of the resource block 19 1019 CYCLE_TYPE Scheduled Bit string indicating cycle types executable for the resources Bit 0 Scheduled to be scheduled Bit 1 Event driven to be driven by an event Bit 2 Manufacturer specified executable by a manufacturer specified unique function 20 1020 CYCLE_SEL Scheduled Bit string used to select the cycle type 21 1021 MIN_CYCLE_T 3200 100ms Minimum execution cycle 22 1022 MEMORY_SIZE 0 Memory size allowed for use of function block configurations in the device checked before a download but not supported by the YVP110 23 1023 NV_CYCLE_T Cycle of saving the settings of non volatile attribute parameters to the EEPROM 0 is set with the YVP110 and saving is not c
112. STVAL When both downstream blocks of the OS block are ready for cascade connection the OS block connects the block on the side of OUT_1 first For bumpless mode change on the side of OUT_2 the balancing time for connection can be set in BAL_TIME When either downstream block alone is ready for cascade connection the OS block connects it and enters the Cas mode When neither downstream block is ready for cascade connection the mode of the OS block is set to IMan 15 4 Backward Path BKCAL_OUT The value of SP or a value calculated from the value of either BKCAL_IN_1 or BKCAL_IN_2 depending on the handshake status with the downstream blocks is output through BKCAL OUT In normal operating conditions e BLK_ MODE actual is Cas or Auto BKCAL_OUT is set to the value of SP 15 5 STATUS_OPTS STATUS_OPTS is a parameter that stipulates options about the block s signal processing and mode transitions Table 15 1 shows the options available in STATUS_ OPTS of the OS block Table 15 1 STATUS_OPTS of OS Block Meaning 1 IFS if BAD CAS IN Description If this option is True then Set the sub status components of OUT_1 status and OUT_ 2 status to Initial Fault State IFS if CAS_IN status is Bad 4 Propagate Fault If this option is True then Set Backward the status of BKCAL_OUT to device failure if the quality and substatus components of both BKCAL_IN_1 and BKCAL_IN_ 2 are Bad Sensor Failure and Device F
113. ST_VALUE 1 and the added value is removed when the deviation enters the range of BOOST_OFF_THRESHOLD 2 lt Appendix 6 Manual Tuning Guideline gt A 42 Added to boost Removed from boost Added to BOOST VALUE 2 Set point BOOST_ON_THRESHOLD 2 BOOST_OFF_THRESHOLD 2 BOOST_ON_THRESHOLD 1 4 Removed from BOOST_VALUE 2 en Previous Set point FA0607 ai The boost function of single acting actuators works only for the air supply side however that of double acting actuators also works for the exhaust side of OUT1 for the air delivery side of OUT2 If you want to individually set parameters for the exhaust side of OUT1 of double acting actuators set the following parameters X_BST_ON_THRESHOLD 1 2 Tuning range 10 to 10 Default 0 0 X_BST_OFF_THRESHOLD 1 2 Tuning range 10 to 10 Default 0 0 X_BOOST_VALUE 1 2 Tuning range 50 to 50 of MV Default 0 0 of MV If you want the boost function of double acting actuators on the exhaust side of OUT1 to be asymmetric from the air delivery side set these parameters If you set values for these parameters input differences for change in relation to the values of BOOST_ON_THRESHOLD BOOST_OFF_ THRESHOLD and BOOST_VALUE For example if you want to stop the boost function only on the exhaust side input a negative value of the absolute value of BOOST_VALUE 1 in X_BOOST_VALUE 1 and input the value in X_BOOST_VALUE 2 in
114. Service The target mode is O S SEN DESS not open 0x00004000 Link Obj 2 18 The VCR 1 to which link object 2 not open or 18 is specified to be linked is not open 0x00002000_ Link Obj 3 19 The VCR 1 to which link object 3 not open or 19 is specified to be linked is not open 0x00001000 Link Obj 4 20 The VCR 1 to which link object 4 not open or 20 is specified to be linked is not open 0x00000800 Link Obj 5 21 The VCR 1 to which link object 5 not open or 21 is specified to be linked is not open 0x00000400 Link Obj 6 22 The VCR 1 to which link object 6 not open or 22 is specified to be linked is not open 0x00000200 Link Obj 7 23 The VCR 1 to which link object 7 not open or 23 is specified to be linked is not open 0x00000100 Link Obj 8 24 The VCR 1 to which link object 8 not open or 24 is specified to be linked is not open IM 21B04C01 01E lt 11 Resource Block gt 11 2 Indication Hexadecimal when Device Meaning Indication Description is installed 0x00000080 Link Obj 9 25 The VCR 1 to which link object 9 not open or 25 is specified to be linked is not open 0x00000040 Link Obj 10 The VCR 1 to which link object not open 10 is specified to be linked is not open 0x00000020 Link Obj 11 The VCR 1 to which link object not open 11 is specified to be linked is not open 0x00000010 Link Obj 12 The VCR 1 to which link object not
115. TOTAL_CLOSE_ TIME To reset the count write 0 81 2081 TOTAL_CLOSE_ 0 hour Total time where valve position is equal to or less TIME than OPEN_CLOSE_THRESHOLD To reset the count write 0 82 2082 OPEN_CLOSE_ 0 25 Threshold value for TOTAL_OPEN_TIME and THRESHOLD TOTAL_CLOSE_TIME 83 2083 OPEN_TIME_LIM 2432 1 hours High limit alarm setting for TOTAL_OPEN_TIME When TOTAL_OPEN_TIME has reached this setting a block alarm is generated 84 2084 CLOSE_TIME_LIM 2432 1 hours High limit alarm setting for TOTAL_CLOSE_TIME When TOTAL_CLOSE_TIME has reached this setting a block alarm is generated IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 1 Function Block Parameters gt A 7 Relative Default z gi Index Index Parameter Name factory setting Write Description Setting range 85 8085 TOTAL_NEAR_ Total time period when the valve position is equal CLOSE_TIM to or less than the value set in NEAR_CLOSE_ THRESHOLD judged as when the valve is nearly closed To reset the count write 0 86 2086 NEAR_CLOSE_ 3 0 Threshold for judging that the valve is nearly THRESHOLD closed 87 2087 NEAR_CLOSE_ 2432 1 hours High limit alarm setting for TOTAL_NEAR_ TIME_LIM CLOSE_TIM When TOTAL NEAR CLOSE TIM has reached this setting a block alarm is generated 88 2088 DEVIATION_LIM 110 Deviation high limit 89 2089 DEVIATION_TIME__ 10 1 off If the time period when the
116. TUNE EXEC 10 Signature Execution This method guides you through each step to perform signature measurement see Chapter 17 Diagnostics Signature measurement entails off line diagnostics functions to measure characteristics of the valve and positioner Comparing the current signature data with the previously measured data gives clues to identify the deterioration status and a possible need of maintenance IM 21B04C01 01E Signature execution procedure e AO TB block mode check e Signature measurement execution Measure all Setting all signature measurement conditions Executing signature measurement SIGN_ MEAS_ EXEC Uploading data see Item 11 below Measure actuator signature Setting STD_ACT_SIGN_SET Executing signature measurement SIGN_ MEAS_EXEC Uploading data see Item 11 below Measure extended actuator signature Setting EXT_ACT_SIGN_SET Executing signature measurement SIGN_ MEAS_ EXEC Uploading data see Item 11 below Step response test Setting STEP_RESP_SET Executing step response test SIGN MEAS_EXEC Uploading data see Item 11 below Measure positioner signature Setting POSITIONER_SIGN_SET Executing signature measurement SIGN_ MEAG EXEC Uploading data see Item 11 below Exit 11 Upload Signature Data This method guides you through uploading the signature data that has been measured and stored in the positioner from selecting the database you want to u
117. TYPE MAX Basic operations and work sequence The IS block obtains values and status information from Al The block selects the Al information using the alternatives The block displays and outputs the information selected by SELECTED IM 21B04C01 01E lt 18 AR Function Block gt 18 1 18 AR Function Block The Arithmetic AR block switches two main inputs of different measurement ranges seamlessly and combines the result with three auxiliary inputs through the selected compensation function 10 types to calculate the output 18 1 AR Function Block Schematic The diagram below shows the Arithmetic block schematic RANGE_LO ARITH_TYPE BANGE HU BAL_TIME IN gt 2 RANGE PV c EXTENSION OUT HUN FUNCT gege UNCTION MAN 0 S PRE_OUT t1 func GAIN te P JN IN Wi IN 1 BIASIN I GAININI gt 4 Gop type kal tens ka A bl o gt out ep EE GES IN 2 St IN_2 BIAS_IN_2 GAIN IN 2 _ i OUT_LO_LIM IN3i IN_3 BIAS_IN_3 GAIN_IN 3 A O a BIAS IN i COMP_HI LIM GAIN_IN i F1801 ai Figure 18 1 AR Block The Arithmetic block is divided into three sections e Input section Makes a go no go decision on the use of an input value switches the range and determines the PV status e Computation section Makes calculations through ARITH_TYPE e Output section Applies gain multiplication and bias additi
118. U UM 4 17 BYPASS 1 52 LO PRI 1 18 CAS IN 5 5 53 ILO LIM 4 19 SP_RATE_DN 4 54 ILO LO PRI 1 20 SP_RATE_UP 4 55 LO_ LO LIM 4 21 GP HU UM 4 56 DV H PI 1 22 SP_LO_LIM 4 57 DV H UM A 23 GAIN 4 58 DV_LO PRI 1 24 RESET 4 59 DV_LO_LIM 4 25 BAL TIME 4 60 HI HI ALM 26 RATE 4 61 HI_ALM 27 BKCAL_IN 5 62 LO_ALM 28 OUT HI UM A 63 LO LO AM 29 OUT LO UM A D DV_HI_ALM 30 BKCAL_HYS 4 65 DV LO ALM 31 BKCAL_OUT 5 32 RCAS_IN 5 Total in bytes 43 43 83 104 33 ROUT IN 5 34 SHED_ OPT 1 35 RCAS OUT 5 IM 21B04C01 01E lt 9 Configuration gt 9 12 Table 9 15 View Object for Resource Block Table 9 16 Indexes of View for Each Block Relative P VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW_1 VIEW_2 VIEW_3 VIEW_4 arameters index 1 2 3 4 Resourse Block 40100 40101 40102 40103 1__ ST_LREV 2 2 22 Transducer Block 40202 40204 2 TAG_DESC 40200 40201 40203 through 3 STRATEGY 2 40211 4 ALERT KEY 1 AO Function Block 40500 40501 40502 40503 5 IMODE BLK 4 4 DI1 Function Block 40600 40601 40602 40603 6 BLOCK ERR 2 2 DI2 Function Block 40610 40611 40612 40613 7__ RS_STATE 1 1 PID or PID1 with 40800 40801 40802 40803 8 TEST RW JEE Function Block 9 DD_RESOURCE E 40810 40811 40812 40813 RK GE E
119. User s Manual YVP110 Advanced Valve Positioner IM 21B04C01 01E vigilantplant YOKOGAWA A IM 21B04C01 01E i i 10th Editi Yokogawa Electric Corporation Oth Edition YVP110 Advanced Valve Positioner IM 21B04C01 01E 10th Edition CONTENTS Jidd E viii m Notes on the User s Manuel viii E For Sate Use of Prodqduct usteet viii B E LEE ix Wiele EE ix m ATEX Documentation x PART I HARDWARE 1 Notes on RATAN D 1 1 1 1 TT E 1 1 1 2 TYANS POM dE 1 1 1 3 SOLON AO So eee ee wae cess ca eee wae cee ctu wae esa E wc eda E sae wae EE e dae weed evee eeovenzo 1 1 1 4 Choosing the Installation LOCATION ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneees 1 1 1 5 Use of a Transceiver wiiisiiiccscecacccacecsccsecevscesecevecevecevecestesvecsstcevecesteesteeseeveeesteevis 1 1 1 6 Insulation Resistance Test and Withstand Voltage Test sscsesereeneees 1 2 1 7 Notes for Same seca aE EAEE ER 1 2 1 8 EMC Conformity Standards csccceceecseeseeeseeseneseneeenensneeeeesenesenesseeseeeseneeenes 1 3 1 9 Installation of Explosion Protected Type Positioner c cseseeeeeneees 1 3 1 9 1 FM Cenitication EE 1 3 1 9 2 ALEX Certification screny ee eege deeg 1 7 1 9 3 CSA Cemificatlon EE 1 12 1 9 4 TIIS Certification EE 1 12 2 Part N MeS eege egene dee eee hehe tenet 2 1 2 1 Appearance and Part Names ccsecccsecseseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeeaeeeeseeeeseeenseeeeeaes 2 1 2 2 Block DISOCII
120. _8 MAXIMUM DISABLE_1 gt i i SS Configuration DISABLE_2 gt DISABLE_3 gt MIDDLE E la STATUS_OPTS DISABLE A DISABLE_5 z 4 SELECT_TYPE DISABLE _6 y GE 7 DISABLE_7 e pw MIN Good DISABLE Latched Good OP_SELECT e EE F1701 ai Figure 17 1 IS Block Input Parameters Input Terms IN_1 Block input 1 IN_2 Block input 2 IN_3 Block input 3 IN 4 Block input 4 IN_5 Block input 5 IN_6 Block input 6 IN_7 Block input 7 IN_8 Block input 8 DISABLE_1 Selector switch 1 to disable input 1 from being selected DISABLE_2 Selector switch 2 to disable input 2 from being selected DISABLE_3 Selector switch 3 to disable input 3 from being selected DISABLE A Selector switch 4 to disable input 4 from being selected DISABLE_5 Selector switch 5 to disable input 5 from being selected DISABLE _6 Selector switch 6 to disable input 6 from being selected DISABLE_7 Selector switch 7 to disable input 7 from being selected DISABLE_8 Selector switch 8 to disable input 8 from being selected OP_SELECT A parameter which can be set by an operator to forcibly employ the input of the selected number IM 21B04C01 01E lt 17 IS Function Block gt 17 2 Output Parameters Computation or Selection Results OUT Block output SELECTED Indicates the input number selected using the alternatives Other Parameters OUT RANGE Sets the OUT range This setting does not affect instrument action STATUS_OPTS
121. _VALUE and Range The parameter FINAL_VALUE contains the valve position setpoint for valve control and its value is always a percent value where 0 is the shut off position as is the case for the input signal High and low limits for the value of FINAL_VALUE value can be set in FINAL_VALUE_RANGE 12 2 4 Tight shut and Full open Actions The tight shut action is an action to decrease the output pressure to a level much lower than the 0 pressure level for an air to open valve or increase it to a level much higher than the 0 pressure level for an air to close valve when FINAL_VALUE value is less than FINAL_VALUE_CUTOFF_LO in order to ensure that the valve is tightly shut off After the tight shut action is activated when FINAL_VALUE value becomes greater than FINAL_VALUE CUTOFF_LO by 1 or more the tight shut action will turn off Conversely the full open action is an action to increase the output pressure to a level much higher than the 100 pressure level for an air to open valve or decrease it to a level much lower than the 100 pressure level for an air to close valve when FINAL MAL UE value is larger than FINAL _VALUE CUTOFF_HI in order to ensure that the valve is fully open After the full open action is activated when FINAL MAL UE value becomes less than FINAL VALUE_CUTOFF_HI by 1 or more the full open action will turn off Although the actual output signal level is changed to a level outside the range during t
122. a case the entire procedure may be made much easier by attaching the feedback lever to the feedback shaft as described in step 3 prior to carrying out step 2 Check the space behind the YVP110 beforehand 3 Attaching Feedback Lever The YVP110 with option code LV1 comes with two different feedback levers 1 and 2 shown below and the one with option code LV2 comes with lever 3 Check the specifications of the levers shown in Table 3 1 and Figure 3 2 and choose the lever most suitable for the control valve used 1 F9176HA n i ie SR 2 F9176HC gt gt C 1 3 F9176HD UD HEZ Figure 3 2 F0302 ai Feedback Levers Table 3 1 Specifications of Levers Allowable Range of Rotation Angle of Feedback Shaft 9 Pin to shaft Distance L Lever Model Stroke X F9176HA 10 to 60 mm 25 to 75 mm F9176HC 30 to 100 mm 75 to 115 mm F9176HD 5 to 20 mm 14 to 20 mm 10 to 25 degrees Note When assembling a YVP110 with a linear motion actuator ensure that the rotation angle of the YVP110 s feedback shaft does not exceed the allowable range 10 to 25 degrees shown above Only if the range of the rotation angle is within this specification it is guaranteed that the specified accuracy can be obtained by linearity correction see the description for travel calibration in Se
123. a high range transmitter by the range extension function 20 17520 RANGE_LO 0 Low limit for switching to a low range transmitter by the range extension function 21 17521 BIAS_IN_1 0 IN_1 bias 22 17522 GAIN_IN_1 0 IN_1 gain 23 17523 BIAS_IN_2 0 IN_2 bias 24 17524 GAIN_IN_2 0 IN_2 gain 25 17525 BIAS_IN_3 0 IN_3 bias 26 17526 GAIN_IN_3 0 IN_3 gain 27 17527 COMP_HI_ INF High limit of compensation factor f LIM 28 17528 COMP_LO_ INF Low limit of compensation factor f LIM 29 17529 ARITH_ 1to 10 0x01 Computation algorithm identification number TYPE Value Selection Name Description 1 Flow compensation Flow compensation linear linear 2 Flow compensation Flow compensation square root square root 3 Flow compensation Flow compensation approximate approximate expression A BTU flow Quantity of heat calculation 5 Traditional Multiply Multiplication and Divide division 6 Average Average calculation 7 Traditional summer Summation 8 Fourth order Ath order auxiliary Polynomial Type 1 input polynomial computation 9 HTG level HTG level compensation compensation 10 Fourth order Ath order main Polynomial Type 2 input polynomial computation BTU stand for British thermal value HTG stands for hydrostatic tank gauging 30 17530 BAL_TIME More than O Time taken to return to the set value 0 31 17531 BIAS 0 Bias value used to calculate the output 32 17532 GAIN 1 Gain value used to calculate th
124. abilitiesVariable Position B3 0x04 LAG Meaning Schedule in Description Value Whether the LAS schedule can 1 1 or cannot 0 be saved to Non volatile the non volatile memory Memory Record Supported B2 0x02 Last Values Whether to support 1 ornotto 0 support 0 LastValuesRecord Statistics Record Supported B1 0x01 Link Master Whether to support 1 0 or not to support 0 DlimeLinkMasterStatisticsRecord IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 2 Link Master Functions gt A 23 2 DilmeLinkMasterInfoRecord Sub Element Size Descrip index bytes tion 1 MaxSchedulingOverhead 1 V MSO 2 DefMinTokenDelegTime 2 V DMDT 2 DefTokenHoldTime 2 V DTHT A TargetTokenRotTime 2 V TTRT D LinkMaintTokHoldTime 2 V LTHT 6 TimeDistributionPeriod 4 V TDP 7 MaximumInactivityToClaimLasDelay 2 V MICD 8 LasDatabaseStatusSpduDistribution 2 une Period 3 PrimaryLinkMasterFlagVariable Explicitly declares the LAS Writing true OxFF to this parameter in a device causes that device to attempt to become the LAS However a request of writing true to this parameter in a device is rejected if the value of the same parameter in any other device that has a smaller node address within the same segment is true 4 LiveListStatusArrayVariable A 32 byte variable in which each bit represents the status
125. address OxF1 Node address OxF2 Node address OxF3 Node address OxF4 SlotTime 5 SlotTime 5 FA0202 ai Figure 2 Backup of LAS IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 2 Link Master Functions gt A 20 To set up a YVP as a device that is capable of backing up the LAS follow the procedure below NOTE When changing the settings in a YVP add the YVP to the segment in which an LAS is running After making changes to the settings do not turn off the power to the YVP for at least 60 seconds 1 Set the node address of the YVP In general use an address from 0x10 to V FUN 1 0x00 N d OxOF ot use ae Bridge device V FUN H NUN Not used V FUN V NUN OxE7 Basic device Ges Default address OXFD Portable device address OxFF FA0203 ai Figure 3 Node Address Ranges 2 In the LAS settings of the YVP set the values of V ST V MRD and V MID to the same as the respective lowest capability values in all the devices within the segment An example is shown below DimeBasiclnfo YVP Index 361 SM Sub Element EJA Description index SlotTime Capability 1 4 value for V ST MaxResponse Capability 3 Delay 3 5 value for V MRD MinInterPdu Capability 6 Delay 4 10 value for V MID In this case set SlotTime MaxResponseTime and MinInterPduDelay as follows ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord YVP Index 369 SM
126. address is changed UNINITIALIZED No tag nor address is set Tag clear Tag setting INITIALIZED Only tag is set Address clear Address setting SM_OPERATIONAL Tag and address are retained and the function block can be executed F0904 ai Status Transition by Setting PD Tag and Node Address Figure 9 4 IM 21B04C01 01E YVP110 has a PD Tag CV1001 and node address 247 or hexadecimal 0xF7 that are set upon shipment from the factory unless otherwise specified If two YVP110s are connected at a time one YVP110 will keep the address upon shipment while the other will have a default address See Figure 9 2 To change only the node address clear the address once and then set a new node address To set the PD Tag first clear the node address and clear the PD Tag then set the PD Tag and node address again Devices whose node address was cleared will await the default address randomly chosen from a range of 248 to 251 or from hexadecimal OxF8 to OxFB At the same time it is necessary to specify the device ID in order to correctly specify the device The device ID of the YVP110 is 5945430001 xxxxxxxx or 594543000 7xxxxxxxx The xxxxxxxx at the end of the above device ID is a total of 8 alphanumeric characters 9 5 Communication Setting To set the communication function it is necessary to change the database residing in SM VFD 9 5 1 VCR Setting Set VCR Virtual Communication Relationship which s
127. ailure respectively If this option is False then Set the status of BKCAL_OUT to device failure if the quality and substatus components of either or both BKCAL_IN_1 and BKCAL_IN_2 are Bad Sensor Failure and Device Failure respectively 15 6 Alarm Processing When the condition shown in the table below is met in the OS block the OS block changes the bit statuses of BLOCK_ERR accordingly and generates a block alarm BLOCK_ALM Table 15 2 BLOCK_ERR in OS Block Bit Name of Error Description Represented 1 Block The settings of IN_ARRAY Configuration and OUT_ARRAY satisfy Error one or more of the following conditions X21 lt X11 X12 lt X11 X22 lt X21 The target mode MODE_BLK target is OS 15 Out of Service IM 21B04C01 01E lt 16 PID Function Block gt 16 1 16 PID Function Block 16 1 General The PID function block receives an input signal performs PID control computation and outputs the control signal like a single loop controller In practice it performs PID computation based on the deviation between the setpoint set in the actual mode and the PV and generates a value of its output OUT so as to decrease the deviation The PID block works with other function blocks such as the Al and AO blocks connected to it The major functions of the PID block include e Filtering e Setpoint limiters both for the value and rate of change e Scaling of proc
128. al level e Minimum span 20 degrees e Maximum span 90 degrees e Mechanically allowable rotation angle 55 degrees If any one or more of the specifications above are not met the specified accuracy may not be guaranteed resulting in the YVP110 positioner being damaged An advance check is essential Range of rotation angle of shaft Within 45 degrees Mechanically allowable rotation angle Within 55 degrees F0308 ai Allowable Range of Rotation Angle of Feedback Shaft When Assembling with Rotary motion Actuator Figure 3 8 2 Fixing Bracket to YVP110 Use the four M8 bolts that come with the YVP110 to tightly fix the mounting bracket to the YVP110 See Part Names on page 2 1 The installation method is determined by the combination of the control valve and positioner as well as by the valve manufacturer who performs the adjustment For details consult the control valve manufacturer 3 Attaching Feedback Lever For a rotary motion actuator since it is often difficult to secure sufficient working space between the positioner and actuator attach the feedback lever before fixing the YVP 110 to the actuator Make sure that the stopper is located on the side of the YVP110 as shown in Figure 3 9 A caution It is extremely likely that attaching the lever in the wrong orientation will cause the feedback shaft to rotate at an angle exceeding its mech
129. allation and Operating Precautions for TIIS Flameproof Equipment SEENEN EX B03 Customer Maintenance Parts List YVP110 Advanced Valve PoSitioner cccccccscssessseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees CMPL21B04C01 01E Revision Record IM 21B04C01 01E lt Introduction gt viii Introduction The YVP110 advanced valve positioner is fully factory tested according to the specifications indicated upon the order This User s Manual consists of two parts Hardware and Functions The Hardware part gives instructions on handling wiring set up and maintenance of YVP 110 and the Functions part describes the software functions of YVP110 In order for the YVP 110 to be fully functional and to operate in an efficient manner both parts in this manual must be carefully read so that users become familiar with the functions operation and handling of the YVP110 m Notes on the User s Manual e This manual should be delivered to the end user e The information contained in this manual is subject to change without prior notice e The information contained in this manual in whole or part shall not be transcribed or copied without notice e Inno case does this manual guarantee the merchantability of the instrument or its adaptability to a specific client need e Should any doubt or error be found in this manual submit inquiries to your local dealer e No special specifications are contained in this manual e Changes to specifications
130. alth Laws of Japan and have a certification label in an appropriate location on its case and 2 Be used in compliance with the specifications marked on its certification label equipment nameplate and precautionary information furnished 2 Electrical Apparatus of Flameproof Type of Explosion Protected Construction Electrical apparatus which is of flameproof construction is subjected to a type test and certified by the Japanese Ministry of Labour aiming at preventing explosion caused by electrical apparatus in a factory or any location where inflammable gases or vapours may be present The flameproof construction is of completely enclosed type and its enclosure shall endure explosive pressures in cases where explosive gases or vapours entering the enclosure cause explosion In addition the enclosure construction shall be such that flame caused by explosion does not ignite gases or vapours outside the enclosure In this manual the word flameproof is applied to the flameproof equipment combined with the types of protection e o i and d as well as flameproof equipment 3 Terminology 1 Enclosure An outer shell of an electrical apparatus which encloses live parts and thus is needed to configure explosion protected construction 2 Shroud Acomponent part which is so designed that the fastening of joint surfaces cannot be loosened unless a special tool is used 3 Enclosure internal volume This is indicated
131. ameproof type conforming to IEC Standards are certified in combination with the flameproof apparatus So Yokogawa specified cable entry devices for flameproof type shall be used to meet this demand References 1 Type Certificate Guide for Explosion Protected Construction Electrical Machinery and Equipment relating to Technical Standards Conforming to International Standards issued by the Technical Institution of Industrial Safety Japan 2 USER S GUIDELINES for Electrical Installations for Explosive Gas Atmospheres in General Industry 1994 issued by the Japanese Ministry of Labour the Research Institute of Industrial Safety EX B03E Customer YVP110 Maintenance Advanced Valve Positioner Parts List SEN RS lt er 4 Item Part No Qty Description 1 F9341RA 1 Cover 2 F9341JP 1 O Ring 3 1 I P Cover 4 G9303AG 1 O Ring 5 1 I P Module 6 Y9408ZU 3 Bolt Hex Socket 7 1 UP Module Assembly 8 1 Name Plate 9 F9300AG 2 Screw 10 U0103FP 3 Screen Single Acting Actuator 4 Screen Double Acting Actuator 11 Below 2 Plug G9612EJ For Connection code 1 5 and 6 G9612EL For Connection code 3 12 See Table 1 2 Pressure Gauge Single Acting Actuator 3 Pressure Gauge Double Acting Actuator 13 G9601AM 1 Cable Gland Assy for TIIS Flameproof Type Option code G11 Table 1 Pressure Gauge Part Number item 12 Option code IGP GM IGB IGE 1 1 5 and 6 G9615ED G9615AR G9615EF
132. ameters IN_ARRAY and OUT_ARRAY IN_ARRAY X11 X12 X21 X22 OUT_ARRAY Y11 Y12 Y21 Y22 Coordinates P1 X11 Y11 and P2 X12 Y12 define the start and stop points of the characteristics for OUT_1 and P3 X21 Y21 and P4 X22 Y22 define those for OUT_2 These two operation characteristics may overlap each other or start from the same point and have different slopes however all the following conditions must be met at all times Settings of IN_ARRAY that do not meet one or more of these conditions cause a BLOCK_ERR disabling the block from exiting the O S mode X21 X11 X12 gt X11 X22 gt X21 In areas outside the endpoints i e start and stop points of each operation characteristic the output is retained at the Y value at the nearer end point For OUT_1 however depending on the setting of LOCKVAL it is possible to Set the value of OUT_1 to Y11 in the areas outside the endpoints if SP is greater than X12 and if LOCKVAL is false IM 21B04C01 01E lt 15 OS Function Block gt 15 2 When this action is enabled the value set in HYSTVAL serves as hysteresis which affects the output as follows When SP has increased beyond X12 OUT_1 is set to Y11 Then after SP has decreased below X12 minus HYSTVAL OUT_1 returns to follow the set characteristic LOCKVAL Lock OUT_1 X12 Y12 HYSTVAL lt 1 LOCKVAL No Lock X11 Y11 SP F1504 ai Figure 15 4 LOCKVAL and HY
133. an area free from high frequency noise RFI is recommended IM 21B04C01 01E lt 1 Notes on Handling gt 1 2 1 6 Insulation Resistance Test and Withstand Voltage Test A caution 1 Overvoltage of the test voltage that is so small that it does not cause an dielectric breakdown may in fact deteriorate insulation and lower the safety performance to prevent this it is recommended that the amount of testing be kept to a minimum The voltage for the insulation resistance test must be 500V DC or lower and the voltage for the withstand voltage test must be 500V AC or lower Failure to heed these guidelines may cause faulty operation Where a built in arrester is provided suffix code A the voltage for the insulation resistance test must be 100V DC or lower and the voltage for the withstand voltage test must be 100V AC or lower Failure to heed these guidelines may cause faulty operation a we Wu e Follow the steps below to perform the test the wiring of the communication line must be removed before initiating testing E Insulation resistance test procedure 1 Lay transition wiring between the terminal and the terminal 2 Connect the insulation resistance meter with the power turned OFF between the transition wiring of Step 1 above and ground terminal The polarity of the input terminals must be positive and that of the ground must be negative 3 Turn the power of the insulation resistance mete
134. anical limits of 55 degrees resulting in the YVP110 being seriously damaged A IMPORTANT A stopper is attached to the feedback shaft to prevent an over rotation of the shaft as shown below When installing the lever make sure that you install it on the stopper Stopper F0311 ai Next fix the lock screw 4 Fixing the YVP110 to Actuator with Bracket Insert the pin attached to the valve spindle into the long hole of the feedback shaft of the YVP110 positioner Before fixing the bracket to the actuator carefully position it so that the center of the rotation axis of the valve plug and that of the YVP110 poistioner s feedback shaft are aligned both horizontally and vertically After the alignment has been checked tightly fix the bracket to the actuator with the specified bolts Misalignment of these rotation axes decreases the level of accuracy IM 21B04C01 01E lt 3 Installing YVP110 on Actuator gt 3 5 Rotation axis Feedback shaft Feedback lever e of valve plug i fom Lock screw Hf v lt e Stopper SN Pin ee A Applicable pin O D 6 mm F0309 ai Figure 3 9 Inserting Pin into Hole of Feedback Lever In case of using F9176HA 3 2 3 A M Switching To perform manual operation of the valve using the A M automatic manual mode switching mechanism of the YVP110 th
135. ansneesncacesnasssuavescaesrenees 16 4 16 141 STATUS OPTS ugeet eeh ele deeg 16 4 BLOE TE E 16 4 16 16 Mode Shedding upon Computer Failure 2 csecceseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 16 4 16 17 E E 16 5 16 17 1 BlockAlarm BLOCK_ALM ccccssecseesseceeecseeeseeeeeseeseeeseeees 16 5 16 172 PROCESS ALANIS E 16 5 IM 21B04C01 01E 17 18 19 20 IS Function BOCK sisi sacnsssin bcc ends cbwceiteatncensientaipadiecmaetnsincaceneteandensenatacadeents 17 1 17 1 IS Function Block Schematic ceceecesneeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeneeeseeeneeenseenseess 17 1 17 2 Input SO e ET 17 3 17 2 1 Mode Handling sescca 17 3 17 2 2 MIN GOOD Handling cecceccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeaeseeteeeatens 17 3 17 3 DONO d d mesiana vend sisneaansviassaasxmneasecaaanatavaaceasecascnstadanssaseunaansssvaesaantunaean 17 4 17 3 1 OP SELECT Handling seserinis 17 4 17 3 2 SELECTION Handling 17 5 17 4 Output Processing isccicicsccscccscecscecscecccevscevscevaee ease ence ease vac ease veceveceveceeaceesceveee 17 11 17 4 1 Handling of SELEC TED A 17 11 17 4 2 OUT PROCESSING EE 17 12 174 3 STATUS OPTS s cehvncnunndiiannuieiiniinaiienutndn 17 13 17 5 Application Example siiccicacccesccccccccsstecsssescaceesascecseseesseessteeedseceasseneseeeastecsaaners 17 13 beantragt 18 1 18 1 AR Function Block Schematic ceecceeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeseeeseeneeeneees 18 1 18 2 Input Section iiss cca cases sai
136. arget unchanged 6 Shed to Manual Sets both MODE_BLK actual no return and MODE_BLK target to Man 7 Shed to retained If Cas is set in MODE_BLK target Normal target return sets MODE_BLK actual to Cas and leaves MODE_BLK target unchanged If Cas is not set in MODE_ BLK target sets MODE_BLK actual to Auto 2 and leaves MODE_BLK target unchanged 8 Shed to retained If Cas is set in MODE_BLK target No return target sets MODE_BLK actual to Cas and MODE_BLK target to Cas too If Cas is not set in MODE BLK target sets MODE_BLK actual to Auto 2 and MODE_BLK target to Cas 4 The modes to which the AO block can transfer are limited to those set in MODE_BLK permitted and the priority levels of modes are as shown below In fact if Normal shed normal return is set for SHED_OPT the detection of a computer failure causes MODE_BLK actual to change to Cas Auto or Man whichever is set in MODE_BLK permitted and has the lowest priority level sensor failure or device failure The target mode is O S 15 Out of Service IM 21B04C01 01E 14 1 lt 14 DI Function Block gt 14 DI Function Block 14 1 General AYVP110 contains two DI function blocks which individually transfer the valve position high and low limit switch signals generated by the transducer block The major functions of a DI function block include e Signal inversion I O processing optio
137. arm Level Setting HI HU ALM Occurs when the PV HI_HI_PRI increases above the HI HI UM value HI_ALM Occurs when the PV HI_PRI increases above HI LIM value LO_ALM Occurs when the PV LO_PRI decreases below the LO_LIM value LO_LO_ALM Occurs when the PV LO_LO_LIM decreases below the LO_LO _LIM value DV_HI_ALM Occurs when the value DV HI PR of PV SP increases above the DV_HI_LIM value DV_LO_ALM Occurs when the value DV LO PRI of PV SP decreases below the DV_LO_LIM value IM 21B04C01 01E lt 17 IS Function Block gt 17 1 17 IS Function Block The function of the Input Selector IS block is to automatically select one signal from multiple input signals using a specified selection method The IS block is used for selective control in which one measured quantity is selected from multiple measured quantities to be transmitted to the controller as a controlled variable This feature is primarily used for temperature control systems 17 1 IS Function Block Schematic The following shows the Input Selector function block schematic SELECTION IN_1 Kn Man IN 3 Ch i ie First Good MODE IN_3 gt SE gt OUT NA 4 Auto IN 5 MINIMUM IN_6 gt gt SELECTE IN_7 gt IN
138. as calibrated 30 2030 XD CAL DATE 01 01 00 Shows and is used to record the date when the positioner was calibrated 31 2031 XD_CAL_WHO Null Shows and is used to record the person who calibrated the positioner 32 2032 ALARM_SUM Shows the alarm summary current alarm statuses acknowledged unacknowledged states masking states for the transducer block IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 1 Function Block Parameters gt Relative Default z ogi z index Index Parameter Name factory setting Write Description Setting range 33 2033 POSITION_CHAR_ 1 O S Defines the valve position to flow characteristics TYPE 1 linear 2 equal 50 1 3 equal 30 1 4 quick open inverse of 50 1 equal 5 Camflex Percentage 255 user defined 10 segment function 34 2034 POSITION_CHAR 10 20 30 40 O S Defines the coordinates of the segment function 50 60 70 80 when 255 is set for POSITION_CHAR_TYPE 90 0 to 100 only simple decreasing can be allowed 35 2035 LIMSW_HI_LIM 110 Setting of high limit switch 36 2036 LIMSW_LO_LIM 10 Setting of low limit switch 37 2037 ELECT_TEMP Indicates the temperature on amplifier board 38 2038 TEMPERATURE_ 1001 degC O S Defines the unit of temperature indication above UNIT 1001 degC 1002 degF 39 2039 SUPPLY 140kPa O S Air supply pressure irrespective of control PRESSURE 40 2040 SPRING_
139. bijzijnde vestiging van Yokogawa of met een vertegenwoordiger Kaikkien ATEX Ex tyyppisten tuotteiden k ytt hjeet ovat saatavilla englannin saksan ja ranskankielisin Mik li tarvitsette Ex tyyppisten tuotteiden ohjeita omalla paikallisella kielell nnne ottakaa yhteytt l himp n Yokogawa toimistoon tai edustajaan Todos os manuais de instru es referentes aos produtos Ex da ATEX est o dispon veis em Ingl s Alem o e Franc s Se necessitar de instru es na sua l ngua relacionadas com produtos Ex dever entrar em contacto com a delega o mais pr xima ou com um representante da Yokogawa Tous les manuels d instruction des produits ATEX Ex sont disponibles en langue anglaise allemande et fran aise Si vous n cessitez des instructions relatives aux produits Ex dans votre langue veuillez bien contacter votre repr sentant Yokogawa le plus proche Alle Betriebsanleitungen f r ATEX Ex bezogene Produkte stehen in den Sprachen Englisch Deutsch und Franz sisch zur Verf gung Sollten Sie die Betriebsanleitungen f r Ex Produkte in Ihrer Landessprache ben tigen setzen Sie sich bitte mit Ihrem rtlichen Yokogawa Vertreter in Verbindung Alla instruktionsb cker f r ATEX Ex explosionss kra produkter r tillg ngliga p engelska tyska och franska Om Ni beh ver instruktioner f r dessa explosionss kra produkter p annat spr k skall Ni kontakta n rmaste Yokogawakontor eller representant Oda
140. but may reset other parameters to the defaults except a minor update that does not change the number of parameters Hence where necessary save the parameters using an engineering tool parameter setting utility or the like before carrying out a software download and then reconfigure the field device s after the download For details see Section A4 6 A caution The current dissipation of the target field device increases transitorily immediately after a download due to erasing of the FlashROM s contents Use a fieldbus power supply which has sufficient capacity to cover such increases in feed current A caution Upon completion of the activation the target fieldbus device performs resetting internally which temporarily halts fieldbus communication and function block executions Be especially careful about a valve positioner the output air pressure will fall to the minimum level e Zero A caution Do not turn off the power to a field device or disconnect the download tool during a download or activation The device may fail as a result A NOTE Be careful about the noise on the fieldbus link If the fieldbus is noisy the downloading may take a very long time or fail lt Appendix 4 Software Download gt A 31 A4 5 Download Files Download files have the following filenames with the filename extension of ffd Take care to choose the correct download file for the target field device
141. by the total internal volume of the flameproof enclosure minus the volume of the internal components essential to equipment functions 4 Path length of joint surface On a joint surface the length of the shortest path through which flame flows from the inside to outside of the flameproof enclosure This definition cannot be applied to threaded joints 5 Gaps between joint surfaces The physical distance between two mating surfaces or differences in diameters if the mating surfaces are cylindrical Note The permissible sizes of gaps between joint surfaces the path length of a joint surface and the number of joint threads are determined by such factors as the enclosure s internal volume joint and mating surface construction and the explosion classification of the specified gases and vapours 4 Installation of Flameproof Apparatus 1 Installation Area Flameproof apparatus may be installed in accordance with applicable gases in a hazardous area in Zone 1 or 2 where the specified gases are present Those apparatus shall not be installed in a hazardous area in Zone 0 Note Hazardous areas are classified in zones based upon the frequency of the appearance and the duration of an explosive gas atmosphere as follows Zone 0 An area in which an explosive gas atmosphere is present continuously or is present for long periods Zone 1 An area in which an explosive gas atmosphere is likely to occur in normal operation Zo
142. changes value to an index from 60 to 62 or from 100 to 103 The span of rotation angle is incorrect or the 50 position deviation from the horizontal level is too large Correct the installation and try auto tuning again Chapter 3 5 3 When auto tuning has finished AUTO_TUNE_ RESULT changes value to an index from 60 to 62 or from 120 to 123 The valve hysteresis is large Carry out manual tuning Appendix 6 20 6 Troubleshooting Position Pressure and Temperature Sensors Problem The position sensor signal remains unchanged Presumed Cause The feedback lever is not properly attached Remedy See the descriptions for positioner installation Ref Section Chapter 3 The position sensor has failed or there is breakage in the cable between the sensor and amplifier If ADVAL_BW does not change value when the shaft rotates it may be necessary to replace the position sensor Contact our nearest representative or service station The positon sensor signal is unstable or XD_ERROR indicates error 124 The position sensor has failed or there is breakage in the cable between the sensor and amplifier It may be necessary to replace the position sensor Contact the nearest representative or service station The pressure sensor signal is unstable or XD_ERROR indicates error 121 The pressure sensor has failed It may be necessary to replace the amplifi
143. ck inside the YVP110 positioner For details of each parameter refer to the parameters list in Appendix 1 Follow the procedure below Set basic parameters Section 5 2 Carry out tuning Section 5 3 Check valve actions Section 5 4 Set transducer block s parameters Section 5 5 F0501 ai Figure 5 1 Setup Procedure 5 2 Setting Basic Parameters First set the target mode s in the parameters MODE_BLK of the transducer block and AO function block to O S Out of Service When either one or both of the transducer block and AO function block are in the O S mode the transducer block s parameters that determine the valve actions are write locked 1 Selecting the Acting Direction of Valve In the parameter ACT_FAIL_ACTION set the value 1 or 2 corresponding to the acting direction of the valve whether the valve opens or closes due to an increase of the pneumatic pressure The setting in ACT_FAIL_ACTION determines the relationship between the pneumatic input signal and 0 100 of the valve position where the 0 position means complete closure 1 air to open 2 air to close AA IMPORTANT For the transducer block the 0 output always means complete closure of the valve Set ACT_FAIL_ACTION correctly in accordance with the acting direction of the valve used Nonetheless the 0 100 of the transducer block s output can be logically reversed by setting IO_OPTS in the AO block to true Independently of the above
144. command 1 Write Response Returned 4 Reserved 1 Reserved 5 ReadyForDwnid Delay 2 Indicates the maximum delay after receipt of the PREPARE_FOR_ Secs DWNLD command to proceed to transition from DWNLD_NOT_READY to DWNLD_READY 6 Activation Delay Secs 2 Indicates the maximum delay after receipt of the ACTIVATE command to proceed to transition from DWNLD_OK to DWNLD_NOT_READY 2 DOMAIN_DESCRIPTOR Sub Size SR index Element Bytes Description 1 Command 1 Reads writes software download commands 1 PREPARE_FOR_DWNLD instruction of download preparation 2 ACTIVATE activation instruction 3 CANCEL _DWNLD instruction of download cancellation 2 State 1 Indicates the current download status 1 DWNLD_NOT_READY download not ready 2 DWNLD_PREPARING download under preparation 3 DWNLD_READY ready for download 4 DWNLD_OK download complete 5 DOWNLOADING download underway 6 CHECKSUM_FAIL not used in this product 7 EMS DOWNLOAD FAIL failure during download 8 DWNLD_INCOMPLETE download error detected at restart 9 VCR_FAIL not used in this product 10 OTHER download error other than 6 and 7 detected 3 Error Code 2 Indicates the error during a download and activation 0 success configuration retained download successfully completed 32768 65535 Download error See Table 4 for error codes 4 Download Domain Index 4 Indicates the index number of the domain for software downloading 5 Download Domain Header 4 Indicates the index
145. conduit wiring or insulated wires shall be used as recommended by the USER S GUIDELINES for Electrical Installations for Explosive Gas Atmospheres in General Industry published in 1994 e For conduit pipes heavy gauge steel conduits conforming to JIS C 8305 Standard shall be used e Flameproof sealing fittings shall be used in the vicinity of the wiring connections and those fittings shall be filled with sealing compounds to complete sealing of the apparatus In addition to prevent explosive gases moisture or flame caused by explosion form being propagated through the conduit always provide sealing fittings to complete sealing of the conduit in the following locations a In the boundaries between the hazardous and non hazardous locations b In the boundaries where there is a different classification of hazardous location e For the connections of the apparatus with a conduit pipe or its associated accessories G type parallel pipe threads JIS B 0202 shall be used to provide a minimum of five thread engagement to complete tightness In addition since these parallel threads do not have sealing property non hardening sealant such as liquid gaskets shall thus be applied to those threads for ensuring waterproofness If metal conduits need flexibility use flameproof flexible fittings 6 Maintenance of Flameproof Apparatus To maintain the flameproof apparatus do the following For details see Chapter 10 MAINTENANCE OF
146. control parameter 1 2 set by auto tuning and travel calibration 0 5 to 50 rad mA 52 2052 MEAS_GAIN 0 rad mA Measurement gain of UP module control relay and valve a parameter set by auto tuning 53 2053 VALVE_TC 0 sec Proportional factor of response speed of valve a parameter set by auto tuning 54 2054 VALVE_HYS 0 Hysteresis of valve actions a parameter set by auto tuning 55 2055 VALVE_SLIP_WIDTH 0 Slip width of valve actions a parameter set by auto tuning 56 2056 MEAS_PRESS_AIR 0kPa Air pressure a parameter set by auto tuning Valid when an optional pressure sensor is specified IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 1 Function Block Parameters gt A 6 Gees Index Parameter Name eer Write Description Setting range 57 2057 MEAS_PRESS_ Air supply pressure a parameter set by auto SUPPLY tuning Valid when an optional pressure sensor is specified 58 2058 MEAS_SPRING_ Spring range of valve a parameter set by auto RANGE tuning Valid when an optional pressure sensor is specified 59 2059 CONTROL_DIR Defines the acting direction of the feedback loop 1 direct 2 reverse 60 2060 THETA_HI 1 2 0 2 rad Upper angle signal limit of position sensor in radians 61 2061 THETA_LO 1 2 0 2 rad Upper angle signal limit of position sensor in radians 62 2062 THETA P
147. cting setting in CONTROL_OPTS Table 16 2 Direction of Control Action Value of Direct Acting Resulting Action True The output increases when the input PV is greater than the setpoint SP False The output decreases when the input PV is greater than the setpoint SP 16 8 Control Action Bypass The PID control computation can be bypassed so as to set the SP value in the control output OUT as shown below Setting BYPASS to on bypasses the PID control computation CAS_IN Setpoint RCAS_IN Control SP Figure 16 3 Control Action Bypass Output OUT F1603 ai IM 21B04C01 01E lt 16 PID Function Block gt 16 3 16 9 Feed forward Feed forward is an action to add a compensation input signal FF_VAL to the output of the PID control computation and is typically used for feed forward control In practice the value of the change in FF_ VAL is scaled to the range of the OUT multiplied by the value of FF_GAIN and then added to the PID control computation result as illustrated by Figure 16 4 When the status of FF_VAL is Bad the value of LUV Lust usable value is used instead of FF_VAL If LUV contains no value the feed forward action is not carried out FF_VAL Value in engineering unit FF_SCALE OUT_SCALE y 0 100 PID computation SEH OUT gt F1604 ai Figure 16 4 Feed forward 16 10 External output Tracking LO External output tracking is an action of outputt
148. ction 5 3 Carrying out Auto Tuning Feedback shaft Clamp pin on side of valve Figure 3 3 Stroke of Lever When LV1 is specified the hardware for attaching the lever to the feedback shaft and the spring for fixing the clamp pin are attached to the F9176HA the smaller feedback lever for generally used mid capacity actuators Thus when using the F9176HC the feedback lever for high capacity actuators detach and use the hardware and spring from the F9176HA See Figure 3 4 To do so first detach the spring lt 4 gt Then detach the clip lt 1 gt and remove the hardware lt 2 gt and lt 3 gt Attach lt 1 gt to lt 4 gt to the F9176HC feedback lever for high capacity actuators in the reverse order The hardware and the spring attached to the LV2 lever is not compatible with those for the LV1 lever JI EI 4 7 DE t A Ss Lever F0304 ai Figure 3 4 Disassembling a Lever Assembly When determining which lever to use follow the procedure below to make a linkage between the YVP110 positioner and control valve s stem via the clamp and lever The adjustment of this linkage is a decisive factor for determining the characteristics of the control valve combined with the YVP110 positioner 1 Insert the YVP110 s feedback shaft into the small hole on the stopper side of the lever as show
149. ctrical Connection The type of electrical connection is stamped near the electrical connection port according to the following marking Screw Size Marking ISO M20 x 1 5 female AM ANSI 1 2 NPT female AN Location of the marking F0109 ai 3 Installation A WARNING All wiring shall comply with local installation requirement and local electrical code IM 21B04C01 01E lt 1 Notes on Handling gt 1 11 The grounding terminals are located on the inside and outside of the terminal area Connect the cable to grounding terminal in accordance with wiring procedure 1 or 2 1 Internal grounding terminal 2 External grounding i terminal Zen g HI F0111 ai Wiring Procedure for Grounding Terminals 4 Operation A WARNING e OPEN CIRCUIT BEFORE REMOVING COVER INSTALL INACCORDANCE WITH THIS USER S MANUAL e Take care not to generate mechanical sparking when access to the instrument and peripheral devices in hazardous locations e Electrostatic charge may cause an explosion hazard Avoid any actions that cause the generation of electrostatic charge such as rubbing with a dry cloth on coating face of product e Carbon disulphide is excluded for enclosures under gas atmosphere 5 Maintenance and Repair A WARNING The instrument modification or parts replacement by other than authorized Representative of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited
150. d by Unit Code in SPRING_RANGE and can be selected from 1133 kPa 1137 bar 1141 psi 1145 kgficm2 IM 21B04C01 01E 13 1 lt 13 AO Function Block gt 13 AO Function Block 13 1 General The AO function block receives the control signal from the transducer block and outputs it to the actuator The major functions of the AO function block include e Scaling e Setpoint limiters for both the value and rate of change e Simulation e Valve position feedback e Actions upon abnormality of upstream block e Signal inversion The AO function block performs bi directional signal handling transfer of the valve control signal to the transducer block forward path and feedback of the valve position signal from the transducer block to the upstream block backward path BKCAL_OUT CAS_IN OUT ES RCAS_OUT SCAS IN CAS Transducer F1301 ai Figure 13 1 Inputs Outputs of AO Function Block BKCAL_OUT RCAS_OUT m SP i Setpoint SP_RATE_DN SP_RATE_UP Sp H UM Sp LO UN MODE ISHED_OPT i PV Convert l XD_SCALE i PV_SCALE Out Convert PV_SCALE XD_SCALE Simulate d See m CHANNEL SIMULATE I READBACK CAS_IN RCAS_IN Fault State FSTATE_TIME FSTATE_VAL F1302 ai Figure 13 2 Function Diagram of AO Function Block 13 2 Modes The target mode for the AO function block can be set from five block modes RCas Cas Auto Man and O S Regardless of
151. d forward input value The FF_VAL value is scaled to a value with the same scale as for OUT multiplied by the FF_GAIN value and then added to the output of the PID computation 41 8041 FF_SCALE 0 100 Scale limits used for converting the FF_VAL value to a non dimensional value 42 8042 FF_GAIN 0 Man Gain for FF_VAL 43 8043 UPDATE_ Shows the contents of an update event upon EVT occurrence 44 8044 BLOCK_ALM Shows the contents of a block alarm upon occurrence 45 8045 ALARM_SUM Enable Shows the alarm summary current alarm statuses acknowledged unacknowledged states masking states 46 8046 ACK_OPTION OxFFFF Selects whether or not the alarms related to the DI block are automatically self acknowledged 47 8047 ALARM_HYS 0 5 Hysteresis for alarm detection and resetting to prevent each alarm from occurring and recovering repeatedly within a short time 48 8048 HI_HI_PRI 0 Priority order of HI_HI_ALM alarm 49 8049 HI HI UM INF Setting for HI HU AL M alarm 50 8050 HI_PRI 0 Priority order of HI_LALM alarm 51 8051 HI UM INF Setting for HI ALM alarm 52 8052 LO PRI 0 Priority order of LO_ALM alarm 53 8053 LO_LIM INF Setting for LO_ALM alarm 54 8054 LO LO PRI 0 Priority order of LO_LO_ALM alarm 55 8055 j LO LO LIM INF Setting for LO_LO_ALM alarm 56 8056 DV_HI_PRI 0 Priority order of DV_HI_ALM alarm 57 8057 DV_HI_LIM INF Setting for DV_HI_ALM alarm 58 8058 DV_LO_PRI 0 Priority order of DV_LO_AL
152. d in Class II and Class II environments Note 2 Installation should be in accordance with National Electrical Code ANSI NFPA 70 Sections 504 505 and Local Electrical Code Note 3 The configuration of Associated Apparatus must be Factory Mutual Research Approved Note 4 Associated Apparatus manufacturer s installation drawing must be followed when installing this equipment Note 5 No revision to drawing without prior Factory Mutual Research Approval Note 6 Terminator and supply unit must be FM approved Note 7 Installation requirements Vmax 2 Voc or Vt Ca 2 Ci Ccable La 2 Li Lcable IM 21B04C01 01E 1 9 2 ATEX Certification A WARNING e Do not open the cover when energized e When the ambient temp 270 C Use the heat resisting cable290 C e Take care not to generate mechanical sparking when access to the instrument and peripheral devices in hazardous locations e Electrostatic charge may cause an explosion hazard Avoid any actions that cause the generation of electrostatic charge such as rubbing with a dry cloth on coating face of product 1 Technical Data A ATEX Intrinsically Safe Type Ex ia Caution for ATEX Intrinsically Safe Type A NOTE Keep the safety use conditions for both 1G and 1D when used in the hazardous gas and dust area Note1 Model YVP110 Advanced Valve Positioner with optional code KS25 for potentially explosive atmospheres e Applicable standard EN6
153. d in the YVP 110 50 1050 DEVICE_STATUS_6 O Not used in the YVP 110 51 1051 DEVICE_STATUS_7 O Not used in the YVP 110 52 1052 DEVICE_STATUS_8 O Not used in the YVP 110 1 FF 891 Foundation Specification Function Block Application Process Part 2 A1 2 Parameters of Transducer Block Parameters marked with 1 are automatically set and changed by autotuning Parameters marked with 2 are automatically set and changed by Travel calibration Relative Index Index 2000 Default Parameter Name factory setting Block Header Write Block tag O S Description Setting range Information about this block including the block tag DD revision execution time 2001 2002 ST_REV TAG_DESC Incremented when a change is made to the parameter settings for the transducer block to indicate the revision level of the settings and used to see whether or not there is a change in parameter settings Universal parameter storing the description of the tag 2003 STRATEGY 1 Universal parameter used by an upper level system to classify the function blocks 2004 ALERT_KEY 1 Universal parameter used as a key to identify the point from which an alert is issued normally used by an upper level system to select alerts to provide to a particular operator who covers a specific area of the plant 2005 MODE_BLK O S Universal parameter that indicates the block ope
154. e The dead band of integral action Write 4 or 3 to AUTO_TUNE_EXEC 5 3 12 7 is too little to redo auto tuning Or increase the Appendix 1 SERVO_DEADBAND setting until Appendix 6 the valve stops oscillating There s air leak from the pipe Check the piping and attachment of Chapter 3 of output pressure or feedback the lever and write 4 or 3 to AUTO_ 5 3 lever is not correctly attached TUNE_EXEC to redo autotuning Valve responses are too If only the responses that require Replace the regulator slow air suction are slow it means that the regulator s maximum capacity is large enough The I P module s nozzle has Check whether or not error 114 12 6 1 become blocked from dirt or 122 occurs in XD_ERROR in contained in the air supply or the steady states If it does occur like contact the nearest service station or representative office The control relay s nozzle Check whether or not error 114 or 12 6 1 has become blocked from dirt 122 occurs in XD_ERROR in steady contained in the air supply or the states like The control gain is insufficient Write 4 or 3 to AUTO_TUNE_EXEC 5 3 12 7 to redo auto tuning Or increase the Appendix 1 SERVO_GAIN setting Appendix 6 There s air leak from the pipe Check the piping and attachment of Chapter 3 of output pressure or feedback the lever and write 4 or 3toAUTO_ 5 3 lever is not correctly attached TUNE_EXEC to redo autotuning The pressure balance deviation
155. e Transducer Status Status of input from transducer Transducer Value Value of input from transducer Enable Disable Whether to enable 2 or disable 1 simulation 13 5 IO_OPTS and STATUS _ OPTS IO_OPTS and STATUS_OPTS are parameters that stipulate options about block s signal processing and mode transitions The settings of these options are made by setting or resetting the respective bits on true off false Table 13 1 shows the options available in O_OPTS of the AO block Table 13 1 lO_OPTS of AO Block Bit Meaning Description O Invert Not available 1 SP PV Track in Man Equalizes SP to PV when target is MAN mode 2 Reserved Not available 3 SP PV Track in LO Equalizes SP to PV in LO mode 4 SP Track retained target In LO mode Equalizes SP to RCAS_IN if target mode is RCas and to CAS_IN if target mode is Cas D Increase to close Inverts the signal while it goes from SP through OUT 6 Fault State to value Uses a FSTATE__ VALUE in LO mode Uses a value preset for fault state also at a restart Sets the target mode to Man upon activation of the fault state 7 Use Fault State value on restart 8 Target to Man if Fault State activated H Use PV for BKCAL_ Sets the value of PV OUT in BKCAL_OUT and RCAS_OUT 10 Low cutoff Not available II Reserved SIS Latch Not available Fstate 12 Units Conversion Not available
156. e following equation is added in addition to the deviation If 0 is set this function is invalid Value added to the proportional term deviation x deviation SERVO_P_ALPHA You can obtain a quadratic curve in which the proportional term doubles when the deviation equals the SERVO_P_ALPHA and the added value is in reverse proportion to an increase in the value of SERVO_P_ALPHA Proportional added values Proportional value GA Proportional value P Deviation 10 SERVO_P_ALPHA FA0609 ai You can obtain an effect to increase the apparent gain for a large step without changing the response characteristics for a small step However as long as the deviation is more than 10 the added value is fixed to a value calculated when the deviation is 10 INTERNAL_GAIN Tuning range 0 5 to 50 rad mA Default 5 rad mA INTERNAL_GAIN is the total gain of the I P module the control relay the valve the actuator and the feedback lever INTERNAL_GAIN is part of the loop gain of PI D control This value is usually determined by auto tuning and travel calibration so you do not need to change the value IM 21B04C01 01E lt Installation and Operating Precautions for TIIS Flameproof Equipment gt 1 Installation and Operating Precautions for TIIS Flameproof Equipment Apparatus Certified Under Technical Criteria IEC compatible Standards 1 General The following describes precautions on el
157. e maintained Fieldbus power supply YvP110 HOST F0802 ai Figure 8 2 Cabling Before using a Fieldbus configuration tool other than the existing host confirm it does not affect the loop functionality in which all devices are already installed in operation Disconnect the relevant control loop from the bus if necessary 8 5 Integration of DD If the host supports DD Device Description the DD of the YVP110 needs to be installed Check if host has the following directory under its default DD directory 594543 0001 594543 0007 EE 594543 is the manufacturer number of Yokogawa Electric Corporation and 0001 or 0007 is the YVP110 device number respectively If this directory is not found DD of YVP110 has not been included Create the above directory and copy the DD file Om0n ffo OmOn sym m n is a numeral into the directory Once the DD is installed in the directory the name and attribute of all parameters of the YVP110 are displayed Off line configuration is allowed by using the capability file CFF If you do not have the DD or capability file for the YVP110 you can download it from www yokogawa com fld AA IMPORTANT For offline configuration use the CFF which matches the specification of the instrument to be configured For YVP110 there are three types of CFF file one for standard type instruments second for the instruments with one or two PID function blocks are available and t
158. e AO function block normal operation range 42 Large Response W Waiting time for measuring and transducer block to O S Speed wanina ines 4 seconds Table 12 2 Types of Auto Tuning 43 Large hysteresis W Hysteresis gt 30 warning value Comment Description 44 Large slip width W Slip width gt 5 1 Off warning 2 Travel calibration Travel calibration at the 60 SE span wW SE span lt 15 tuning at stop point tight shut and full open 9 g positions 61 Large angle span W VALVE_TYPE is linear and warning the rotation angle span 3 Control parameter Tuning of control exceeds 55 degrees or tuning parameters VALVE_TYPE is rotary and A Travel calibration at Sequential execution the rotation angle span stop point amp Control of travel calibration and l exceeds 99 degrees parameter tuning control parameter tuning 62 50 angle warning W vogi ipa i ae and 3 z the rotation angle at the 5 Cancel execution Cancellation of auto 50 position exceeds 20 SS tuning EE degrees D Travel calibration at Zero point and span 100 Small angle span Ww Rotation angle span lt 5 stop point without calibration at the tight shut error degrees time out for very and full open positions 101 Large angle span E VALVE_TYPE is linear and large valve without time out error the rotation angle span 7 Travel calibration Step by step travel exceeds 60 degrees or with step by step for calibration at the tight shut VALVE_TYPE is rotary
159. e applicable for use in hazardous locations e Applicable standard C22 2 No 0 No 0 4 No 0 5 No 25 No 30 No 94 No 1010 1 e Certificate 1186507 e Explosionproof for Class l Groups B C and D Class II Groups E F and G Class Ill e Enclosure Rating Type 4X e Temperature Code T6 and T5 e Ambient Temperature 40 to 75 C for T6 40 to 82 C for T5 Note 2 Wiring e All wiring shall comply with National Electrical Code ANSI NFPA 70 and Local Electrical Codes e FACTORY SEALED CONDUIT SEAL NOT REQUIRED e When the ambient temperature is 60 C or more use an external cable having a maximum allowable heat resistance of at least 90 C Note 3 Maintenance and Repair e The instrument modification or parts replacement by other than authorized representative of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited and will void CSA Certification lt 1 Notes on Handling gt 1 12 1 9 4 TIIS Certification A TIIS Flameproof Type The model YVP110 Valve Positioner with optional code JF3 which has obtained certification according to technical criteria for explosion protected construction of electric machinery and equipment Standards Notification No 556 from the Japanese Ministry of Labor conforming to IEC standards is designed for hazardous areas where inflammable gases or vapors may be present This allows installation in Division 1 and 2 areas To preserve the safety of flameproof equipment requires
160. e fail safe action For example when the status of the CAS_IN input of the AO block from its upstream block indicates a specific status such as a communication error the case is regarded as an abnormality and fault state actions including a mode change are enacted Fault state IM 21B04C01 01E lt 13 AO Function Block gt 13 2 When any of the following status keeps for the moment of time specified in FSTATE_TIME the block goes to the fault state and the mode changes to LO mode 1 Target mode is Cas and the status of CAS_IN is Bad No Comm 2 Target mode is Cas and the status of CAS_IN is Good IFS 3 Target mode is RCas and the status of RCAS IN is Good IFS In LO mode the block holds the output OUT or outputs FSTATE_VAL according to the setting of IO_OPTS The factory setting is to hold the output 13 4 Backward Path The valve position signal from the transducer block is written to the parameter READBACK in the AO block then scaled based on XD_SCALE and PV_SCALE to be converted to the process variable PV The value of PV is fed back to the PID block or an upper level system as the valve position signal via the parameter BKCAL_OUT and RCAS_OUT If SIMULATE is set to Enable the value of SIMULATE Simulate_Value is always set in READBACK SIMULATE contains the following data Simulate Status Status to be set in simulation mode Simulate Value Value to be set in simulation mod
161. e nozzle to clean it After cleaning the nozzle place the nozzle and O ring at the original position and attach the control relay again F0602 ai Figure 6 2 Cleaning the Nozzle A caution All the O rings used for the sealing of pneumatic signal circuits are made of silicon rubber The sealing capability is degraded if general silicon grease is applied When applying grease to a sealing part use a type of grease compatible with silicon rubber such as fluoride grease and grease for silicon rubber IM 21B04C01 01E 6 3 Part Replacement 6 3 1 Replacing the Control Relay Assembly 1 Decrease the air supply pressure to zero 2 Using a Philips screwdriver unscrew the four mounting screws on the bottom face 3 Pull the relay assembly downwards to detach it 4 To mount a new relay assembly remove the mounting screws and washers from the old assembly and use them to mount the new assembly in place by tightening them from below When using the Double Acting Type adjust the pressure balance of the control relay as required in reference to Section 6 3 4 After completing the replacement of the control relay assembly carry out tuning and check the valve s actions in reference to Sections 5 3 and 5 4 5 Kg Mounting screw F0603 ai Figure 6 3 Replacing the Control Relay Assembly A caution For the Double Acting Type the recommended replacement cycle for the control relay is eithe
162. e output 33 17533 OUT_HI_ INF Maximum output value LIM 34 17534 OUT_LO_ INF Minimum output value LIM 35 17535 UPDATE_ Indicate event information if an update setting change EVT occurs 36 17536 BLOCK Indicates alarm information if a block alarm occurs ALM IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 1 Function Block Parameters gt A 18 A1 9 1O_OPTS Availability of Options for Each Block Bit Contents DI AO O Invert x 1 SP PV Track in Man x 2 Reserved 3 SP PV Track in LO x 4 SP Track retained target x 5 Increase to close x 6 Fault State to value x 7 Use Fault State value on restart 8 Target to Man if Fault State activated x 9 Use PV for BKCAL_OUT x 10 Low cutoff II Reserved SIS Latch Fstate 12 Units Conversion A1 10 STATUS_OPTS Availability of Options for Each Block Bit Contents IFS if BAD IN DI AO OS PID IS x IFS if BAD CAS_IN Use Uncertain as Good Propagate Fault Forward Propagate Fault Backward Target to Manual if BAD IN Uncertain if Limited BAD if Limited Uncertain if Man mode Ool NIIAJ AIIN o Target to next permitted mode if Bad CAS_IN A1 11 CONTROL_OPTS Availability of Options for Each Block Bit Contents PID 0 Bypass Enable x 1 SP PV Track in Man x 2 SP PV Track in ROut x 3 SP PV T
163. e setpoint upon occurrence 24 14024 BLOCK_ALM Shows the contents of a block alarm upon occurrence IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 1 Function Block Parameters gt A 12 A1 6 Parameters of PID Block Optional Index PID1 8000 through 8065 PID2 8100 through 8165 see Index oo T o Write Description 0 8000 BLOCK Information about this block including the block tag DD HEADER revision execution time 1 8001 ST_REV 0 Incremented when a change is made to the parameter settings for the PID block to indicate the revision level of the settings and used to see whether there is a change in parameter settings 2 8002 TAG_DESC _ Spaces Universal parameter storing the description of the tag 3 8003 STRATEGY 1 Universal parameter used by an upper level system to classify the function blocks 4 8004 ALERT_KEY 1 Universal parameter used as a key to identify the point from which an alert is issued normally used by an upper level system to select alerts to provide to a particular operator who covers a specific area of the plant 5 8005 MODE_BLK O S Universal parameter that indicates the block operation conditions and is composed of actual mode target mode permitted modes and normal mode 6 8006 BLOCK_ERR Indicates the error statuses related to the block itself 7 8007 PV Indicates the primary analog value or the corres
164. e the conductors incorrectly connected in other words is the plus side connected to minus and vice versa e Has the power to the fieldbus been turned on Is the terminal to terminal voltage equal to or greater than 9 V e Is the terminator correctly installed Is ahost system connected to the fieldbus 20 2 Troubleshooting Communications Problem Presumed Cause Remedy Ref Section Communication with the YVP110 cannot be performed Wiring is incorrect Correct wiring 4 3 8 4 The power is off or the power supply voltage is less than 9 V Supply proper voltage 4 3 Chapter 7 The address detection range is Correct address detection range 9 4 not correctly set Communication with the The fieldbus is experiencing a Using an oscilloscope or the YVP110 is frequently cut off large amount of noise like check the waveform on the fieldbus The YVP110 can be The node address of the YVP110 Change it to an operable address 9 4 detected but neither function is left as the default OxF8 OxFB See the descriptions for address blocks nor transducer block settings can be seen 20 3 Troubleshooting Function Block Parameters Problem Presumed Cause Remedy Ref Section A value cannot be written to a parameter in the YVP110 You have attempted to write a Check the setting range of Appendix 1 value outside the valid range parameters The target mode does
165. ease the value for SERVO_GAIN to 2 3 or 1 2 of the originally entered value 5 After tuning the control parameters re check each parameter if necessary 2 Moderate response Characteristics The curve stabilizes slowly after an overshoot If gain is increased the overall response can be improved This waveform is typically observed in middle and large capacity actuators FA0603 ai 1 Improving the stabilization time Decrease the value for SERVO_RESET to improve the capability of tracking the target value Verify the 10 step response and decrement the value by 3 2 Modifying overshoot e Increment the value for SERVO_GAIN Verify the 10 step response and increment the value by 1 5 times e Ifyou input a value in a small step of approx 5 or less and you cannot obtain a significant improvement effect compared to the 10 step increment the value for SERVO_RATE by 0 2 to reduce an excessively rapid response e The same boost value is set on both the air delivery and exhaust sides using Auto Tuning If the overshoot on the exhaust side is larger than that on the air delivery side for a double acting model input a negative value in X_BOOST_ VALUE 1 2 without changing the value of 0 in X_BST_ON_THRESHOLD 1 2 and X_BST_OFF_THRESHOLD 1 2 First try to input a negative value of half that of BOOST_ VALUE 1 2 and if necessary increment or decrement the value by 1 3 Improving the res
166. ecncanaanne centers A 16 IO_OPTS Availability of Options for Each Block cessceseeseeeeeeees A 18 STATUS_OPTS Availability of Options for Each BIOCK eeeeeeeen A 18 CONTROL_OPTS Availability of Options for Each Block eeseeeee A 18 Link Master Kuere ELE gEEuENENE A 19 Link Active SCHeCUIEL cccecceeceeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeeeneenseeeeseeeesaneeeeeeeeeeeeneeees A 19 Link NASON sais exe hse xia wers sek sR wns E e came ew ance ban coxa nnd Snceene is A 19 Transfer Of LAS i csccic ss ccccisescoccessscissdnexcnnetaasecssdeeccsteuassecscdesssnerdeesvesstesseneedssevess A 19 Biel d iiss ccccsccsscecaces cence cesstvesend cence swenevesenecenteentbeccsaescanceexeneessanessnteentees A 20 RRE E A 21 A2 5 1 LM Parameter L t due eves coadanacebedcnae a e a A 21 A2 5 2 Descriptions for LM Parameter A 22 FADS cs soi asses she cusdevte eececte dyacexss cau ste cutdexaecutecstecuadescecstecshtcsbdcscedudecshedvatessecvaccshees A 25 DD Methods and DD Menu ccccscssseseseeeeeseeeseeneeeeeeeeeees A 26 OW ORV OW noose cs ec nce evn ced rar adea aa ee aE ERa eana aeaaea aeaa aea aaaea A 26 DD M UnOGS EE A 26 A3 2 1 Transducer BlOCK s iiiusicanuiuneanauniadnuaensadnuand A 26 A922 AO BIOCK Age Seege eege eaten when os en oh en EE ohn on A 28 A323 OS BOCK E A 29 Software DOWnN Oa 2 cccseecceeceeeeceeeeseeeeseseneeeeeseeeeeeeeesneeeeees A 30 Benefits of Software DoWMnlOadC cccsecceeeceeeeeee
167. ected residual capacitance Ci and inductance Li of each apparatus other than the terminators connected to the fieldbus line must be equal or less than 5 nF and 10 uH respectively Supply unit The supply unit must be certified by a notified body as FISCO model and following trapezoidal output characteristic is used Uo 14 to 24 V I S maximum value lo based on spark test result or other assessment ex 133 mA for Uo 15 V Group IIC The maximum allowed Co and Lo are determined by the combinations as specified below Cable The cable used to interconnect the devices needs to comply with the following parameters loop resistance R 15 to 150 O km inductance per unit length L 0 4 to 1 mH km capacitance per unit length C 80 to 200 nF km C C line line 0 5 C line screen if both lines are floating or C C line line C line screen if the screen is connected to one line length of spur cable max 30 m Ex ia IIC T4 or 120 m Ex ia IIB T4 length of trunk cable max 1 km Ex ia IIC T4 or 1 9 km Ex ia IIB T4 Terminators The terminator must be certified by a notified body as FISCO model and at each end of the trunk cable an approved line terminator with the following parameters is suitable R 90 to 100 Q C 0to2 2 uF The resistor must be infallible according to EN 50020 One of the two allowed terminators might already be integrated in the associated apparatus bus supply unit Number of Devices
168. ectrical apparatus of flameproof construction hereinafter referred to as flameproof apparatus in explosion protected apparatus Following the Labour Safety and Health Laws of Japan flameproof apparatus is subjected to type tests to meet either the technical criteria for explosionproof electrical machinery and equipment standards notification no 556 from the Japanese Ministry of Labour hereinafter referred to as technical criteria in conformity with the IEC Standards or the Recommended Practice for Explosion Protected Electrical Installations in General Industries published in 1979 These certified apparatus can be used in hazardous locations where explosive or inflammable gases or vapours may be present Certified apparatus includes a certification label and an equipment nameplate with the specifications necessary for explosion requirements as well as precautions on explosion protection Please confirm these precautionary items and use them to meet specification requirements For electrical wiring and maintenance servicing please refer to Internal Wiring Rules in the Electrical Installation Technical Standards as well as USER S GUIDELINES for Electrical Installations for Explosive Gas Atmospheres in General Industry published in 1994 To meet flameproof requirements equipment that can be termed flameproof must 1 Be certified by a Japanese public authority in accordance with the Labour Safety and He
169. ed with the IS block If a setting is modified this revision is updated It is used to check for parameter changes etc 2 17002 TAG_DESC Null A universal parameter that stores comments describing tag information 3 17003 STRATEGY 1 Auniversal parameter intended for use by the high level system to identify function blocks 4 17004 ALERT_ 1 255 d Key information used to identify the location where an KEY alert has occurred Generally this parameter is used by the high level system to identify specific areas in a plant that are under the control of specific operators to distinguish necessary alarms only This is one of the universal parameters 5 17005 MODE_BLK A universal parameter representing the operation status of the IS block It consists of the actual target permit and normal modes 6 17006 BLOCK_ Indicates the error status relating to the IS function ERR block The bit used by this function block is as follows Bit 15 O S mode 7 17007 OUT 0 MAN Block output 8 17008 OUT_ Set the range of OUT RANGE 9 17009 GRANT_ 0 The parameter used to check if various operations DENY have been executed The bits in the GRANT parameter corresponding to various operations are set before any of them are executed After the operations are complete the DENY parameter is checked to find out if any bit corresponding to the relevant operation has been set If no bit is set it is evident that the operations have been e
170. ei Al isis sais isisisi sated evens ccaae saved exes vances sauce acecevetexssneecanerextaecnsaesiens KEEN 6 1 6 2 Periodic INSPOCtiONS iiiccscicccaccscsscetscesessaeesceecccecasseessaneesanseaseescacesezncrescerescanetee 6 1 6 2 1 Cleaning the Fixed Nozzle xcs cies eevee dates eege nets eveneens deed de dees 6 1 6 3 Part Re plaGeme int siiicsieicisce ccseccvssevasececanecenais cesceecznencseneccacnesteesentaeasaersseneacsteexese 6 2 6 3 1 Replacing the Control Relay Assembly 0 2 0 eeeeeeteeeteteeeteeeneeeees 6 2 6 3 2 Replacing the Screen Finer 22 cccetcatieicanseteanecasaneetenedau ened 6 2 6 3 3 Replacing the Internal Air Elter 6 2 6 3 4 Tuning the Pressure Balance of Control Helzen 6 3 7 Standard Specifications ccccsecccceeeesesseseeeeseeeeeesseseeeeseeeseeseeeeeeeseeess 7 1 PART II FUNCTIONS 8 Grotte nee 8 1 8 1 ld 8 1 8 2 Internal Structure Of YVP T10 8 1 8 2 1 System network Management MED 8 1 8 2 2 Function Block RE 8 1 8 3 Logical Structure of Each BIOCK escsescseeesseesseeneeeseneeseeseneseeeseneneeenseenseeeeees 8 1 8 4 System Configuration sss 8 1 8 4 1 Connection of Deltgen eege gege eege gege ET 8 2 8 5 Integration ok Deg eege eege 8 2 9 CONE UM aU E 9 1 9 1 Network Design icissscs cctssctecctesctesicesctecteesctesteesctectessctestessctesetssieesteasite site cieestis 9 1 9 2 Network Definition wicciiisiecccccccecccecececcvecececssscsceceveresesveeeseeeversvecssteesteevesesteeseees
171. ements of the above test e Host Used for accessing field devices A dedicated host such as DCS is used for an instrumentation line while dedicated communication tools are used for experimental purposes e Cable Used for connecting devices Refer to Fieldbus Technical Information TI 38K3A01 01E for details of instrumentation cabling Provide a cable sufficiently long to connect all devices For field branch cabling use terminal boards or a connection box as required If the total length of the cable is in a range of 2 to 3 meters for laboratory or other experimental use the following simplified cable a twisted pair wire with a cross section of 0 9 mm2 or more AWG 18 and cycle period of within 5 cm 2 inches may be used Termination processing depends on the type of device being deployed For YVP110 use an M4 screw terminal claw Some hosts require a connector Refer to Yokogawa when making arrangements to purchase the recommended equipment The number of devices that can be connected to a single bus and the cable length vary depending on system design When constructing systems both the basic and overall design must be carefully considered to allow device performance to be fully exhibited 8 4 1 Connection of Devices Connect the devices as shown in Figure 9 1 Connect the terminators at both ends of the trunk with a minimum length of the spur laid for connection The polarity of signal and power must b
172. enclosures are critical factors in explosion protection Exercise great care not to damage the joints or shock the enclosure If any damage occurs in threads joints or mating surfaces inspection windows connections between the transmitter and terminal box shrouds or clamps or external wiring connections which are essential in flameproofness contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation A caution Do not attempt to re process threaded connections or refinish joints or mating surfaces b gt S c Unless otherwise specified the electrical circuitry and internal mechanisms may be repaired by component replacement as this will not directly affect the requirements for flameproof apparatus however bear in mind that the apparatus must always be restored to its original condition If you attempt to repair the flameproof apparatus company specified components shall be used Before starting to service the apparatus be sure to check all parts necessary for retaining the requirements for flameproof apparatus For this check that all screws bolts nuts and threaded connections have properly been tightened d a 3 Prohibition of specification changes and modifications Do not attempt to change specifications or make modifications involving addition of or changes in external wiring connections 7 Selection of Cable Entry Devices for Flameproof Type A IMPORTANT The cable glands cable entry devices for fl
173. er Contact the nearest representative or service station The temperature sensor signal is unstable or XD_ ERROR indicates error 120 The temperature sensor has failed It may be necessary to replace the amplifier Contact the nearest representative or service station IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 1 Function Block Parameters gt A 1 Appendix 1 Function Block Parameters NOTE Throughout the following tables the Write column shows the modes in which the respective parameters can be written The legends of the entries are as follows O S Can be written when the corresponding block is in O S mode Man Can be written when the corresponding block is in Man mode Auto Can be written when the corresponding block is in Auto Man or O S mode Can be written in no mode of the corresponding block Blank Can be written in all modes of the corresponding block A1 1 Parameters of Resource Block Relative Default SEN Index Index Parameter Name factory setting Write Description 0 1000 Block Header Block Tag Information about this block including the block 0 S tag DD revision execution time 1 1001 ST_REV 0 Incremented when a change is made to the parameter settings for the resource block to indicate the revision level of the settings and used to see whether or not there is a change in parameter settings 2 1002 TAG_DESC Null Unive
174. er tuning has finished The result of Travel calibration which is written to TRAVEL_CALIB_RESULT as shown in Table 12 3 may be an error or warning An error invalidates the tuning and does not update the parameter settings 12 6 Online Diagnostics The YVP110 features functions to diagnose the YVP110 itself and valve actions during online The following describes the self diagnostics function related to the transducer block 12 6 1 XD_ERROR The transducer block performs self diagnostics and writes the results to the parameter XD_ERROR Table 12 4 shows the meanings of these results in XD_ERROR When the content of XD_ERROR or BLOCK_ERR becomes a nonzero value an alarm is output to the parameter BLOCK_ALM Table 12 4 XD_ERROR value Message Description 100 Cycle count limit TOTAL_CYCLE_COUNT has reached exceed CYCLE_COUNT_LIM 101 Travel limit TOTAL_TRAVEL has reached TRAVEL _ exceed LIM 102 Total open limit TOTAL OPEN TIME has reached exceed OPEN_TIME_LIM 103 104 Total close limit exceed Total near close TOTAL_CLOSE_TIME has reached CLOSE_TIME_LIM TOTAL_NEAR_CLOSE_TIM has sensor failure limit exceed reached NEAR_CLOSE_TIME_LIM 110 Temperature out The measured temperature is out of of range range 111 Pressure sensor The measured pressure is out of range out of range 112 Position sensor The measured valve position is out of out of range range 11
175. ere needs to be a pressure regulator for the air supply To perform manual operation follow the procedure below 1 Turn the A M selector switch clockwise to change the switch position to M until it stops 2 In manual mode the pneumatic pressure output to the valve actuator can be varied by changing the regulator output pressure by more than 70 kPa approximately regardless of the input signal of the YVP110 For a YVP110 equipped with pressure gauges you can read the output pressure to the actuator When using the Double Acting Type the pneumatic pressure can only be varied from OUT1 to the valve actuator The pressure is always 0 from OUT2 to the valve actuator Note that the valve position is not always in accord with the regulator pressure ow lt After you have finished manual operation turn the A M selector switch counterclockwise until the stopper pin touches the side of the YVP110 s casing in order to ensure the switch position changes to A A WARNING e Prior to changing the A M selector switch position make sure that doing so will neither cause an injury nor affect the process e Changing the A M selector switch position from M manual to A automatic or A automatic to M manual during operation will cause the valve stem to temporarily move to a position different from the position determined by the level of the input signal to the positioner e Ifthe pressure larger than the allowable range of
176. ers as necessary For the settings made as default when shipped see the parameter lists in Appendix 1 1 Position to flow Rate Characteristic Type The parameter POSITION CHAR_TYPE defines the characteristics between the valve position and flow rate and is set to linear by default Write the appropriate value 1 linear 2 equal percent 50 1 3 equal percent 30 1 4 quick open reversal of equal 50 1 5 Camflex Percentage 255 user defined Writing the value 255 allows you to define the desired characteristics by 10 line segments for evenly divided input levels The coordinates 0 0 and 100 100 are fixed set the values corresponding to OUT Output of AO block 10 20 30 80 90 Note that a set value must be greater than the preceding set value the output must increase as the input increases lt 5 Setup gt 5 4 Wi 1 1 Linear 2 Equal 50 1 3 Equal 30 1 4 Quick Open 5 Camflex Percentage Valve position 0 ei Output OUT of AO block F0502 ai Position to flow Rate Characteristic Type Figure 5 2 2 Final value Limits Eu_100 and Eu_0 in the parameter FINAL_ VALUE_RANGE define the upper and lower limits of FINAL_VALUE value of the transducer block A caution Even if the range of FINAL_VALUE value is limited by FINAL_VALUE_RANGE the actual valve position is set to outside the FINAL VALUE_RANGE setting when the tight s
177. ess variable PV setpoint SP and output OUT e PID control computation e Control action bypass e Feed forward e External output tracking e Measured value tracking e Output limiters e Mode shedding upon computer failure e Alarm generation IN BKCAL_IN gt CAS_IN BKCAL_OUT RCAS_IN gt OUT ROUT_IN RCAS_OUT TRK_IN_D ROUT_OUT TRK_VAL FF_VAL F1601 ai Figure 16 1 Inputs Outputs of PID Function Block BKCAL_OUT Setpoint i SP_RATE_DN Feed Forward SP_RATE_UP FF_SCALE SP_HI_LIM FF_GAIN Sp LO UN i Filter IN PV_FTIME MODE 1 SHED_OPT OUT_HI_LIM OUT_LO_LIM Output OUT F1602 ai Figure 16 2 Function Diagram of PID Function Block 16 2 Modes The target mode for the PID function block can be set from five block modes ROut RCas Cas Auto Man and O S Regardless of the target mode the PID block automatically enters the IMan or LO mode when a specified condition is met such as when another function block enters a specific status depending on the parameter settings 16 3 Input Processing The input signal to IN is filtered through a lag filter whose time constant is set in PV_FTIME and then set as the process variable PV 16 4 Setpoint SP Limiters The path for computing the SP differs depending on the mode In Cas mode CAS _IN is used for SP In RCas mode RCAS_IN is used for SP If the value of CAS_IN or RCAS_IN whichever is used is g
178. f cm2 4 kgf cm2 bar 1 4 to 4 bar 4 bar 4 bar psi 20 to 60 psi 60 psi 60 psi Double acting Cylinder Calibration Supply Air Pressure Gauge Scale unit Pressure Supply Air Output Signal Pa 200 to 700 kPa 1 MPa 1 MPa kgficm2 2 to 7 kgf cm2 10 kgficm2 10 kgf cm2 bar 2 to 7 bar 10 bar 10 bar psi 30 to 105 psi 150 psi 150 psi Pressure Gauge Case Stainless steel JIS SUS 304 Normal Operating Conditions Air Supply pressure Single Acting Actuator 20 to 60 psi 140 to 400 kPa Double Acting Actuator 30 to 100 psi 200 to 700 kPa Vibration Limit 4 mm at 5 to 15 Hz 2G at 15 to 2000 Hz Shock limit 10G Manual Operation Available using Auto Manual A M transfer switch Zero Adjustment Range 15 to 85 of span IM 21B04C01 01E Span Adjustment Range Within 300 of span Valve stem Travel Range Linear Motion 10 to 100 mm 0 4 to 4 0 inch Rotation Range 10 to 25 deg Rotary Motion 20 to 90 deg Air Consumption and Output Capacity Diaphragm Single Acting Cylinder Maximum Air 3 Consumption 0 20 SCFM 0 32 Nm h at 140 kPa Capacity Maximum Output 4 4 SCFM 6 6 Nm3 h at 140 kPa Double Acting Cylinder Maximum Air 3 Consumption 0 62 SCFM 1 0 Nm h at 400 kPa Maximum Output 3 Capacity 8 5 SCFM 13 7 Nm h at 400 kPa Ambient Temperature Limits Single Acting Actuator 40 to 85 C
179. f the tag 3 6003 6103 STRATEGY 1 Universal parameter used by an upper level system to classify the function blocks 4 6004 6104 ALERT_KEY 1 Universal parameter used as a key to identify the point from which an alert is issued normally used by an upper level system to select alerts to provide to a particular operator who covers a specific area of the plant 5 6005 6105 MODE_BLK O S Universal parameter that indicates the block operation conditions and is composed of actual mode target mode permitted modes and normal mode 6 6006 6106 BLOCK_ Indicates the error statuses related to the block itself ERR 7 6007 6107 PV_D Indicates the primary discrete value or the corresponding process value used to execute the specified actions and the status of that value 8 6008 6108 OUT_D Man Indicates the output value and its status 9 6009 6109 SIMULATE_ disable Used to determine whether to use the limit switch signal input D from the transducer block or use the user set value When this parameter is set to disable the block uses the actual input value and status 10 6010 6110 XD_STATE 0 Index to the text describing the states of the discrete value obtained from the transducer but not supported by YVP110 11 6011 6111 OUT_STATE O Index to the text describing the states of a discrete output but not supported by YVP110 12 6012 6112 GRANT_ 0 Used to check whether various user operations ca
180. fault 5 Set the gain in the derivative term of PI D control As with SERVO_RATE this parameter relates to the derivative term of control and the preventive effect increases in proportion to an increase in the gain in the derivative term SERVO_DEADBAND Tuning range 0 to 50 Default 0 Setting this parameter stops an integral operation in the vicinity of the Set point Integration stop area Integration stop area SERVO_DEADBAND Set point SERVO_DEADBAND FA0605 ai The range of SERVO_DEADBAND in relation to the set point is a dead band in the area of which the integral operation stops If you set the parameter SERVO_DEADBAND when for example the friction of a valve is large a limit cycle can be prevented However the value of the steady state deviation could be as large as that of SERVO_DEADBAND SERVO_OFFSET Tuning range 0 to 100 of MV Default 55 Set the initial value for the electric current that is output from the CPU to the I P module after the power is turned on The value simultaneously serves as the base point for an integration operation The unit of this parameter is of the current output to the I P module The value is usually determined by Auto Tuning so you do not need to change the value IM 21B04C01 01E If you manually set a value input a value of SERVO_OUTPUT_SIGNAL when the valve position settles in the vicinity of 50 BOOST_ON_THRESHOLD 1 2 Tuning ra
181. fied to be not open linked is not open 0x00000004 Link Obj 14 The VCR 1 to which link object 130 46 14 30 or 46 is specified to be not open linked is not open 0x00000002 Link The VCR 1 to which link object Obj 15 31 47 15 31 or 47 is specified to be not open linked is not open 0x00000001 Link The VCR 1 to which link object Obj 16 32 48 16 32 or 48 is specified to be not open linked is not open 1 VCR Virtual Coummunications Relationship Table 11 4 DEVICE_STATUS _2 without EE Indication Hexadecimal when Device Meaning Indication Description is installed 0x80000000 0x40000000 0x20000000 0x10000000 0x08000000 0x04000000 0x02000000 TB TRAVEL_ Travel Calibration has not CALIB_RESULT been succeeded not Succeeded 0x01000000 TBAUTO_ Auto tuning has not been TUNE_RESULT _ succeeded not Succeeded 0x00800000 0x00400000 0x00200000 OS BLOCK_ERR Block Error has occurred in not Zero the OS block 0x00100000 PID BLOCK_ERR Block Error has occurred in not Zero the PID block 0x00080000 DI2 BLOCK_ERR Block Error has occurred in not Zero the DI2 block 0x00040000 DI1 BLOCK_ERR Block Error has occurred in not Zero the DI block 0x00020000 AO BLOCK ERR Block Error has occurred in not Zero the AO block 0x00010000 TBXD_ERROR_ XD Error has occurred in not Zero the Transducer block
182. flameproof effectiveness will be compromised 5 Fasten the cable by tightening the clamp nut 6 Tighten the lock nut on the union cover 7 Connect the cable wires to each terminal Apply a non hardnening sealant to the threads for waterproofing _ Clamp nut Wrench _ amp Union coupling Packing box bed Lock nut Rubber packing Washer N Wrench Gland Clamp ring 0 o Union cover Cable F0405 ai Figure 4 5 Installing Flameproof Packing Adapter E Flameproof metal conduit wiring e Aseal fitting must be installed near the terminal box connection port for a sealed construction e Apply anon hardening sealant to the threads of the terminal box connection port flexible metal conduit and seal fitting for waterproofing Gas sealing device Non hazardous area Flameproof flexible metal conduit Hazardous area Apply a non hardening Se sealant to the threads of Ce hese fittings fi steel conduit these fittings for waterproofing beta wiring impregnate the fitting with a compound to seal tubing F0406 ai Typical Wiring Using Flameproof Metal Conduit Figure 4 6 4 4 Grounding Grounding is always required for the proper operation of transmitters Follow the domestic electrical requirements as regulated in each country Ground terminals are located on the inside and outside of the terminal box Either of these terminals
183. g material does not enter the piping e When using the Double Acting Type and piping to the OUT2 port ensure that the plug for the OUT2 Pressure Gauge does not get turned around e When using the Double Acting Type adjust the pressure balance of the control relay as required in reference to Section 6 3 4 4 3 Wiring A caution For flameproof equipment wiring materials and wiring work for these equipment including peripherals are strictly restricted Users absolutely must read Installation and Operating Precautions for JIS Flameproof Equipment at the end of this manual prior to the work 4 3 1 Recommended Cables For wiring for a YVP110 use a cable for H1 fieldbus segments specified by the Fieldbus FOUNDATION Ashielded cable is recommended For the details of cables required for H1 fieldbus segments see Fieldbus Technical Information Tl 38K3A01 01 Choose cables suitable for the respective ambient temperature ranges especially when they are to be laid in a hot or cold place When laying cables in or through a place where the atmosphere may include a toxic gas or liquid or oil or solvent choose wires and cables made of materials that have sufficient durability 4 3 2 Precautions on Wiring A IMPORTANT e Prevent the cables from being affected by noise induced from a high capacity transformer or power supply to a motor e As shown in Figure 4 2 remove the terminal box cover and dust proofing plug w
184. gawa does not guarantee safety Yokogawa will not be liable for malfunctions or damage resulting from any modification made to this instrument by the customer Please give your highest attention to the followings a Installation e The instrument must be installed by an expert engineer or skilled personnel The procedures described about INSTALLATION are not permitted for operators IM 21B04C01 01E Some of the operations will stroke the valve Keep clear of the valve while the positioner is pneumatically or electrically supplied so as not to be hit by unexpected movements of the valve In case where ambient temperature is high care should be taken not to burn yourself because the surface of the body of the instrument reaches a high temperature All installation shall comply with local installation requirement and local electrical codes Do not supply air at a pressure exceeding the maximum rated air supply pressure Doing so may result in a high risk of damage or cause an accident To avoid injury or the process being affected when installing or replacing a positioner on a control valve ensure that 1 All inputs to the valve actuator and other accessories of the valve and actuator including air supply and electrical signal are cut off 2 The process has been shut down or the control valve is isolated from the process by using bypass valves or the like and 3 No pressure remains in the valve actuator Auto
185. ge by detecting the change in status of an input signal and change their modes too For example when the data status of BKCAL_ IN in a PID block changes to bad the PID block automatically change mode to IMan to initialize the control of its downstream block The respective modes to which each block should enter upon occurrence of a communication error and at a restart and the handling of signals in each mode may be defined in the block s option parameters such as O_OPTS and STATUS_ OPTS For details see the detailed descriptions of each function block 10 2 Alarm Generation When the YVP110 detects an abnormality in the device itself by the self diagnostic function a device alarm is issued from the resource or transducer block An abnormality in a function block or ina process value is issued from the corresponding block as a block error or process alarm AYVP110 can report the following alarms and events Analog alerts A type of alarm generated when a process value or a deviation value exceeds a specified limit in the following blocks PID block HI HI_HI LO LO_LO DV_HI DV_LO Discrete alerts A type of alarm generated when an abnormal status is detected For the resource block a discrete alert is generated as a block alarm or write error alarm For the DI block a discrete alert is generated as a block alarm or DISC alarm For the Transducer block AO OS IS AR block and PID block a discrete alert is only
186. h level system to identify function blocks 4 17504 ALERT_ 1 255 1 Key information used to identify the location where an KEY alert has occurred Generally this parameter is used by the high level system to identify specific areas in a plant that are under the control of specific operators to distinguish necessary alarms only This is one of the universal parameters 5 17505 MODE_BLK AUTO Auniversal parameter representing the operation status of the AR block It consists of the actual target permit and normal modes 6 17506 BLOCK 0 Indicates the error status relating to the AR function ERR block The bit used by this function block is as follows Bit 1 Block Configuration Error Bit 15 O S mode 7 17507 PV 0 The result of a range extension function is substituted into this When viewed from the computing equation PV is the main input 8 17508 OUT 0 MAN Block output 9 17509 PRE_OUT 0 Always indicates the calculation result The value is substituted into OUT in auto mode 10 17510 PV_SCALE O S_ Indicates PV scaling for making a memo 11 17511 OUT_ Output scaling for the host for making a memo RANGE 12 17512 GRANT_ 0 The parameter used to check if various operations DENY have been executed The bits in the GRANT parameter corresponding to various operations are set before any of them are executed After the operations are complete the DENY parameter is checked to find out if any bit corresponding to
187. hannel Signal Description 1 Analog input output Setpoint and readback signals 2 Discrete output High limit switch status 3 Discrete output Low limit switch status Final Value Tight Shutoff Full Open Limiter ERR POSITION_CHAR_TYPE FINAL VALUE FINAL_VALUE_CUTOFF_HI POSITION_CHAR RANGE FINAL_VALUE_CUTOFF_LO AO Readback FINAL_VALUE CHANNEL POSITION_CHAR_TYPE POSITION_CHAR CHANNEL2 Limit Switch LIMSW_HI_LIM LIMSW_LO_LIM CHANNEL3 FINAL_POSITION_VALUE F1201 ai Figure 12 1 Function Diagram of Transducer Block IM 21B04C01 01E lt 12 Transducer Block gt 1 2 2 12 2 2 Position to flow Rate Characteristic Conversion The parameter POSITION _CHAR_TYPE defines the characteristics between the valve position and flow rate and can be set to one the following 1 linear 2 equal percent 50 1 3 equal percent 30 1 4 quick open reversal of equal percent 50 1 5 Camflex Percen tage 255 user defined Writing the value 255 allows you to define the desired characteristics by 10 line segments for evenly divided input levels The coordinates 0 0 and 100 100 are fixed set the values corresponding to OUT Output of AO block 10 20 30 80 90 Note that a set value must be greater than the preceding set value the output must increase as the input increases This flow rate conversion is applied to the signal in the backword path as well 12 2 3 FINAL
188. hardening sealant to the threads for waterproofing Tee Drain plug F0404 ai Typical Cable Wiring Using Flameproof Packing Adapter Figure 4 4 e Measure the cable outer diameter in two directions to within 1 mm e Calculate the average of the two diameters and use packing with an internal diameter nearest to this value see Table 4 1 Table 4 1 Flameproof Packings and Applicable Cable Outer Diameters S Wiring Applicable Sg Optional Identifying Part Code Port thread Cable OD Mark Zare Diameter mm 8to10 16 8 10 G11 G1 2 10 1t012 16 10 12 G9601AM e Mounting flameproof packing adapter body to conduit connection see Figure 4 5 IM 21B04C01 01E lt 4 Wiring and Piping gt 4 4 1 Screw the flameproof packing adapter into the terminal box until the O ring touches the wiring port at least 6 full turns and firmly tighten the lock nut 2 Insert the cable through the union cover the union coupling the clamp nut the clamp ring the gland the washer the rubber packing and the packing box in that order 3 Insert the end of the cable into the terminal box 4 Tighten the union cover to grip the cable When tightening the union cover tighten approximately one turn past the point where the cable will no longer move up and down AA IMPORTANT Proper tightening is important If it is too tight a circuit break in the cable may occur if not tight enough the
189. he information transmitted from the valve positioner The YVP110 features diagnostics as shown below Table 19 1 Diagnostics of YVP110 Category Diagnostic Details Access Points Positioner Self diagnostics Detects XD_ERROR status positioner hardware in Transducer diagnostics failures positioner block software setting errors and so on Valve Measures valve e Transducer status parameters such as the block s diagnostics hysteresis and slip width respective parameters that contain the values measured during the auto tuning and selfcheck Integration Integrates the travel distance of the valve stem and counts the changes in direction of the valve action total cycle count and raises an alarm when each integrated value reaches a preset threshold e Transducer block s respective parameters XD_ERROR in Transducer block Signature measurement featured in a model with option code BP Measures the signatures of the valve and positioner e ValveNavi Model YVP20S For self diagnostics see Section 12 6 Online Diagnostics For valve parameter measurement see Section 5 3 Carrying out Tuning and Section A1 2 Parameters of Transducer Block The following describes the integration and signature measurement functions 19 2 Integration Functions The transducer block in the YVP110 has the following parameters containing an integrated operation result
190. he other can be selected between former two types using capability level description Using unmatched CFF will cause an error upon downloads etc IM 21B04C01 01E lt 9 Configuration gt 9 1 9 Configuration This chapter contains information on how to adapt the function and performance of the YVP110 to suit specific applications Because two or more devices are connected to Fieldbus settings including the requirements of all devices need to be determined Practically the following steps must be taken 1 Network design Determines the devices to be connected to Fieldbus and checks the capacity of the power supply 2 Network definition Determines the tag and node addresses for all devices 3 Definition of combining function blocks Determines the method for combination between each function block 4 Setting tags and addresses Sets the PD Tag and node addresses one by one for each device 5 Communication setting Sets the link between communication parameters and function blocks 6 Block setting Sets the parameters for function blocks The following section describes each step of the procedure in the order given Using a dedicated configuration tool allows the procedure to be significantly simplified This section describes the procedure to be assigned for a host which has relatively simple functions For operation of the host refer to the instruction manual for each host No details of the ho
191. he period when the tight shut or full open action is on the value of FINAL_VALUE value remains as computed and is not affected by these actions 12 3 Backward Path The following describes the signal input from the device hardware to the transducer block and then passed to other function blocks 12 3 1 FINAL_POSITION_VALUE The parameter FINAL_POSITION_ VALUE contains a percentage value of the valve position sent from the position sensor where 0 is the shut off position as is the case for FINAL_VALUE value When one or more of the following conditions become true the data status of FINAL _POSITION_VALUE becomes Bad which is notified to the connected AO block and upstream function blocks e Bad Out of service The block is in the O S mode e Bad Sensor failure The position sensor has failed e Bad Device failure The A D converter has failed e Bad Non specific The deviation exceeds the limit 12 3 2 Limit Switches Limit switches monitor whether the valve position has reached a specified high or low limit position and send the high limit switch status to channel 2 and the low limit switch status to channel 3 The thresholds settings for the high and low limit switches should be set in LIMSW_HI_LIM and LIMSW_LO_LIM The switch statuses sent to channels 2 and 3 mean 0 off inactive 1 on active Hysteresis of 1 is applied for both High and Low limit switch While the limit switch of high side stays ON
192. hen performing a wiring connection Be sure to securely seal the unused wiring port with a blind plug e To make the cables watertight and to prevent them from being damaged it is recommended to use a cable conduit and duct Also for the same reasons be sure to use a watertight adapter for the connection of the conduit to the port IM 21B04C01 01E lt 4 Wiring and Piping gt 4 3 Blind plug Ground terminal G Grounding Input signal F0402 ai Figure 4 2 Wiring 1 General use Type and intrinsically Safe Type Make cable wiring using metallic conduit or waterproof glands e Apply a non hardening sealant to the terminal box connection port and to the threads on the flexible metal conduit for waterproofing Apply a non hardening sealant to the threads for waterproofing Wiring metal conduit Tee Drain plug F0403 ai Figure 4 3 Typical Wiring Using Flexible Metal Conduit 2 Flameproof Type JIS Wire cables through a flameproof packing adapter or using a flameproof metal conduit E Wiring cable through flameproof packing adapter for only JIS flameproof type see Figure 4 4 e Use only flameproof packing adapters approved by Yokogawa e Apply a nonhardening sealant to the terminal box connection port and to the threads on the flameproof packing adapter for waterproofing Flameproof packing adapter Wiring metal conduit Apply a non
193. hich link object 3 Obj 3 19 35 19 or 35 is specified to be linked not open is not open 0x00001000 Link The VCR 1 to which link object 4 Obj 4 20 36 20 or 36 is specified to be linked not open is not open 0x00000800 Link The VCR 1 to which link object 5 Obj 5 21 37 21 or 37 is specified to be linked not open is not open 0x00000400 Link Obj 6 The VCR 1 to which link object 6 22 38 22 or 38 is specified to be linked not open is not open 0x00000200 Link The VCR 1 to which link object 7 Obj 7 23 39 23 or 39 is specified to be linked not open is not open 0x00000100 Link The VCR 1 to which link object 8 Obj 8 24 40 24 or 40 is specified to be linked not open is not open 0x00000080 Link The VCR 1 to which link object 9 Obj 9 25 41 25 or 41 is specified to be linked not open is not open 0x00000040 Link The VCR 1 to which link object 3 Obj 10 26 42 19 or 35 is specified to be linked not open is not open 0x00000020 Link The VCR 1 to which link object Obj 11 27 43 11 27 or 43 is specified to be not open linked is not open 0x00000010 Link The VCR 1 to which link object Obj 12 28 44 12 28 or 44 is specified to be not open linked is not open IM 21B04C01 01E lt 11 Resource Block gt 11 3 Hexadecimal Indication Indication when Device Description is installed Meaning 0x00000008 Link The VCR 1 to which link object Obj 13 29 45 13 29 or 45 is speci
194. hut or full open action described below is activated 3 Tight shut and Full open Actions The tight shut action is an action to decrease the output pressure to a level much lower than the 0 pressure level or to increase it much higher than the 0 pressure level for an air to close valve when FINAL_VALUE value is less than FINAL_VALUE_CUTOFF_LO in order to ensure that the valve is tightly shut off Conversely the full open action is an action to increase the output pressure to a level much higher than the 100 pressure level or decrease it much lower than the 100 pressure level for an air to close valve when FINAL VALUE value is larger than FINAL_VALUE CUTOFF_HI in order to ensure that the valve is fully open Ahysteresis of 1 is applied to the thresholds FINAL_VALUE_CUTOFF_LO and FINAL VALUE _CUTOFF_HI IM 21B04C01 01E lt 5 Setup gt 5 5 4 Thresholds for Limit Switches Just like hardware limit switches for a valve on off status signals can be generated when the valve position read back signal FINAL POSITION_VALUE value reaches specified levels These on off statuses can be transferred to a DI function block Write the threshold for the upper limit switch to LIMSW_HI_LIM and the threshold for the lower limit switch to LIMSW_LO_LIM A hysteresis of 1 is applied to the thresholds LIMSW_HI_LIM and LIMSW_LO LIM A caution To make a DI block read the on off statuses of a limit switch set CHAN
195. ies 9 1 9 3 Definition of Combining Function BIOCKS ccceeeeceeeeeeneeeseeenseeneeeeeenenes 9 2 IM 21B04C01 01E 9 4 Setting of Tags and Addresses cscessceeteeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeneeeeeees 9 3 9 5 Communication Setting sscciscciscciccsccscescscescevssecsaeccse case ccsevsae esac evee cee eaeecdeeeeeeeeee 9 4 9 5 1 VCR Seling E 9 4 9 5 2 Function Block Execution Control 9 4 9 6 Block Setting siicscscscccccscscetsceceseecvsecseeccteestecnseevseesteessesssesviesstessiesveeeveessieesiessteesece 9 5 9 6 1 Link eler e GE 9 5 9 6 2 Tnd ODE eemermep perpen ORR 9 5 9 6 3 EE S Ee E E E E E E E T A 9 5 9 6 4 Function Block Parameter 9 12 10 Actions of YVP110 During Operation ecccsssseseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeers 10 1 10 1 Bl ck ModE Snai es aaaea eaaa AEE EEN EEEE EEEE 10 1 10 2 Alarm Generation iiiiccscicccacccasscesctecesscscacsessatecetserescecasctecadnerssceeesatecnincscanecasstecss 10 2 10 3 Sim lation FUNCKIOND wis ints tesececsscie seve cesecewacciesenecenstensiedecnnscanetenecedecaveccuereueesvaners 10 3 1i Resource E 11 1 11 1 General cea Ea aa e E EEEE 11 1 11 2 Alarm PrOCGSSIING ocs2t cr csce etc csctet ice ceet cect eee otc ceed eh cae ct ceca tes ceed etepeeceeeereet 11 1 11 3 Device TE 11 1 12 Transducer Block eu esrebeseeeteusrEerbeegregeEEC ERC cadansebecaceiecesedscectecencsses 12 1 12 1 GOIN Nea E 12 1 12 2 Forward Paths e tne on cence seas EEE ERO EA aa EAEE EEn 12 1 12 2 1 Input fom
196. ignature e Performing measurement sets the setpoint in SIGN_DATA_X and the position data in SIGN_DATA_Y e For the intervals set the number of points of measurement in the increasing direction within the range of 4 through 20 The total number of points of measurement in a round trip results in The positioner signature is the setpoint input to position characteristics of the positioner measured at points in equal intervals within a specified range over around trip The positioner signature reflects the positioner Cv characteristics cutoff level and limits thus allowing the positioner setting conditions nendes 24T to be ascertained For the wait time set the retention time at each e The following can be set in a setting parameter f POSITIONER SIGN SET point of measurement For example provided the lower setpoint is set to 0 the upper setpoint to 100 and the intervals to 10 the points of measurement are 0 10 20 90 100 90 80 10 and 0 totaling 21 points Lower Setpoint Upper Setpoint Intervals points Recommended Wait Time seconds read only Wait Time seconds 1 Applicable for Single Acting type with Code BP 19 3 3 Signature Measuring Result The signature measuring result will be displayed to SIGN_MEAS_RESULT While signature measuring is running In operation is displayed Table 19 1 Signature Measuring Result Code Message Descri
197. igned to be executed in conjunction with the execution of AO function block Therefore in order to activate Transducer block it is necessary that AO function block is always defined in the schedule The combined blocks need to be executed synchronously with other blocks on the communications schedule In this case change the YVP110 schedule according to the following table Enclosed values in the table are factory settings YVP110 schedule is set as shown in the following Change it as necessary IM 21B04C01 01E lt 9 Configuration gt 9 3 Execution Schedule of the YVP110 Function Blocks Table 9 3 Setting Enclosed is factory setting 269 MACROCYCLE_ Cycle MACROCYCLE SM DURATION period of control or measurement Unit is 1 32 ms 32000 1 s Index Parameters 276 FB_START_ AO block startup time SM ENTRY 1 Elapsed time from the start of MACROCYCLE specified in 1 32 ms 32000 1 s 278 FB_START_ 2 SM ENTRY 2 289 FB_START_ SM ENTRY 14 Table 9 4 shows maximum execution time of YVP function blocks Table 9 4 Execution Time of YVP Function Blocks Name time ms Remarks AO 95 DI 40 PID 120 Available for option LC1 or LC2 OS 95 IS 140 Available for option EE AR 120 Available for option EE For scheduling of communications for combination with the next function block the execution is so arranged as to start after a
198. increase the value for SERVO RESET by approx 1 5 times 6 After tuning the control parameters re check each parameter if necessary A6 3 Examples of Tuning Control Parameters The following table shows examples of tuning parameters for double acting actuators 1 supply pressure 400 kPa hysteresis 150N 2 uu supply pressure 400 kPa hysteresis 380N 3 supply pressure 400 kPa hysteresis 300N 4 4 supply pressure 400 kPa hysteresis 1200N Valtek25sq in double acting actuator stroke 0 75 in capacity approx 300 cc Valtek25sq in double acting actuator stroke 0 75 in capacity approx 300 cc Valtek50sq in double acting actuator stroke 2 5 in capacity approx 2000 cc Valtek50sq in double acting actuator stroke 2 5 in capacity approx 2000 cc Parameter Name Valtek25sq in Stroke 0 75 in Valtek50sq in Stroke 2 5 in Figures in parentheses represent default Hysteresis Hysteresis Hysteresis Hysteresis values factory settings 150N 380N 300N 1200N SERVO_GAIN 120 140 120 350 300 SERVO_RESET 15 8 8 9 24 SERVO_RATE 0 22 0 4 0 4 0 6 0 5 SERVO_RATE_GAIN 5 0 10 0 10 0 5 0 5 0 SERVO_DEADBAND 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SERVO_OFFSET 55 0 55 0 Default 55 0 Default 55 0 Default 55 0 Default BOOST_ON_THRESHOLD 1 2 1 9 2 9 0 9 1 9 0 9 1 9 0 9 5 1 0 9 1 9 BOOST_O
199. ing the value of the remote output TRK_VAL set from outside the PID block as illustrated in the figure below External tracking is performed when the block mode is LO TRK_VAL Scaling based on TRK_SCALE and OUT_SCALE PID control g computation result 0 s LO mode N OUT F1605 ai Figure 16 5 External value Tracking To change the block mode to LO 1 Set Track Enable in CONTROL_OPTS see Section 16 12 to true 2 Set TRK_IN_D to true However to change the block mode from Man to LO Track in Manual must also be set as true in CONTROL_OPTS 16 11 Measured value Tracking Measured value tracking also referred to as SP PV tracking is the action of equalizing the setpoint SP to the measured value PV when the block mode MODE_BLK actual is Man in order to prevent a sudden change in control output from being caused by a mode change to Auto While a cascade primary control block is performing automatic control in Auto or Cas mode when the mode of its secondary control block is changed from Cas to Auto the cascade connection is opened and the control action of the primary block stops The SP of the primary controller can also be equalized to its cascade input signal CAS_IN in this case The settings for measured value tracking are made in the parameter CONTROL_OPTS as shown in Table 16 3 16 12 CONTROL_OPTS CONTROL_OPTS is a parameter that stipulates control options as shown below
200. ion of square root extraction IM 21B04C01 01E lt 18 AR Function Block gt 18 3 18 2 3 INPUT_OPTS INPUT_OPTS has an option that handles an input with uncertain or bad status as a good status input Bit Function 0 Handles IN as a good status input if its status is uncertain Handles IN_LO as a good status input if its 1 av SS status is uncertain Handles IN_1 as a good status input if its 2 status is uncertain 3 Handles IN_1 as a good status input if its status is bad 4 Handles IN_2 as a good status input if its status is uncertain Handles IN_2 as a good status input if its S status is bad 6 Handles IN_3 as a good status input if its status is uncertain 7 Handles IN_3 as a good status input if its status is bad 8 to 15 Reserved There are options called IN Use uncertain and IN_LO Use uncertain for the IN and IN_LO inputs When these options are valid IN and IN_LO are internally interpreted as good IN and IN_LO even if their statuses are uncertain There is no option for bad status For the IN_1 IN_2 and IN 3 auxiliary inputs there are options known as IN_i Use uncertain and IN Use bad If these options are valid an IN_i with uncertain or bad status is internally interpreted as a good IN _
201. ional gain of PI D control increases in proportion to SERVO_GAIN INTERNAL_GAIN If you increase the value for SERVO_GAIN tracking capability tends to increase whereas control stability tends to decrease SERVO_RESET Tuning range 0 2 to 50 sec Default 15 sec Set the integral time of PI D control The pace of change in integral volume quickens in reverse proportion to the integral time and the volume changes repeatedly until the deviation disappears If you set a smaller value for the integral time the deviation disappears more quickly whereas fast accumulation of integral components may cause an overshoot If you set a larger value for the integral time you can reduce the accumulation of excessive integral components when the deviation is large but it takes longer for the deviation to disappear If O is set this function is invalid SERVO_RATE Tuning range 0 0 05 to 1 0 sec Default 0 22 sec Set the derivative time of PI D control The derivative term relates to the feedback and prevents a rapid output change and the preventive effect increases in proportion to the derivative time If a rapid response causes an overshoot set a larger value for the derivative time to prevent a rapid change and reduce overshoot However if the effect of this change is excessive tracking capability during step response decreases If O is set this function is invalid SERVO_RATE_GAIN Tuning range 2 to 20 De
202. ity correction see also Section 13 5 Travel Calibration When using the Single Acting Type it is possible to adjust the position of the feedback lever while air is being supplied to the actuator See Appendix 5 POSITION ADJUSTMENT OF FEEDBACK LEVER oo Valve stem e Lever La The incline of lever from the horizontal level A8 when the stroke of the stem is 50 must be A9 lt 15 degrees A M selector switch F0306 ai Figure 3 6 Checking Position at Which Clamp Should Be Fixed 3 2 2 Installing YVP110 on Rotary motion Control Valve The following shows the general installation procedure when assembling a YVP110 with a rotary motion control valve combined with a diaphragm actuator or cylinder actuator Note that the most suitable procedure may differ depending on the shapes of the bracket and valve actuator and the structure of the actuator F0307 ai Figure 3 7 YVP Installed on Rotary motion Valve Actuator IM 21B04C01 01E lt 3 Installing YVP110 on Actuator gt 3 4 1 Allowable Range of Rotation Angle of Feedback Shaft When combining a YVP110 with a rotary motion actuator ensure that the rotation of the feedback shaft by the position feedback meets the following specifications e Range of rotation angle of shaft Within 45 degrees from horizont
203. l Tuning Manually adjust control parameters Set transducer block s parameters 5 5 FA0601 ai If you cannot obtain expected response characteristics by Auto Tuning verify the 10 step response and compare your response waveform with three types of response waveforms shown in A6 2 Adjust parameters by referring to the procedure of a waveform that has characteristics similar to those of your waveform If Auto Tuning fails adjust the zero point and the span then set the parameters by referring to the default settings factory settings or tuning examples in A6 3 Then verify the 10 step response and adjust the parameters according to the procedure described in A6 2 For detail about the control parameters see section Ap A Before carrying out parameter tuning change the modes of the AO function block and transducer block to O S A6 2 Control Parameter Tuning Procedure 1 Fast response Le IT Characteristics Since both the rise and tracking of the target value are fast a V shaped overshoot occurs You can obtain a better response by maintaining the response speed and reducing overshoot This waveform is typically observed in small capacity actuators FA0602 ai 1 Modifying overshoot e Increase the value for SERVO_RATE to reduce an excessively rapid response Verify the 10 step response and increment the value by 0 2 e Ifa significant improvement effect cannot be obtained by only i
204. lapse of longer than the time above mentioned In no case should two function blocks of the YVP110 be executed at the same time execution time is overlapped Figure 9 3 shows an example of schedule based on the loop shown in Figure 9 2 YVP110 Advanced Valve Positioner Differential Pressure Transmitter F902 ai Example of Loop Connecting Function Block of YVP110 with other instruments Figure 9 2 Macrocycle Control Period EJA110 YVP110 Function Block BKCAL_IN BKCAL_OUT Schedule Communication Unscheduled Schedule Communication Scheduled Communication F0903 ai Figure 9 3 Function Block Schedule and Communication Schedule For the case where the control period macrocycle is set to 4 seconds or longer set the following interval larger than 1 of the macrocycle e The interval between the end of block execution and the start of releasing CD from LAS e The interval between the end of a block execution and the start of the next block execution 9 4 Setting of Tags and Addresses This section describes the steps in the procedure to set PD Tags and node addresses in the YVP110 Connect YVP110 with other network devices and turn on the power of the host and the bus There are three states of Fieldbus devices as shown in Figure 9 4 and if the state is other than the lowest SM_OPERATIONAL state no function block is executed YVP110 must be transferred to this state when a tag or
205. lass II III Division 1 Groups E F and G Enclosure Type NEMA 4X Temp Class T6 Amb Temp 40 to 80 C 40 to 176 F FM Intrinsically Safe Nonincendive Approval Applicable standard FM3600 FM3610 FM3611 FM3810 ANSI NEMA250 IS 1 Il III 1 ABCDEFG T4 Ta 60 C Type 4X V O AEx ia IIC T4 Ta 60 C Type 4X NI I 2 ABCD T4 Ta 60 C Type 4X I 2 IIC T4 Ta 60 C Type 4X S II 2 FG T4 Ta 60 C Type 4X S III 2 T4 Ta 60 C Type 4X Entity Parameters Groups A B C D E F and G and Group IIC Vmax 24 V Imax 250 mA Pi 1 2 W Ci 1 76 nF Li 0 mH FISCO Parameters Groups A B C D E F and G and Group IIC Vmax 17 5 V Imax 360 mA Pi 2 52 W Ci 1 76 nF Li 0 mH Groups C DEE and G and Group IIB Vmax 17 5 V Imax 380 mA Pi 5 32 W Ci 1 76 nF Li 0 mH Nonincendive Field Wiring Parameters Groups A B C D E F and G and Group IIC Vmax 32 V Ci 1 76 nF Li 0 mH FM Nonincendive Approval for EE Software download 5 Applicable standard FM3600 FM3611 FM3810 Class Division 2 Group A B C amp D Class II Division 2 Group F amp G and Class III Division 1 Class Zone 2 Group IIC in Hazardous Classified locations Enclosure NEMA4X Temp CIl T4 Amb Temp 40 to 60 C 40 to 140 F Vmax 32V Ci 3 52 nF Li 0uH FE FS15 FN15 ATEX Flameproof Approval 4 Applicable standard EN60079 0 2009 EN60079 1 2007 Certificate KEMA 10ATEX0023 X ll 2G Ex d IIC T6 or T5 Gb Amb Temp 40 to 65 C 40 to
206. lowing parameters are tuned by carrying out auto tuning For details see secction A6 4 SERVO_GAIN static loop gain of internal valve control loop SERVO_RESET integral time SERVO_RATE derivative time SERVO_RATE_GAIN derivative gain SERVO_DEADBAND dead band of integral action SERVO_OFFSET offset of integral action BOOST_ON_THRESHOLD threshold to switch on the boost action BOOST_OFF_THRESHOLD threshold to switch off the boost action BOOST_VALUE SERVO_ _SLEEP_LMT timer setting for integral action SERVO_P_ALPHA multiplication coefficient for the square of proportional factor INTERNAL_GAIN total gain of UP module control relay and the valve lt 5 Setup gt 5 3 X_BST_ON_THRESHOLD the addition value to threshold for switching on boost action for exhaust X_BST_OFF_THRESHOLD the addition value to threshold for switching off boost action for exhaust X_BOOST_VALUE the addition boost value for exhaust Applicable only for Double Acting Type Normally control parameters need not be readjusted after auto tuning Should there be a problem see Chapter 16 Troubleshooting If you want to carry out fine adjustments of the zero point and span settings perform the travel calibration as follows Travel Calibration If the full stroke of the valve is too large for the maximum required flow rate you can change the span of the travel by carrying out a travel calibration 1 First
207. lure position sensor failure or deviation error event occurs in the XD_ERROR described above the transducer block activates the specified fail safe action by cutting the current signal to I P module to zero In addition in the event of position sensor failure or deviation error the fail safe action will not be deactivated even when the cause of the failure error is cleared Writing Clear non latch to the parameter RELEASE_FAILSAFE will finally deactivate the fail safe action in this case The fail safe action activated in the event of A D converter failure will be deactivated automatically when the cause of the failure is cleared 12 6 3 Operation Result Integration The YVP110 has a function to integrate the following operation result quantities individually To reset an integrated quantity write O to the corresponding parameter e TOTAL_CYCLE_COUNT Incremented by 1 at each change in the direction of the valve action and indicates the total number of times of changes in direction of valve actions e TOTAL_TRAVEL Total travel distance of the stem position shown as a percentage of the valve position span e TOTAL_OPEN_TIME and TOTAL_CLOSE_ TIME TOTAL_CLOSE_TIME contains the integrated time periods in hours when the valve position is equal to or less than the thresholds previously set in OPEN_CLOSE_THRESHOLD TOTAL_ OPEN_TIME is the integrated time periods in hours other than T
208. ly Sets the status of OUT_D to uncertain when in Man mode 8 Uncertain if Man mode 14 7 Alarm Processing 14 7 1 Block Alarms When a condition shown in the table below is met in a DI block the DI block changes the bit statuses of BLOCK_ERROR accordingly and generates a block alarm Table 14 4 BLOCK_ERROR in AO Block Name of Error Represented 3 Simulate Active SIMULATE_D is active 7 Input Failure Propagate Fault Backward in process variable STATUS_OPTS is false and has BAD status the sub status component of the status of READBACK is sensor failure or device failure The target mode is O S Bit Condition 15 Out of Service 14 7 2 Discrete Alarm The parameter DISC_ALM is a discrete alarm of the parameter OUT_D When the value of OUT_D agrees with the value of DISC_LIM the alarm state of DISC_ALM is set to active and an alert is generated IM 21B04C01 01E lt 15 OS Function Block gt 15 1 15 OS Function Block 15 1 General The OS output splitter function block is used to split a single control signal into two parts for coordinating the actions of two or more valves such as for split range control or sequencing control of a large and asmall valves The OS block receives a control signal and converts it into two signals in accordance with the predefined relationships The major functions of the OS block include e Conversion of the setp
209. m or finer filter e Not contain oil at a concentration higher than 1 ppm in weight or volume e Not be contaminated by a corrosive explosive flammable or toxic gas e Comply with ANSI ISA 57 3 1975 R1981 or ISA S7 3 1975 R1981 X 3 The YVP110 requires an air supply of 140 to 400 kPa Within this range regulate the air supply pressure at a level within 10 of the air supply pressure specified for the actuator and at 10 of the actuator s spring range or higher A WARNING Do not supply air at a pressure exceeding the maximum rated air supply pressure of the actuator or the YVP 110 400 kPa Doing so may result in a high risk of damage to the equipment or lead to an accident Supplying air to the valve actuator may cause the valve stem to move Exercise extreme caution with regard to safety IEN 4 2 2 Pneumatic Piping Connect the air supply pipe to the SUP port of the YVP110 and the output pressure pipe to the OUT 1 port When using the Double Acting Type connect the output pressure pipe to the OUT2 port of the YVP110 A power failure will result in the fail safe action OUT1 0 and OUT2 100 Use O D 6 mm I D 4 mm or O D 8 mm I D 6 mm copper tubes for piping and pneumatic pipe fittings for joints After finishing the piping check that there is no leakage from the joints Note that a YVP110 has two air supply ports SUP one at the rear and the other on the side When delivered the rear SUP
210. mber of inputs 5 Ifthe value is out of the SELECT_TYPE setting range when the value of OP_SELECT is zero As long as there is one valid input even an invalid input can be selected for OP_SELECT If the number of valid inputs is greater than the value of MIN GOOD the number of the input including an invalid input specified by OP_SELECT will be stored in SELECTED Therefore even if an invalid input is selected SELECTED does not become zero If no input is selected for OP_SELECT the output of SELECTED will depend on SELECT_TYPE The Table 17 1 shows the value of SELECTED according to the number of valid inputs and SELECT_TYPE Table17 1 Value of SELECTED According to Inputs Valid Value of SELECTED Inputs SELECT_TYPE SELECT_TYPE SELECT_TYPE SELECT_TYPE First Good MINIMUM MAXIMUM or Latched Good MIDDLE AVERAGE None 0 zero 0 zero 0 zero 0 zero 1 of IN witha of selected IN of selected IN 1 Multiple INs smaller value 0 the average is of valid INs the Even of INs taken average is taken Multiple INs of IN with the Odd of INs middle value Table 17 2 Value of SELECTED According to the Mode O S MAN AUTO 0 0 0to8 IM 21B04C01 01E 17 4 2 OUT Processing OUT is an output parameter used to send the value selected in the IS block to another function block The following describes OUT processing Table 17 3 Block Mode and Value 17 12 lt
211. miseks p rduge l hima lokagava Yokogawa kontori v i esindaja poole Wszystkie instrukcje obs ugi dla urz dze w wykonaniu przeciwwybuchowym Ex zgodnych z wymaganiami ATEX dost pne s w j zyku angielskim niemieckim i francuskim Je eli wymagana jest instrukcja obs ugi w Pa stwa lokalnym je zyku prosimy o kontakt z najbli szym biurem Yokogawy Vsi predpisi in navodila za ATEX Ex sorodni pridelki so pri roki v angliS ini nemS ini ter franco ini Ee so Ex sorodna navodila potrebna v va em tukejnjem jeziku kontaktirajte va najbli i Yokogawa office ili predstaunika Az ATEX Ex m szerek g pk nyveit angol n met s francia nyelven adjuk ki Amennyiben helyi nyelven k rik az Ex eszk z k le r sait k rj k keress k fel a legk zelebbi Yokogawa irod t vagy k pviseletet Bcnykn ynbTBaHna 3a NPOAYKTU oT cepnata ATEX Ex ce npegnaraT Ha anrnmu cK HEMCKN M CPpeHcKu e3uk AKo ce HYKAAETE OT yYNbTBAHNA 3a npogykTn oT cepnaTa Ex Ha pogHnA BU 3K ce CBbpKeTe c Hal 6nu3kua once nnn npegctasntTencTBo Ha npma Yokogawa Toate manualele de instructiuni pentru produsele ATEX Ex sunt in limba engleza germana si franceza In cazul in care doriti instructiunile in limba locala trebuie sa contactati cel mai apropiat birou sau reprezentant Yokogawa ll manwali kollha ta istruzzjonijiet g al prodotti marbuta ma ATEX Ex huma disponibbli bl Ingli bil ermani u bil Fran i Jekk tkun te tie s
212. mple when the data status of BKCAL_IN in a PID block is bad or good not invited the PID block enters IMan mode LO mode Means Local Override mode Ifthe PID block enters LO mode the block output follows the tracking value TRK_VAL In AO block the block enters LO mode when the block detects the fault status In this case the block holds the output or outputs the pre configured value FSTATE_VALUE according to the setting of options Man mode Means Manual mode If the data status of a function block s input is bad or its target mode is Man the block enters Man mode In Man mode the function block does not update its OUT value If the target is also Man it allows the user to write a desired value to it Auto mode In Auto mode the function block performs the specified calculations based on the setpoint and outputs the result independently without interlocking with another function block The user can write the setpoint of a function block in this mode if the target is Auto If the target mode of a function block is Auto or if both of the following conditions are met for a function bock the block enters Auto mode e The target mode is Cas or RCas e There is an error in communication with the upstream function block Cas mode Means Cascade mode In Cas mode the function block performs the specified calculations based on the setpoint that is input from a different function block via the cascade in
213. mulation function To prevent this parameter setting from being modified during plant operation by mistake a hardware switch labeled SIM ENABLE is provided on the YVP110 s amplifier assembly Sliding this switch position to ON enables the simulation function to run Remotely writing REMOTE LOOP TEST SWITCH to SIM_ENABLE_MSG also causes the same effect as turning ON the SIM ENABLE switch however the value of SIM_ENABLE_MSG will be lost when the power to the YVP110 is turned off In short simulation can be carried out if the hardware SIM ENABLE switch is ON or if the value of SIM_ENABLE_MSG is REMOTE LOOP TEST SWITCH When the simulation can be carried out alarms generated from the resource blocks mask the other device alarms Hence simulation must be disabled immediately after it has finished SIM ENABLE switch Normally OFF 1 i JO Unused gt 2m Figure 10 1 F1001 ai SIM ENABLE Switch IM 21B04C01 01E lt 11 Resource Block gt 11 1 11 11 1 General The resource block stores device hardware information related to all function blocks in the same device such as the memory size and controls the device hardware and internal function blocks Regardless of the execution schedule of the function blocks the resource block runs at a certain interval Resource Block 11 3 Device Status When fault occurs the corresponding bits in the parameters DEVICE STATUS _1 to _3 of
214. n e Simulation e Filtering time delay e Alarm generation Transducer OUT_D F1401 ai Figure 14 1 Inputs Outputs of DI Function Block 1 Simulate Optional SIMULATE_D Invert FIELD_VAL_D Output CHANNEL 1 OUT D Alarms DISC F1402 ai Figure 14 2 Function Diagram of DI Function Block 14 2 Modes The target mode for a DI function block can be set from three block modes O S Auto and Man 14 3 PV Value PV Di A limit switch signal is transferred from the transducer block via a channel Normally the Transducer Value and Transducer Status values in SIMULATE_D are copied to FIELD_VAL_D indicating the on off status of the corresponding limit switch If SIMULATE_D is set to Enable the Simulate Value and Simulate Status values in SIMULATE_D are copied to FIELD_VAL_D SIMULATE_D contains the following data Simulate Status Status to be set in simulation mode Simulate Value Value to be set in simulation mode Transducer Status Status of input from transducer Transducer Value Value of input from transducer Enable Disable Whether to enable 2 or disable 1 simulation The value of FIELD_VAL_D is copied to the process value PV_D At this time if the Invert option bit 0 is specified as true the on off status is inverted Table 14 14 FIELD_VAL_D Value of PV_D Invert False Invert True Value of FIELD_VAL_D 0 0 off 1 21 1 on 0 14 4 Filtering Tra
215. n be put DENY into effective Before operations in the GRANT parameter component set the bits to 1 corresponding to the intended operations After the operations check the DENY parameter component If the corresponding bits are not set to 1 in DENY it proves that the corresponding operation has been put into effective 13 6013 6113 IO_ OPTS 0 O S Settings for the I O processing of the block 14 6014 6114 STATUS_ 0 O S Defines block actions depending on block status conditions OPTS 15 6015 6115 CHANNEL 2or3 O S Defines the channel number of the hardware channel connected to the transducer block Always set 2 for the DI1 block and 3 for DI2 in a YVP110 16 6016 6116 PV_FTIME 0 second Time constant of filter for PV_D 17 6017 6117 FIELD_VAL_ Status of limit switch signal obtained from the transducer block D 18 6018 6118 UPDATE_ Shows the contents of an update event upon occurrence EVT 19 6019 6119 BLOCK_ Shows the contents of a block alarm upon occurrence ALM 20 6020 6120 ALARM_ enable Shows the alarm summary current alarm statuses SUM acknowledged unacknowledged states masking states for the DI block 21 6021 6121 ACK_ OxFFFF Defines the priority of WRITE_ALM as well as allows for OPTION notification to be disabled and makes acknowledement unnecessary for WRITE_ALM 22 6022 6122 DISC_PRI 0 Priority order of discrete alarm 23 6023 6123 DISC_LIM 1 Input sta
216. n in Figure 3 5 IM 21B04C01 01E lt 3 Installing YVP110 on Actuator gt 3 3 A caution It is extremely likely that attaching the lever in the wrong orientation will cause the feedback shaft to rotate at an angle exceeding its mechanical limits of 55 degrees resulting in the YVP110 being seriously damaged AA IMPORTANT A stopper is attached to the feedback shaft to prevent an over rotation of the shaft as shown below When installing the lever make sure that you install it on the stopper Stopper F0311 ai Next fix the lock screw Valve stem m Clamp Feedback lever Clamp pin Lock screw Stopper Applicable pin O D 6 mm rn IT E e F0305 ai Figure 3 5 Attaching Lever and Clamp 2 Attach the clamp to the stem in reference with Figure 3 5 It is necessary to set the clamp of the YVP110 in a position that allows the feedback lever to be at an angle within 15 degrees from the horizontal level when the valve stem is at the 50 position see Figure 3 6 Installing the YVP110 at a carefully determined position where the feedback lever is at the horizontal level when the valve stem is at the 50 position will make the consequent installation work easier Note that only if the YVP110 is installed ata position meeting the specification above it is guaranteed that the specified accuracy can be obtained by linear
217. ncrementing the value for SERVO_RATE in small steps of approximately 5 or less input the value in small steps in BOOST_ON_THRESHOLD 2 and decrement the value for BOOST_VALUE 1 by 2 to decrease the boost e The same boost value is set on both the air delivery and exhaust sides using Auto Tuning If the overshoot on the exhaust side is larger than that on the air delivery side for a double acting model input a negative value in X_BOOST_VALUE 1 2 without changing the value of 0 in X_BST_ON_THRESHOLD 1 2 and X_BST_OFF_THRESHOLD 1 2 First try to input a negative value of half that of BOOST_ VALUE 1 2 and if necessary increment or decrement the value by 1 e If necessary increment or decrement the value for SERVO_GAIN by 30 2 Improving the stabilization time Decrease the value for SERVO_RESET to improve the capability of tracking the target value Verify the 10 step response and decrement the value by 3 IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 6 Manual Tuning Guideline gt A 39 3 Improving the response time e If you input a value in a small step of 5 or less and response is slow increment the value for SERVO_GAIN by 30 e If necessary increment or decrement the value for BOOST_VALUE 1 2 and X_BOOST_ VALUE 1 2 by 1 respectively 4 Checking hunting operation Input a value in a large step of approx 80 to ensure the hunting operation does not occur If the hunting operation does occur decr
218. nction block AR function block and optional PID function block providing the means to implement a flexible instrumentation system For information on other features engineering design construction work startup and maintenance of Fieldbus refer to Fieldbus Technical Information TI 38K3A01 01E 8 2 Internal Structure of YVP110 The YVP110 contains two virtual field devices VFD that share the following functions 8 2 1 System network Management VFD e Sets node addresses and Physical Device tags PD Tag necessary for communication e Controls the execution of function blocks e Manages operation parameters and communication resources Virtual Communication Relationship VCR 8 2 2 Function Block VFD 1 Resource block Manages the information common to each FB VFD in YVP110 2 Transducer block Located between Hardware O actuator sensor and AO DI function blocks pass the control signal from AO function block to I P module to control the valve position 3 AO function block e Accepts a control signal from an upstream block and pass the signal to Transducer block e Accept a valve position signal from Transducer block and feedback it to an upstream block 4 Dl function block Receives the discrete signal from Transcducer blcok and output them 5 PID function block optional Offers PID control function 8 3 Logical Structure of Each Block YVP110 System network management VFD parame
219. ne 2 An area in which an explosive gas atmosphere is not likely to occur in normal operation and if it does occur it will exist for a short period only 2 Environmental Conditions The standard environmental condition for the installation of flameproof apparatus is limited to an ambient temperature range from 20 C to 40 C for products certified under Technical Criteria However some field mounted instruments may be certified at an ambient temperature up to 60 C as indicated on the instrument nameplates If the flameproof apparatus are exposed to direct sunshine or radiant heat from plant facilities appropriate thermal protection measures shall be taken 5 External Wiring for Flameproof Apparatus Flameproof apparatus require cable wiring or flameproof metal conduits for their electrical connections For cable wiring cable glands cable entry devices for flameproof type to wiring connections shall be attached For metal conduits attach sealing fittings as close to wiring connections as possible and completely seal the apparatus All non live metal parts such as the enclosure shall be securely grounded For details see the USER S GUIDELINES for Electrical Installations for Explosive Gas Atmospheres in General Industry published in 1994 1 Cable Wiring e For cable wiring cable glands cable entry devices for flameproof type specified or supplied with the apparatus shall be directly attached to the wiring con
220. nections to complete sealing of the apparatus Screws that connect cable glands to the apparatus are those for G type parallel pipe threads JIS B 0202 with no sealing property To protect the apparatus from corrosive gases or moisture apply non hardening sealant such as liquid gaskets to those threads for waterproofing EX B03E lt Installation and Operating Precautions for TIIS Flameproof Equipment gt N e Specific cables shall be used as recommended by the USER S GUIDELINES for Electrical Installations for Explosive Gas Atmospheres in General Industry published in 1994 e In necessary appropriate protective pipes conduit or flexible pipes ducts or trays shall be used for preventing the cable run outside the cable glands from damage e To prevent explosive atmosphere from being propagated form Zone 1 or 2 hazardous location to any different location or non hazardous location through the protective pipe or duct apply sealing of the protective pipes in the vicinity of individual boundaries or fill the ducts with sand appropriately e When branch connections of cables or cable connections with insulated cables inside the conduit pipes are made a flameproof or increased safety connection box shall be used In this case flameproof or increased safety cable glands meeting the type of connection box must be used for cable connections to the box 2 Flameproof Metal Conduit Wiring s For the flameproof metal
221. ng e Write REMOTE LOOP TEST SWITCH to SIM_ENABLE_MSG in the resource block e Turn on the SIM ENABLE hardware switch on the YPV110 s amplifier assembly see Section 10 3 Simulation Function Simulation enabling procedure e Check that the simulation switch is ON active e Check the AO block mode e Change the value of SIMULATE status to Enable e Set the simulated input value in SIMULATE value 2 Simulation Disable This is a method for disabling the simulation function of the AO block Simulation disabling procedure e Confirm whether the simulation function can be disabled e Change the value of SIMULATE status to Disable IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 3 DD Methods and DD Menu gt A 29 e The method displays a message announcing that block alarms will not be reset until both the hardware switch and software switch in the resource block for enabling execution of the simulation function are turned off A3 2 3 OS Block 1 X Y Scaling This is a method for setting the scales of the X and Y axes for defining the conversion characteristics for OUT_1 and OUT_2 values of IN ARRAY and OUT_ARRAY by setting the coordinates of four endpoints P1 as the start point of OUT_1 P2 as the end point of OUT_1 P3 as the start point of OUT_2 and P4 as the end point of OUT_2 See also Section 15 3 Output Processing X Y scaling procedure e Set coordinates of P1 through P4 P1 IN_ ARRAY
222. ng from among the parameters that can be tuned by the auto tuning function It does not contain a help utility for a stop point search searching for the valve s mechanical stop positions e AO TB block mode check e Execution of control parameter tuning AUTO_TUNE_EXEC IM 21B04C01 01E 5 Travel Calibration This method guides you through each step to carry out travel calibration See the respective descriptions in Section 5 3 Carrying out Auto Tuning Travel calibration procedure e AQO Transducer block mode check e Execute travel calibration 0 calibration Adjustment of FINAL_VALUE by moving the valve position to the desired 0 position Execute 0 calibration TRAVEL_CALIB_EXEC Span calibration Adjustment of FINAL_VALUE by moving the valve position to the desired 100 position Execute span calibration TRAVEL_CALIB_EXEC 50 calibration Adjustment of FINAL_VALUE by moving the valve position to the desired 50 position Execute 50 calibration TRAVEL_CALIB_EXEC Exit 6 Operational Parameter Configuration This method guides you through the setting of individual operational parameters excluding the selection of position to flow rate characteristic type Operational parameter configuration procedure e AO Transducer block mode check e Operational parameter configuration Position Limit setting FINAL _VALUE_CUTOFF_LO FINAL VALUE CUTOFF_HI FINAL_VALUE_RANGE Limit Switch setting LIM_SW_LO LIM L
223. ng for Actions upon Computer Failure SHED_OPT Normal shed Sets MODE_BLK actual to Cas 1 normal return and leaves MODE_BLK target unchanged Normal shed no return Sets both MODE_BLK actual and MODE_BLK target to Cas 1 Shed to Auto normal return Sets MODE_BLK actual to Auto and leaves MODE_BLK target unchanged Shed to Auto no return Sets both MODE_BLK actual and MODE _BLK target to Autor Shed to Manual normal return Sets MODE_BLK actual to Man and leaves MODE_BLK target unchanged Shed to Manual no return Sets both MODE_BLK actual and MODE_BLK target to Man Shed to retained target normal return If Cas is set in MODE_BLK target sets MODE_BLK actual to Cas 1 and leaves MODE_BLK target unchanged If Cas is not set in MODE_BLK target sets MODE_BLK actual to Auto 2 and leaves MODE_BLK target unchanged Shed to retained target no return If Cas is set in MODE_BLK target sets MODE_BLK actual to Cas and MODE_BLK target to Cas 1 too If Cas is not set in MODE_BLK target sets MODE_BLK actual to Auto 2 and MODE_BLK target to Cas 4 The modes to which the PID block can transfer are limited to those set in MODE_BLK permitted and the priority levels of modes are as shown below In fact if Normal shed normal return is set for SHED_OPT detection of a computer failure causes MODE_BLK actual to change to Cas Auto
224. nge 0 0 1 to 10 Default 1 9 2 9 BOOST_OFF_THRESHOLD 1 2 Tuning range 0 1 to 10 Default 1 0 1 0 BOOST_VALUE 1 2 Tuning range 0 to 50 of MV Default 8 10 of MV Set the boost function that serves as a function for accelerating air delivery and exhaust Tracking capability for response after an input change increases When the set point is changed if the difference between the old set point and the new set point is greater than the BOOST_ON_THRESHOLD the BOOST_VALUE is added to the current output to the I P module and the added value is removed when the deviation enters the range of BOOST _ OFF_THRESHOLD However each parameter has two values 1 and 2 where 1 is for a small step and 2 for a large step Therefore set each parameter so that the relation 2 2 1 is established If the difference between the old set point and the new set point is greater than BOOST ON THRESHOLDJ1 and less than 2 BOOST _ VALUE 1 functions and the added value is removed when the deviation enters the range of BOOST_OFF_THRESHOLD 1 Added to boost Removed from boost BOOST_ON THRESHOLD 2 Added to BOOST VALUE Set point BOOST_ON_THRESHOLD 1 Removed from BOOST_VALUE 1 BOOST OFF THRESHOLD 1 nen Previous set point FA0606 ai If the difference between the old set point and the new set point is greater than BOOST ON THRESHOLD 2 BOOST_VALUE 2 functions independently from BOO
225. nnels 1 0x1 5 PowerMode 0 0x0 371 CHANNEL SIATES 0 1 channel 1 0 0x0 2 channel 2 128 0x80 3 channel 3 128 0x80 4 channel A 128 0x80 5 channel 5 128 0x80 6 channel 6 128 0x80 7 channel 7 128 0x80 8 channel 8 128 0x80 372 PLME_BASIC_INFO 0 R 1 InterfaceMode 0 0x0 2 LoopBackMode 0 0x0 3 XmitEnabled 1 0x1 4 RcevEnabled 1 0x1 5 PreferredReceiveChannel 1 0x1 6 MediaTypeSelected 73 0x49 7 ReceiveSelect 1 0x1 373 LINK_SCHEDULE_ACTIVATION_VARIABLE RW 374 LINK_ 0 R SCHEDULE_LIST_ 1 NumOfSchedules 0 CHARACTERISTICS 2 NumOfSubSchedulesPerSchedule 1 RECORD 3 ActiveScheduleVersion 0 4 ActiveSheduleOdIndex 0 5 ActiveScheduleStarting Time 0 375 DLME_SCHEDULE_ 0 R DESCRIPTOR 1 1 Version 0 2 MacrocycleDuration 0 3 TimeResolution 0 376 DLME_SCHEDULE_ 0 R DESCRIPTOR 2 1 Version 0 2 MacrocycleDuration 0 3 TimeResolution 0 377 DOMAIN 1 Read write impossible Get OD possible 378 DOMAIN 2 Read write impossible Get OD possible A2 5 2 Descriptions for LM Parameters The following describes LM parameters of a YVP A IMPORTANT Do not turn off the power to the YVP immediately after setting When the parameters are saved to the EEPROM the redundant processing is executed for the improvement of reliability If the power is turned off within 60 seconds after setting is made the modified parameters are not saved and the settings may return to the original value 1 DlmeLinkMasterCap
226. not allow Change the target mode See the Appendix 1 write access parameter lists The actual mode of a function block cannot be equalized to the target mode O S is set for the target mode of the resource block Change the target mode of the resource block to Auto Appendix 1 10 1 The I O of the function block Using a configuration tool set the Chapter 9 in question is not connected to virtual communication relationship another function block VCR and link object Schedules that define when Set the schedules using a Chapter 9 function blocks execute are not set correctly configuration tool The transducer block is in O S mode Change the target mode of the transducer block to Auto Appendix 1 10 1 A block s dynamic parameters do not update The block in question is in O S mode Change the target mode as necessary Appendix 1 10 1 O S is set for the target mode of the resource block Change the target mode of the resource block to Auto Appendix 1 10 1 IM 21B04C01 01E 20 4 Troubleshooting Valve Control lt 20 Troubleshooting gt 20 2 Problem Presumed Cause Remedy Ref Section Achange in setpoint causes Air piping is incorrect Correct piping 4 2 no action of the valve The instrument is in FAILSAFE Write Clear non latch to RELEASE_ 12 6 2 state FAILSAFE parameter
227. nput of a selected SELECT number Operator settable 23 17023 UPDATE_ Indicates event information if an update event setting EVT change occurs 24 17024 BLOCK_ Indicates alarm information if a block alarm occurs ALM 25 17025 IN_5 0 Input 5 26 17026 IN_6 0 Input 6 27 17027 IN_7 0 Input 7 28 17028 IN_8 0 Input 8 29 17029 DISABLE_5 0 1 0 Selector switch to disable input 5 from being selected 30 17030 DISABLE _6 O 1 0 Selector switch to disable input 6 from being selected 31 17031 DISABLE_7 0 1 0 Selector switch to disable input 7 from being selected 32 17032 DISABLE_8 0 1 0 Selector switch to disable input 8 from being selected IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 1 Function Block Parameters gt A 16 A1 8 Parameters of AR Block Default Beas Index Parameter Valid factory Write Description Index Name Range setting 0 17500 BLOCK TAG AR O S_ Information relating to this function block such as block HEADER tag DD revision and execution time i 17501 ST_REV 0 Indicates the revision level of the set parameters associated with the AR block If a setting is modified this revision is updated It is used to check for parameter changes etc 2 17502 TAG_DESC Null Auniversal parameter that stores comments describing tag information 3 17503 STRATEGY 1 A universal parameter intended for use by the hig
228. nsfer of a change in the value of FIELD_VAL_D to the value of PV_D can be delayed for a desired time period set in the parameter PV_FTIME in seconds IM 21B04C01 01E lt 14 DI Function Block gt 14 2 14 5 Output The value of the output OUT_D is generated based on the value of PV_D 14 66 lIO_OPTS and STATUS OPTS IO_OPTS and STATUS_OPTS are parameters that stipulate options about block s signal processing and mode transitions The settings of these options are made by setting or resetting the respective bits on true off false Table 14 2 shows the options available in O_OPTS of a DI block Table 14 2 IO_OPTS of DI Block Bit Position Meaning Description 0 Invert Inverts the on off status The table below shows the options available in STATUS_OPTS of the AO block Table 14 3 STATUS_OPTS of DI Block Bit Sub Position Meaning Description 3 Propagate Stipulates the handling of Fault Forward the value and data status of OUT_D when the quality component of the data status of SIMULATE_D falls to Bad and the sub status component falls to device failure or sensor failure If this option is true then it Does not generate a block alarm Sets the status and value of SIMULATE_D in OUT_D If this option is false then it Generates the input failure block alarm Set the quality and sub status components of the status of OUT_D to Bad and non specific respective
229. nt Value Description index bytes which has already been downloaded to the domain L EE a i Statistics data dre to this parameter causes the corresponding Statistics not supported Supported schedule to be executed On the other hand 2 Medium 8 0x49 00 00 00 Wire medium writing 0 to this parameter stops execution of the AndData 00000000 voltage mode and active schedule Rates 31 25 kbps are Supported supported i FE CECR Sage TEE 13 LinkScheduleListCharacteristicsRecord supported Sub A NumOf 1 1 index Element Description Channels 1 NumOf Indicates the total number 5 Power 1 10 0 Bus powered Schedules of LAS schedules that have Mode 1 Self powered been downloaded to the domain 2 NumOfSub Indicates the maximum 1 0 ChannelStates SchedulesPer number of sub schedules an F Schedule LAS schedule can contain Sub Element Size Value Description This is fixed to 1 in the index bytes Yokogawa communication 1 Channel 1 1 0x00 In Use No Bad since last stacks read No Silent Since last 3 ActiveSchedule Indicates the version number read No Jabber since Version of the schedule currently last read Tx Good Rx executed Good 4 ActiveSchedule Indicates the index number 2 _ Channel 2 d 0x80 Unused OdIndex of the domain that stores the 3 Channel 3 1 t Unused schedule currently executed 4 Channel 1 t Unused P ActiveSchedule Indicates the time when the 5 Channel 5 1 0x80 Unused StaringTime current schedule began
230. ocd dec secs ancc weed Seen secs ence cued aces sued SEENEN 2 1 3 Installing YVP110 on Actuator nsiccesccscccec secs cceectecetsn ee icacintieleiceteene 3 1 3 1 GMO a teas vase vacevece vase vscevecevsce vate vacevesevsceesenescevaaevien 3 1 3 2 Installing YVP110 on Actuator ceecceeseeeneeeteneseneneneseneeenenenesenesenenseessnenenenenes 3 1 3 2 1 Installing YVP110 on Linear motion Control Valve cceeeeees 3 1 3 2 2 Installing YVP110 on Rotary motion Control Valve 0 0 eee 3 3 3 2 3 AIM Switching 0 0 eeee eee cee cnet eee e eee e tee taee see seeeseesaeeseeseetieetieetieeeaeess 3 5 10th Edition Dec 2013 YK IM 21B04C01 01E All Rights Reserved Copyright 2000 Yokogawa Electric Corporation 4 Wiring and Piping E 4 1 4 1 General E E E KEES uer 4 1 4 2 PIDIN ET 4 1 4 2 1 Aii SUPP yirino aada 4 1 4 2 2 Pneumatic Piping niiair E R 4 1 4 3 le E r T 4 2 4 3 1 Recommended Cables NENNEN raa 4 2 4 3 2 Precautions on Vimg aiana 4 2 4 4 VE GI Tue D 4 4 5 SO TUN o ENEN eee AAE etree AE E SAA EASE E E E 5 1 5 1 EC 5 1 5 2 Setting Basic Parameter cccessesssesseesseesseeseeesseesseesseesseesseesseesseeseenseenenes 5 1 5 3 Carrying out TUN NG e cise cise ccse esac cceectee este cee cane cuee NNAS even cnn sue cate even sete cue suze sues 5 2 5 4 Checking Valve Betons cet Cegedel 5 4 5 5 Setting Parameters of Transducer BIOCK ccccesceeceeseeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 5 4 6 Naked 6 1 6 1 GM
231. ocks within the device YVP110 38 1038 ACK_OPTION OxFFFF Defines the acknowledgment action of each alarm type By setting a bit to 1 the corresponding alarm will behave as acknowledged immediately when it occurs without receipt of acknowledgment from the host IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 1 Function Block Parameters gt A 3 pera Index Parameter Name ace ching Write Description 39 1039 WRITE_PRI 0 Defines the priority level of WRITE_ALM as well as allows for notification to be disabled and makes acknowledgment unnecessary for WRITE_ALM 40 1040 WRITE_ALM Alarm generated when WRITE_LOCK is set to unlocked 41 1041 ITK_VER Version number of the inter operability test kit 42 1042 SOFT_REV Revision number of software 43 1043 SOFT_DSC Revision number of software for development purpose 44 1044 SIM_ENABLE_MSG Nu Used to determine whether to enable the simulation function to run To enable set REMOTE LOOP TEST SWITCH 45 1045 DEVICE_STATUS_1 O Shows device statuses mainly link object setting statuses 46 1046 DEVICE_STATUS_2 O Shows device statuses mainly individual for each block status 47 1047 DEVICE_STATUS_3 0 Shows device statuses mainly the contents of XD_ERROR in each block 48 1048 DEVICE_STATUS_4 O Not used in the YVP 110 49 1049 DEVICE_STATUS_5 0 Not use
232. of control output 28 8028 OUT_HI_LIM 100 Upper limit for control output OUT 29 8029 OUT_LO_LIM O Lower limit for control output OUT 30 8030 BKCAL_HYS 0 Hysteresis for release from a limit for OUT status 31 8031 BKCAL_OUT Read back value to be sent to the BKCAL_IN of the downstream block 32 8032 RCAS_IN 0 Remote setpoint set from the host computer IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 1 Function Block Parameters gt A 13 Relative Parameter Default index Index Name factory setting Write Description 33 8033 ROUT_IN Remote control output value set from a computer etc 34 8034 SHED_OPT 1 Defines the mode shedding actions namely the changes to be made to MODE BLK target and MODE BLK actual when 1 the value of RCAS_IN status becomes Bad if MODE_BLK actual RCAS or when 2 the value of ROUT_IN status becomes Bad if MODE BLK actual ROUT 35 8035 RCAS_OUT Remote setpoint sent to a host computer etc 36 8036 ROUT OUT Remote control output value 37 8037 TRK_SCALE 0 100 Upper and lower scale limits used to convert the output tracking value TRK_VAL to non dimensional 38 8038 TRK_IN_D Switch for output tracking 39 8039 TRK_VAL Output tracking value When MODE_BLK actual LO the value scaled from the TRK_VAL value is set in OUT 40 8040 FF_VAL Fee
233. oint SP value into two output values OUT_1 and OUT_2 in accordance with the user specified characteristics set in IN_ARRAY and OUT_ ARRAY e Generation of the output value to be fed back to the upstream block BKCAL_OUT CAS IN BKCAL_OUT BKCAL_IN_1 gt os OUT_1 BKCAL_IN_2 gt OUT_2 F1501 ai Figure 15 1 Inputs Outputs of OS Function Block Output BKCAL_OUT ze X11 X12 vm 12 gt OUT_1 LOCKVAL CAS_IN BKCAL_IN_1 BEN i Output i X21 X22 ks OUT 2 Y21 Y22 EEN BKCAL_IN_2 F1502 ai Figure 15 2 Function Diagram of OS Function Block 15 2 Modes The target mode for the OS function block can be set from three block modes Cas Auto and O S Regardless of the target mode the OS block automatically enters the IMan mode when a specified condition is met 15 3 Output Processing The values of OUT_1 and OUT_2 with respect to the value of SP which is the value of the input from the upstream block CAS_IN in the Cas mode or the local setpoint value in the Auto mode are determined as shown in the following graphs Split range Control Valve Sequencing Control 100 100 P1 P4 P2 P4 X11 Y11 X22 Y22 X12 Y12 X22 Y22 OUT_1 OUT 2 50 OUT P3 0 X21 Y21 0 50 100 0 50 100 SP SP F1503 ai Figure 15 3 Examples of Valve Operation Characteristics These characteristics are determined by the array element values in par
234. omponents Target Actual Permitted and Normal Target is the mode into which an operator wants to bring this block This component is writable Actual shows the actual mode of the block and is read only When necessary condition is satisfied actual mode becomes same to target There is a chance that actual mode says different from target by some reason Permitted mode shows which mode is allowed in this Function Block Normal mode is a memo for operator to record mode that an operator expects in normal conditions The table below shows the modes supported by each function block contained in a YVP110 Table 10 1 Block Modes Function Block Modes Resource Auto O S Transducer Auto O S AO RCas Cas Auto Man LO Man O S DI Auto Man O S OS Auto Cas IMan O S PID Rout RCas Cas Auto Man LO IMan O S IS Auto Man O S AR Auto Man O S Modes marked with in the above table cannot be specified as target The following are outlines of each mode O S mode Means Out of Service mode in which the block does not run and its output and setpoint maintain their previous values IMan mode Means Initialization Manual mode Only the AO and PID blocks in the YVP110 support this mode When one of these blocks detects a loss of a correct path to the downstream block such as when the downstream block is in the O S Man Auto or LO mode it enters IMan mode For exa
235. on to the calculated result to perform limitation processing for output The range extension function compensates the IN and IN_LO input values when two devices with different ranges are connected to make smooth input switching IM 21B04C01 01E 18 2 Input Section There are five inputs IN and IN_LO main inputs and IN_1 IN_2 and IN_3 auxiliary inputs IN and IN_LO are intended to connect devices with different measurement ranges and allow the use of switching a measurement range by selecting the measuring device However because there are slight differences between IN and IN LO values even when the same item is measured instantaneous switching causes abrupt changes in the output To prevent this phenomenon the Arithmetic block uses a function known as range extension to compensate the IN and IN_LO values between RANGE_HI and RANGE _LO This enables the input to be switched smoothly The result of the range extension function is substituted into PV to be used for calculations 18 2 1 The range extension function determines the PV value in the following order 1 If IN2RANGE_HI PV IN 2 If IN lt RANGE_LO gt PV IN_LO 3 If RANGE_HI gt IN gt RANGE_LO PV g x IN 1 g x IN_LO g IN RANGE_LO RANGE_HI RANGE_ LO RANGE_HI and RANGE_LO are threshold values for switching two main inputs seamlessly Main Inputs PV IN_LO PV g 3 IN 1 g 3 IN_LO PV IN D f Formula based on 2
236. or Man whichever is set in MODE_BLK permitted and has the lowest priority level Man Higher priority level Auto Cas RCas ROut Lower priority level 2 Only when Auto is set as permitted mode NOTE If a control block is connected as a cascade primary block of the PID block in question a mode transition of the PID block to Cas occurs in the following sequence due to initialization of the cascade connection RCas or ROut Auto gt Cas 16 17 Alarms There are two kinds of alarms generated by a PID block block and process alarms 16 17 1 Block Alarm BLOCK_ALM The block alarm BLOCK_ALM is generated upon occurrence of either of the following errors values set in BLOCK_ERR and notifies the content of BLOCK_ERR Value of z Bit BLOCK ERR Condition 4 Local Override MODE_BLK actual of the PID block is LO 7 Input Failure The status of PV is Bad The status of IN is Bad or the status of IN is Uncertain and Use Uncertain as Good is false in STATUS_OPTS 15 Out of Service MODE_BLK target of the PID block is O S 16 17 2 Process Alarms There are six types of process alarms Only one process alarm can be generated at a time and the process alarm having the highest priority level from among those occurring at the same time is generated The priority level is set for each process alarm type Parameter Containin Green Cause of Occurrence Priority
237. orm us of the model name and the serial number of the instrument together with a detailed description of nonconformance and a progress report Outline drawings or related data will also be helpful for repair Whether or not the defective instrument is repaired free of charge depends on the result of our inspection The following conditions shall not be eligible for charge exempt repair Problems caused by improper or insufficient maintenance on the part of the customer Trouble or damage caused by mishandling misusage or storage that exceeds the design or specification requirements Problems caused by improper installation location or by maintenance conducted in a non conforming location Trouble or damage was caused by modification or repair that was handled by a party or parties other than our consigned agent Trouble or damage was caused by inappropriate relocation following delivery Trouble or damage was caused by fire earthquake wind or flood damage lightning strikes or other acts of God that are not directly a result of problems with this instrument m Trade Mark FOUNDATION Fieldbus is a trademark of the Fieldbus Foundation Registered trademarks or trademarks appearing in this manual are not designated by a TM or symbol Other company names and product names used in this manual are the registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective owners IM 21B04C01 01E lt Introduction gt X m ATEX Doc
238. ory set 9 6 3 View Object This is the object to form groups of parameters in a block One of advantage brought by forming groups of parameters is the reduction of load for data transaction YVP110 has 12 View objects for Transducer block and four View objects for each Resource block AO block and DI and DI2 function block and each View object has the parameters listed in Table 9 8 to 9 15 Table 9 7 Purpose of Each View Object Description VIEW 1 Set of dynamic parameters required by operator for plant operation PV SV OUT Mode etc VIEW 2 Set of static parameters which need to be shown to plant operator at once Range etc VIEW 2 Get of all the dynamic parameters VIEW A Get of static parameters for configuration or maintenance IM 21B04C01 01E lt 9 Configuration gt Table 9 8 View Object for Transducer Block Relative P ramet rs VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW index 1 2 31st 32nd 4 1st 4 2nd 4 3rd 4 4th 4 Sth 4 6th 4 7th 4 8th 1 ST_REV 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 TAG_ DESC 3 STRATEGY 4 ALERT_KEY 5 MODE_BLK 4 6 BLOCK_ERR 2 7 UPDATE EVT 8 BLOCK_ALM 9 TRANSDUCER_ DIRECTORY 10 TRANSDUCER_TYPE 2 2 11 XD_ERROR 1 12 CORRECTION_DIRCTORY 13 FINAL_VALUE 5 14 FINAL_VALUE_RANGE 11
239. path The SELECTED parameter is the 2nd output indicating which input has been selected using the algorithm IM 21B04C01 01E lt 17 IS Function Block gt 17 3 17 2 Input Section 17 2 1 Mode Handling The Input Selector block s operations are determined by the mode parameter name MODE_BLK The following describes operations in each mode Supported Role Mode O S e System stopped status Out of Service Allows you to make changes to configuration Man e If you do not want to output the value and status from IN or if the value or status thus output is not preferable you can manually transmit the value to OUT Auto e Automatic system operation status 17 2 2 MIN GOOD Handling If there is no selectable input or if the number of selectable inputs is less than the value of MIN GOOD SELECTED becomes 0 A case where the number of valid INs is less than the value of MIN_GOOD SELECTION IN_1 23 p IN_2 34 5 p gt OUT certain retained IN_3 45 E value that was output previously IN_4 2 34 p gt IN_5 23 6 p gt gt SELECTED 0 IN_6 15 5 p gt IN_7 32 5 p gt IN_8 27 4 p gt 8 SELECT_TYPE Middle DISABLE 1 ON y a STATUS_OPTS DISABLE 2 ON p d 1 MIN GOOD 3 DISABLE_3 OFF p
240. pecifies the called party for communication and resources YVP110 has 29 or 33 VCRs with EE whose application can be changed except for the first VCR which is used for management YVP110 has VCRs of four types Server QUB VCR A Server responds to requests from a host This communication needs data exchange This type of communication is called QUB Queued User triggered Bidirectional VCR Source QUU VCR A Source multicasts alarms or trends to other devices This type of communication is called QUU Queued User triggered Unidirectional VCR Publisher BNU VCR A Publisher multicasts Al block output to another function block s This type of communication is called BNU Buffered Network triggered Unidirectional VCR lt 9 Configuration gt 9 4 Subscriber BNU VCR A Subscriber receives the data from another function block s This type of communication is called BNU Buffered Network triggered Unidirectional VCR A Server VCR is capable to respond to requests from a Client QUB VCR after the Client initiates connection to the Server successfully A Source VCR transmits data without established connection A Sink QUU VCR on another device can receive it if the Sink is configured so A Publisher VCR transmits data when LAS requests so An explicit connection is established from Subscriber BNU VCR s so that a Subscriber knows the format of published data Parameters must be changed together for each VCR because
241. pload to adjusting the data pointer to the leading position of the desired data and uploading it Signature data uploading procedure e Select action from menu Upload data Uploading data from SIGN_DATA_X and SIGN_DATA_Y Select upload database meaning select the database to be uploaded Change data pointer Exit lt Appendix 3 DD Methods and DD Menu gt A 28 12 Upload Signature Header Data This method guides you through uploading the header data of a signature measurement that has already been performed The header data contains the measurement condition settings the ambient temperature at the measurement the date of the measurement and so on Users can select a database to access the desired header data Signature header data uploading procedure e Selection of action from menu Upload header data Select upload database meaning select the database to be uploaded Exit A3 2 2 AO Block 1 Simulation Enable This is a method for causing the AO block to activate the simulation status When a block is in the simulation status you can apply simulated inputs to the block to let the block function with that input and check the actions of the function block application and alarm processing Since the simulation function is disabled to run normally in consideration of the nature of its functionality when using this method the simulation function needs to be rendered active by doing either of the followi
242. ponding process value used to execute the specified actions and the status of that value 8 8008 SP Setpoint of the block 9 8009 OUT Value and status of output 10 8010 PV_SCALE 0 100 Upper and lower scale limit values used for scaling of the input IN value 11 8011 OUT_SCALE 0 100 Upper and lower scale limit values used for scaling of the control output OUT value to the values in the engineering unit 12 8012 GRANT_ 0 Option to control access from the host computer and DENY local control panel to tuning and alarm parameters 13 8013 CONTROL_ 0x0000 Defines block actions depending on block status OPTS conditions 14 8014 STATUS_ 0x0000 Defines options for control actions of block OPTS 15 8015 IN 0 Controlled value input 16 8016 PV_FTIME 0 Time constant in seconds of the first order lag filter applied to IN 17 8017 BYPASS 1 Determines whether to bypass control computation 1 off do not bypass 2 on bypass 18 8018 CAS_IN 0 Cascade setpoint 19 8019 SP_RATE INF Rate of decrease limit for setpoint SP DN 20 8020 SP_RATE_UP INF Rate of increase limit for setpoint SP 21 8021 SP_HI_LIM 100 Upper limit for setpoint SP 22 8022 Ip LO LIM O Lower limit for setpoint SP 23 8023 GAIN 1 Proportional gain 100 proportional band 24 8024 RESET 10 Integration time seconds 25 8025 BAL_TIME 0 Unused 26 8026 RATE 0 Derivative time seconds 27 8027 BKCAL_IN 0 Readback
243. ponse time e Ifyou input a value in a small step of 5 or less and the response is slow increment or decrement the value for BOOST_VALUE 1 2 and X_BOOST_VALUE 1 2 by 1 respectively e f necessary increment the value for SERVO_ GAIN by 30 4 Checking hunting operation Input a value in a large step of approx 80 to ensure the hunting operation does not occur If the hunting operation does occur decrease the value for SERVO_GAIN to 2 3 or 1 2 of the originally entered value 3 Moderate response with a flat overshoot Characteristics Response is slow and a flat headed overshoot occurs Auto Tuning may fail or hunting or limit cycle may occur after Auto Tuning This waveform is typically observed if the friction of a valve or actuator is large FA0604 ai 1 In the case of the occurrence of a limit cycle e Ifyou increase the value for SERVO_RESET response slows down and a limit cycle can be prevented Verify a large step response of 30 or more and increment the value by 5 e f necessary decrease the value for SERVO_ GAIN to 2 3 or 1 2 of the originally entered value e Ifnecessary set the SERVO_DEADBAND Set a value in approximately the range of a limit cycle recommended upper limit is 2 e Ifthe limit cycle is not eliminated check the piping and feedback lever installation by referring to Section 20 4 2 Modifying overshoot e Increase the value for SERVO_RATE to reduce an e
244. pose For details see the software s User s Manual A caution Do not hook up the software download tool to a fieldbus segment while the plant is in operation as it may temporarily disturb the communication Always connect the tool before starting operation A NOTE The download tool can not execute downloading during other system connects to the system network management VFD of the device A4 4 Software Download Sequence The flowchart below outlines the software download procedure Although the time taken for the entire procedure varies depending on the size of the field bus device s software it generally take about 20 minutes where there is a one to one connection between a fieldbus device and download tool and longer when multiple field devices are connected to the fieldbus Start download tool y Select file s Select the software file s you want to download y Select device s Select the device s to which you want to download software y Carry out download Transmit the software to the field device s y Activate device s Activate the device s to start with new software FA0402 ai Figure A4 2 Flow of Software Download Procedure IM 21B04C01 01E caution Carrying out a software download leaves the PD tag node address and transducer block calibration parameters that are retained in the nonvolatile memory inside the target device
245. pressure gauge is applied the pressure gauge may possibly be damaged Supply pressure gauge optional optional A M selector switch F0310 ai Figure 3 10 A M Selector Switch IM 21B04C01 01E lt 4 Wiring and Piping gt 4 1 4 Wiring and Piping 4 1 General This chapter describes the air piping and electric wiring connections A WARNING e Be sure to cut off all inputs to the valve actuator and other accessories of the valve and actuator including the air supply and electric signal before making or modifying the piping and wiring connections e The process must be shut down or the control valve isolated from the process by using bypass valves or the like when making or modifying the piping and wiring connections e Always cap the unused wiring ports with blind plugs 4 2 Piping 4 2 1 Air Supply For stable operation of the YVP110 over a long term a clean and dry supply of air needs to be maintained Therefore be careful about the following 1 To prevent moisture oil and dust from being led into the YVP110 through pipes give careful consideration to the choice of the air supply system and supply air suction point as well as installation of the air supply header and air supply piping The desired supply air must e Be dry air whose dew point is at least 10 C lower than that of the ambient temperature e Be free from solid particles as a result of being passed through a 5 u
246. ps against the mechanical stopper fully open If it is necessary to adjust the zero point and span precisely to the rated stroke of the valve carry out travel calibration which is described later in this chapter after the Auto Tuning To carry out auto tuning write a value to the parameter AUTO_TUNE_EXEC according to the following procedure A caution For the first time after installing the YVP110 on the actuator or anytime after detaching the YVP110 and installing it again on the actuator be sure to perform step 1 below or 2 and 3 to carry out all adjustments Otherwise the adjustments cannot be carried out correctly From the next and any time thereafter perform only step 2 or 3 independently After detaching the YVP110 from the valve actuator and then reinstalling it to the actuator be sure to perform step 2 below 1 To sequentially adjust the zero point and span and then control parameter settings for the first time after installing the YVP110 ona valve actuator write 4 travel calibration at stop point and control parameter tuning 2 To leave the control parameter settings unchanged and only perform zero point and span adjustments such as after detaching the YVP110 from the valve actuator and restoring it write 2 travel calibration at stop point 3 Ke To leave zero point and span settings unchanged and only adjust control parameter settings such as after the hysteresis of the
247. ption 1 Succeeded Signature measuring has succeeded 2 Canceled Signature measuring has been canceled 10 Measure Actuator warning While Standard Actuator Signature is running or preprocessing of other Signature warning has occurred 20 Measure Extended Actuator warning While Extended High Resolution Actuator Signature is running warning has occurred 30 Measure Step Response Test warning While Step Response Test is running warning has occurred 40 Measure Positioner warning While Positioner Signature is running warning has occurred 100 Measure Actuator error During Signature preprocessing error has occurred 255 In operation Signature measuring is being executed IM 21B04C01 01E lt 20 Troubleshooting gt 20 1 20 Troubleshooting 20 1 What to Do First When a problem occurs check the following first Mounting of YVP110 Positioner e ls the linkage to the valve actuator correctly set up e Is the feedback lever correctly attached e Is the span of rotation angle of the position sensor against the valve stroke more than the minimum requirement e Has auto tuning been performed after installation Air Piping e Are the air pipes correctly connected Is there no leak of air e ls the air supply pressure high enough to drive the valve Is the A M selector on the positioner set to A automatic Wiring e Is the YVP110 positioner correctly connected to the fieldbus e Ar
248. put parameter and outputs the result ROut mode Means Remote Output mode In ROut mode the output of the function block is set to the value of the remote output parameter that is written by a host computer or others To prevent a sudden change in output the block s calculations are initialized when a change in mode occurs IM 21B04C01 01E lt 10 Actions of YVP110 During Operation gt 10 2 RCas mode Means Remote Cascade mode In RCas mode the function block performs the specified calculations based on the setpoint that is input from host computer or others via the remote cascade parameter and outputs the result Table 10 2 Examples of Block Mode Combinations and Operation Statuses Operation Statuses Al PID AO TB Transducer Initial O S O S setup valve setup when carrying out auto tuning travel calibration etc Modification of O S O S parameter settings in transducer block modification of control parameter settings etc Constant valve Auto Auto position control PID single loop Auto Auto Cas Auto control PID cascade loop Auto Primary PID Cas Auto control Auto Secondary PID Cas Table 10 2 shows examples of block mode combinations in a YVP110 however it does not show all patterns When a block changes mode or the data status of a signal changes for some reason the other blocks connected to that block identify the chan
249. quantity Table 19 2 YVP110 s Parameters Containing Integrated Operation Result Quantity Parameter Item upper integrated Description value lower threshold Total TOTAL_ Incremented by 1 at each number of CYCLE_ change in the direction of times of COUNT the valve action changes The dead band can in direction CYCLE_ be set in CYCLE_ ofvalve COUNT_LIM DEADBAND actions Total travel TOTAL Total travel distance TRAVEL of the stem position regardless of the direction TRAVEL_LIM of the travel represented as a percentage of the valve position span full stroke The dead band can be set in CYCLE _ DEADBAND Total TOTAL_ Integrated time periods close time CLOSE_TIME when the valve position is hours equal to or less than the CLOSE_TIME_ threshold set in OPEN LIM CLOSE_THRESHOLD Total TOTAL_OPEN_ Integrated time periods open time TIME when the valve position is hours larger than the threshold OPEN_TIME_ set in OPEN_CLOSE_ SN THRESHOLD Total near TOTAL_NEAR_ Integrated time periods close time CLOSE_TIM when the valve position is hours between a shutoff and the NEAR_ threshold set in NEAR_ CLOSE_TIME_ c_OSE_THRESHOLD SR Useful to predict deterioration of valve body Total SERVO_ Indicates the total number number WARN_ of times a drift warning of times COUNT occurred regarding the of servo output current to the I P output drift module warning IM 21B04C01 01E
250. r when the actual repeat cycle exceeds 500 000 times or after the control relay has been in use for 6 years lt 6 Maintenance gt 6 2 6 3 2 Replacing the Screen Filters When the screen filters installed deep in the air supply port and output pneumatic signal port become clogged replace them with new filters using a tool with pointed tips such as a set of tweezers Filter Only for Double Acting Type If the air supply port at the back side is used change the filter in that port Y Filter d SS EN Figure 6 4 Replacing the Screen Filters F0604 ai 6 3 3 Replacing the Internal Air Filter An air filter is provided at the opening to the internal pneumatic circuits Follow the procedure below to replace it 1 Decrease the air supply pressure to zero 2 Remove the relay assembly in reference with Section 6 3 1 3 Remove the pneumatic circuit holding plate and gasket two gaskets for Double Acting Type 4 Remove the air filter and O ring 5 Set the new filter in place 6 Perform steps 3 then 2 to restore the YVP110 to its original state F0605 ai Figure 6 5 Replacing the Internal Air Filter IM 21B04C01 01E lt 6 Maintenance gt 6 3 6 3 4 Tuning the Pressure Balance of Control Relay When you use a double acting cylinder actuator adjust the pressure balance of the control relay if necessary The optimal point of pressure balance slightly differs depending on the
251. r ON and measure the insulation resistance The duration of the applied voltage must be the period during which 100 MO or more is confirmed or 20 MQ if the unit is equipped with a built in arrester 4 Upon completion of the test remove the insulation resistance meter connect a 100 KQ resistor between the transition wiring and allow the electricity to discharge Do not touch the terminal with your bare hands while the electricity is discharging for more than one second E Withstand voltage test procedure Testing between the input terminals and the grounding terminal 1 Lay the transition wiring between the terminal and the terminal and connect the withstand voltage tester with the power turned OFF between the transition wiring and the grounding terminal Connect the grounding side of the withstand voltage tester to the grounding terminal 2 After setting the current limit value of the withstand voltage tester to 10 mA turn the power ON and gradually increase the impressed voltage from 0 V to the specified value 3 The voltage at the specified value must remain for a duration of one minute 4 Upon completion of the test carefully reduce the voltage so that no voltage surge occurs 1 7 Notes for Saftey A caution When air is supplied to a valve do not touch the moving part a stem of the valve as it may suddently move A caution e While A M selection switch is set to manual side M the pressure se
252. r the YVP110 twelve DD methods for the transducer block two for the AO block and one for the OS block are provided The following describes these methods for each block model A3 2 1 Transducer Block 1 Setup Wizard This method guides you through each step of the most common setup procedure that always needs to be performed after installing the YVP110 ona valve For the details of the setup and pertaining parameters see Chapter 5 Setup Setup procedure e AO TB block mode check e ACT_FAIL_ACTION setting e VALVE_TYPE setting e Stop position search and automatic tuning e Travel calibration 0 calibration Span calibration 50 calibration e Operational parameter setting 2 Auto Tuning Wizard This method guides you through each step to search for the valve s mechanical stop positions and carry out auto tuning of control parameters For details see Section 5 3 Carrying out Auto Tuning Auto tuning procedure e AO TB block mode check e Auto tuning execution AUTO_TUNE_EXEC 3 Search Stop Points This method guides you through each step to search for the valve s mechanical stop positions both on the closed and open sides by maximizing and minimizing the output pressure to the positioner Setup procedure e AO TB block mode check e Auto tuning execution AUTO_TUNE_EXEC Standard Without timeout Step by step Exit 4 Control Parameter Tuning This method helps perform control parameter specific tuni
253. rack in LO or IMan x 4 SP Track retained target x 5 Direct Acting x 6 Reserved 7 Track Enable x D Track in Manual x 9 Use PV for BKCAL_OUT x 10 ActonIR 11 Use BKCAL_OUT with IN_1 12 Obey SP limits if Cas or RCas x 13 No OUT limits in Manual x 14 Reserved 15 Reserved IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 2 Link Master Functions gt A 19 Appendix 2 Link Master Functions A2 1 Link Active Scheduler Alink active scheduler LAS is a deterministic centralized bus scheduler that can control communications on an H1 fieldbus segment There is only one LAS on an H1 fieldbus segment AYVP supports the following LAS functions e PN transmission Identifies a fieldbus device newly connected to the same fieldbus segment PN is short for Probe Node e PT transmission Passes a token governing the right to transmit to a fieldbus device on the same segment PT is short for Pass Token e CD transmission Carry out a scheduled transmission to a fieldbus device on the same segment CD is short for Compel Data e Time synchronization Periodically transmits the time data to all fieldbus devices on the segment and returns the time data in response to a request from a device e Live list equalization Sends the live list data to link masters on the same segment e LAS transfer Transfers the right to be the LAS on the segment to another link master A2 2 Link Master Alink master LM is any device containing a link ac
254. ration conditions and is composed of the actual mode target mode permitted modes and normal mode 2006 BLOCK_ERR Indicates the error statuses related to the block itself 2007 UPDATE_EVT Shows the contents of an update event upon occurrence 2008 BLOCK_ALM Universal parameter indicating the hardware and software error statuses related to the block itself IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 1 Function Block Parameters gt Relative Default z gi e index Index Parameter Name factory setting Write Description Setting range 9 2009 TRANSDUCER_ 1 10 Index to the text describing the transducer DIRECTORY contained in the YVP110 positioner 10 2010 TRANSDUCER Transducer type TYPE 11 2011 XD_ERROR Stores the error prioritized at the highest level from among the errors that are currently occurring in the transducer block 12 2012 CORRECTION_ Stores the number of data collection and the index DIRCTORY number to be started with 13 2013 FINAL_VALUE Stores the valve control level and status written by the AO block 14 2014 FINAL_VALUE_ 10 110 Defines the upper and lower range limits of RANGE FINAL_VALUE and the unit code and decimal point position for value indication of FINAL VALUE 15 2015 FINAL_VALUE_ If the value of FINAL_VALUE is greater than the CUTOFF_HI value set in this parameter the YVP110 moves
255. reater than SP_HI_LIM high limit or less than SP_LO_LIM low limit the internal SP is set to the respective limits When the target mode is Auto or Man and when SP PV tracking is not specified at the same time the rate of change in the setpoint is also limited by the values of SP_RATE_UP and SP_RATE_DN IM 21B04C01 01E 16 2 lt 16 PID Function Block gt 16 5 PID Computation For PID control the PID block ina YVP110 employs the PV proportional and PV derivative type PID control algorithm referred to as the I PD control algorithm for Auto and RCas mode This algorithm mensures control stability against sudden changes in the setpoint such as when the user enters a new setpoint value At the same time the I PD algorithm ensures excellent controllability by performing proportional integral and derivative control actions in response to changes of characteristics in the controlled process changes in load and occurrences of disturbances For Cas mode PV derivative type PID control algorithm referred to as the PI D control algorithm is employed in order to obtain better performance against the changes in the setpoint The algorithm is automatically changed by the block according to the mode A basic form of each algorithm is expressed in the equation below In Auto RCas mode aMVn k APVn ST PVn SPn T2 A APVn A In Cas mode E E AT 7 Td AMVn K A PVn SPn PVn SPn Z A APVn Where AMVn
256. rsal parameter storing the description of the tag 3 1003 STRATEGY 1 Universal parameter used by an upper level system to classify the function blocks 4 1004 ALERT_KEY 1 Universal parameter used as a key to identify the point from which an alert is issued normally used by an upper level system to select alerts to provide to a particular operator who covers a specific area of the plant 5 1005 MODE_BLK O S Auto Universal parameter that indicates the block operation conditions and is composed of actual mode target mode permitted modes and normal mode 6 1006 BLOCK_ERR Universal parameter indicating the hardware and software error statuses related to the block itself 7 1007 RS_STATE Indicates the statuses of resource in the YVP110 8 1008 TEST_RW Null Parameter used to test read and write access to the YVP110 9 1009 DD_RESOURCE Null Name of the device description DD containing the information of this resource block 10 1010 MANUFAC_ID 0x00594543 Manufacturer ID 5850435 0x594543 is assigned to Yokogawa Electric Corporation 11 1011 DEV_TYPE ID number of device 1 or 7 EE is assigned to the YVP110 12 1012 DEV_REV Revision number of the YVP110 13 1013 DD_REV Revision number of the device description DD applied to this YVP110 14 1014 GRANT_DENY 0 Option to control access from the host computer and local control panel to tuning and alarm parameters 15 1015 HARD_TYPE
257. ry Note 2 Electrical Data e Exic Ui 32 V Ci 3 52 nF Li 0 pH e Ex nA 32 VDC MAX Note 3 For the installation of this positioner once a particular declared type of protection is selected the other type of protection cannot be used The installation must be in accordance with the description about type of protection in this instruction manual Note 4 In order to avoid confusion unnecessary marking is crossed out on the label other than the selected type of protection when positioner is installed Note 5 Installation Instructions e Cable glands adapters and or blanking elements shall be of Ex n EX e or Ex d and shall be installed so as to maintain the specified degree of protection IP Code of the equipment e To maintain the degree of protection IP65 according to IEC 60529 special care must be taken to avoid water Note 6 Maintenance and Repair e The instrument modification or parts replacement by other than authorized representative of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited and will void ATEX Ex ic and Ex nA IM 21B04C01 01E Note 7 Ex ic Installation e All wiring shall comply with local installation requirements refer to the installation diagram Installation Diagram Hazardous Area Non hazardous Area Valve Positioner 0 O 6 LO F0108 ai Electrical Data Ui 32 V Ci 3 52 nF Li 0 pH Note 8 Ex ic Specific Conditions of
258. s the field device name IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 5 Position Adjustment of Feedback Lever gt A 37 Appendix 5 Position Adjustment of Feedback Lever For Single Acting Type it is possible to adjust the position of feedback lever while air is being supplied to the actuator A WARNING Procedures 1 through 4 require supplying air to the actuator Piping must be carried out by following the instructions shown in Chapter 4 Wiring and Piping 1 Using a flat head screwdriver turn the A M selector switch on the YVP110 clockwise to change the selector position to M manual Be sure to turn the switch until it stops see also Section 3 2 3 A M Switching A WARNING EE Changing the A M selector switch position to M manual causes air at the pressure setting of the pressure regulator for air supply to be supplied to the valve actuator regardless of the input signal Therefore prior to switching to manual mode make sure that doing so will neither cause an injury nor affect the process 2 Next supply air to the valve actuator Doing so causes the valve stem to move be extremely careful about safety Adjust the pressure regulator to set the stroke of the stem to 50 WARNING Do not supply air at a pressure exceeding the maximum rated air supply pressure of the actuator or the YVP110 400 kPa Doing so may result in a high risk of damage to the equipment or lead to an accident
259. s ignition sources due to impact and friction sparks are excluded Once used as apparatus of equipment category 1D in type of protection Ex tD the valve positioner is no longer suitable as apparatus of equipment category 1G or 1D in type of protection Ex ia or Ex iaD Note 6 Installation Instructions When used in a potentially explosive atmosphere requiring the use of apparatus of equipment category 1D suitable certified cable entry devices or certified blanking elements with a degree of ingress protection of at least IP6X according to EN 60529 shall be used and correctly installed Note 7 Installation When used in potentially explosive atmosphere for category 1D need not use safety barrier IM 21B04C01 01E lt 1 Notes on Handling gt 1 8 E FISCO Model Non hazardous Hazardous Locations Locations Supply Unit l Terminator FISCO Model FISCO Model Exi U l OECO l F I y y y Terminator Hand held Data Terminal No1 Field Instruments Passive F0106 ai LS fieldbus system complying with FISCO The criterion for such interconnection is that the voltage Ui the current li and the power Pi which intrinsically safe apparatus can receive must be equal or greater than the voltage Uo the current lo and the power Po which can be provided by the associated apparatus supply unit In addition the maximum unprot
260. s see Chapter 5 A caution Precautions for ATEX flameproof type and type nA instruments e Flameproof type and type nA instrumets must be as a rule removed to a non hazardous area for maintenance and be disassembled and reassembled to the original state e On the flameproof type and type nA instruments the terminal cover is locked by an Allen head bolt shrouding bolt When a shrouding bolt is driven clockwise by an Allen wrench it is going in and cover lock is released and then the cover can be opened When a cover is closed it should be locked by a shrouding bolt without fail Tighten the shrouding bolt to a torque of 0 7 N m Shrouding Bolt o ial SE Sr F0601 ai Figure 6 1 Shrouding Bolts 6 2 Periodic Inspections To maintain problem free plant operation periodic inspections are essential At each periodic inspection be especially careful when ensuring that e No external damage can be seen e No leakage from the YVP110 or the piping around it can be detected e No build up in the drain or dust or oil adhering to the air supply line has occurred 6 2 1 Cleaning the Fixed Nozzle The fixed nozzle of the YVP110 is attached to the control relay s surface that engages the YVP110 s main structure see Figure 6 2 Detach the control relay from the main structure of YVP110 by following the instruction shown in 6 3 1 Thread a wire with a 0 25 mm diameter through th
261. s See ec cece scene nasien saan dice gines draei chen yanns causes shaxssdecscsanenseensia 18 2 18 2 1 Main IMPULS sinana a 18 2 18 2 2 Auxillary DPU sessio ned touniGeetodntediten 18 2 18 2 3 INPUT OPTS eege el eileen eege 18 3 18 2 4 Relationship between the Main Inputs and PV esceeee 18 3 18 3 Computation SOCOM siiaitiscecssccececctecics lacececsentacectcaceccnsceracnce lt niecaacetncnescaseceuacns 18 3 18 3 1 elle Tue Tee Ee E 18 3 18 3 2 Compensated Values secre a a AEE 18 4 18 3 3 Average Calculation aseessesseeesresreereerssnesnernainnrneraarnaenannennannainnnnna 18 4 18 4 OUTPUT d sisirain sansan nananana rreo Aa E Eae NAE nne Na Paire naaran 18 4 18 4 1 Mode Handling RE 18 4 18 4 2 Status Handling AA 18 5 Ate le E 19 1 19 1 KMelew esst casi cicescaeads SEENEN E 19 1 19 2 INtEGFAatlOM FUNCTIONS egeres gereest ee 19 1 19 3 Signature Measurement FUNCTIONS cecssesseeeseeseeeseesseenenenseeneeeneeesenenenes 19 2 19 3 1 Signature Measurement Procedure aasssssseereenssrereerernssrerreennnns 19 2 19 3 2 Signatures and Relevant Parameters A 19 3 19 3 3 Signature Measuring Result 19 4 Troubleshooting DE 20 1 20 1 What to DO Firs tics csccicscvecisccccsseccsiescccavesavevenesecesevestveaanecenssevs ssereaxtcexsserssseecsnarexe 20 1 20 2 Troubleshooting COMMUNICATIONS eecceeseeneeeneeeneenenenenenenenenenenenenenenes 20 1 20 3 Troubleshooting Function Block Parameters ccs ccsec
262. seeeeseeeeseeeesaeeeeeeeeeseeenseees A 30 Specifications s sena e a aa a e a aa Aae a ee EEEa aeia A 30 Preparations for Software Downloading s ssessessensunrenrunrunrunrunnnnnenrnnnnne A 30 Software Download Sequence 2 cc cceseeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeesenenseeeeeaes A 30 Download File iisaisiisccsssesiasescsecccssavescve sence svasevssevecesstextes EEEEEESEEEECSC amaian iaiia A 31 Steps after Activating a Field Device cecceessesseeseeesseeseeseeeeeeeseeeeeenneees A 31 Uer dln D A 32 Resource Block s Parameters Relating to Software Download see A 32 System Network Management VFD Parameters Relating to Software DOW MOG WE A 34 Comments on System Network Management VFD Parameters Relating to Software Download cccseceeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeenseeeeseeeesaeeeneeeeeseeeesaeeeseneeeaes A 35 Position Adjustment of Feedback Lever cssseeceeeeee A 37 IM 21B04C01 vi 01E Appendix 6 Manual Tuning Guideline cccseceeseeeeseeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeees A 38 A6 1 General cicec citi vce sti ccte case ccte ante cnteetecceeentecuee cute catecutecutecutecueecatecueecstecatecatecate A 38 A6 2 Control Parameter TUNING ProCeCure cseceeceereeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeeeeeteeneees A 38 A6 3 Examples of Tuning Control Parameters csecseseeseeeseeseenseesseeeseeneees A 40 Ap A Description of Control Parameters c cccecceeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees A 41 Inst
263. setting YVP110 always acts identical upon power off and cut off of the air supply When a power failure or serious hardware damage is detected the YVP110 cuts the current signal being fed to the I P module to zero moving the valve to the safe side The action of the YVP110 upon occurrence of a communication error can be predefined by AO block s parameters see Section 13 3 1 Fault State IM 21B04C01 01E lt 5 Setup gt 5 2 2 Selecting the Actuator Type For the parameter VALVE_TYPE set the value 1 or 2 in accordance with the actuator type 1 linear motion actuator 2 rotary motion actuator Choosing the linear motion type automatically corrects a linearity error that is inherently caused between the linearly acting actuator and the rotating displacement sensor inside the YVP110 actuator 5 3 Carrying out Tuning A caution This function strokes the valve over its full range Do not execute while valve is controlling the process Keep away from the movable parts to avoid injury After selecting the acting direction of the valve and the actuator type carry out auto tuning and manual tuning if necessary The auto tuning program automatically e Adjusts the zero point and span e Adjusts the parameter settings for controlling the valve A IMPORTANT Auto Tuning in YVP 110 sets the 0 point at the position where the valve is fully closed and 100 point at the position where the valve stem sto
264. sseeeeseeeeeseeeeeee 20 1 20 4 Troubleshooting Valve Control ccscsscseesseeseeeseeseeeneneseeesenesenesenesenesenenenes 20 2 20 5 Troubleshooting Auto TUNING cceecsecesseeseeeseenseeseeeseeeseeesseeseeeseeeneneneneneees 20 3 20 6 Troubleshooting Position Pressure and Temperature Gensors 20 3 IM 21B04C01 01E Appendix 1 A1 1 A1 2 A1 3 A1 4 A1 5 A1 6 A1 7 A1 8 A1 9 A1 10 A1 11 Appendix 2 A2 1 A2 2 A2 3 A2 4 A2 5 A2 6 Appendix 3 A3 1 A3 2 Appendix 4 A4 1 A4 2 A4 3 A4 4 A4 5 A4 6 A4 7 A4 8 A4 9 A4 10 Appendix 5 Function Block Parameters cccsssseceeesseeeeeeseeeeeeesseeneees A 1 Parameters of Resource BIOCK c ccssescseeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseneneeeeeeseeeeseeeneeeees A 1 Parameters of Transducer BIOCK cceeccesseeeeseeeeseceeeeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeesnenes A 3 Parameters Of AO BIOCK c cceseeeseeeeseneeseneeeeeeeeseeeeseeeesaeeneaeeeeseeeesenensaeeees A 8 Parameters f DI BlOGK 3 icisciisieccsaeiscncecacecssacestseecsatncsdacssacecasncesstecetauecasndecanes A 10 Parameters Of OS Block c csseceeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeesaeeeneeenseeseseeeneanenes A 11 Parameters of PID Block Optional ccsecseesesseeseeeseeeseesseesseesseesseeneees A 12 Parameters of IS BlOGK 5 0i5ciisciccsscctacecdcaceccsacectceedsatecaticesdcecasscesctbcasasectsntecandes A 14 Parameters Of AR Block iesicccsscvsccnesetecenactvs sovecenarestaevascessanerexti
265. st are explained in the rest of this material AA IMPORTANT Connecting a Fieldbus configuration tool to a loop with its existing host may cause communication data scrambles resulting in a functional disorder or a system failure IMPORTANT Do not turn off the power immediately after setting If the power is turned off within 40 seconds after setting is made the modified parameters are not saved and the settings return to the original values 9 1 Network Design Select the devices to be connected to the Fieldbus network Refer to 8 4 System Configuration for selection of the devices First check the capacity of the power supply The power supply capacity must be greater than the sum of the maximum current consumed by all devices to be connected to Fieldbus The maximum current consumed power supply voltage 9 V to 32 V for YVP110 is 17 mA The cable must have the spur in a minimum length with terminators installed at both ends of the trunk 9 2 Network Definition Before connection of devices with Fieldbus define the Fieldbus network Allocate PD Tag and node addresses to all devices excluding such passive devices as terminators The PD Tag is the same as the conventional one used for the device Up to 32 alphanumeric characters may be used for definition Use a hyphen as a delimiter as required The node address is used to specify devices for communication purposes Because data is too long for a PD Tag
266. structure and components used may not lead to the revision of this manual unless such changes affect the function and performance of the instrument e Some of the diagrams in this instruction manual are partially omitted described in writing or simplified for ease of explanation The drawings contained in the instruction manual may have a position or characters upper lower case that differ slightly from the what are actually seen to an extent that does not hinder the understanding of functions or monitoring of operation Symbols used in this manual A WARNING Contains precautions to protect against the chance of explosion or electric shock which if not observed could lead to death or serious injury A caution Contains precautions to protect against danger which if not observed could lead to personal injury or damage to the instrument IMPORTANT Contains precautions to be observed to protect against adverse conditions that may lead to damage to the instrument or a system failure A NOTE Contains precautions to be observed with regard to understanding operation and functions m For Safe Use of Product For the protection and safety of the operator and the instrument or the system including the instrument please be sure to follow the instructions on safety described in this manual when handling this instrument In case the instrument is handled in contradiction to these instructions Yoko
267. t 2 Save as a Factory data or 3 Save as record data in SIGN_ DATA_SAVE and execute saving The standard signature previously saved is then overwritten It is recommended to save the signature data taken at the installation as a Factory data and that of the latest measurement as a Record data 2 Extended Actuator Signature 1 The extended actuator signature is the input to position characteristics of the valve measured at arbitrary positions within the full stroke of the valve As the positions of measuring 50 points can be specified for each direction of the valve actions totaling 100 points e The following can be set in a setting parameter EXT_ACT_SIGN_SET Lower Setpoint point to start the measurement Upper Setpoint point to finish the measurement Recommended Scan Time seconds Scan Time seconds Deviation Margin Sampling Rate milliseconds not used in this function e Performing measurement sets the pressure data in SIGN_DATA_X and the position data in SIGN_DATA_Y 3 High Resolution Actuator Signature 1 The high resolution actuator signature is the input to position characteristics of the valve measured with high resolution while sampling data at the specified time rate Up to 100 data values can be stored in the memory of the YVP100 After this limit is reached during measurement the stored data will be overwritten from the leading data in order Using ValveNavi
268. t Not writable If SELECT_TYPE is MIDDLE There is an odd multiple number of valid inputs The value of the input positioned in the middle of the values of odd multiple valid inputs is output Not writable If SELECT_TYPE is AVERAGE The value obtained by dividing the added value of the values of valid inputs by the number of these inputs is output Not writable If SELECT_TYPE is Latched Good The value of a valid input with the smallest input number is output e Not writable Table 17 4 Condition and Mode Condition Listed in priority sequence Mode If the Actual is in O S O S If the Uncertain if Man mode bit in STATUS_OPTS is set and the Actual is in Man Man If the Uncertain if Man mode bit in STATUS_ OPTS is not set and the Actual is in Man Man Values specified by MIN_Good gt the number of valid inputs Auto If there is no valid input Auto If the input status is bad or uncertain when the value of OP_SELECT is anything other than 0 Auto with the exception of the case where the Uncertain as good bit in STATUS_OPTS is set If the value of OP_SELECT is greater than 8 which is the maximum number of inputs Auto If OP_SELECT has selected IN whose status is bad or uncertain Auto See the item Transition of Sub status in the Case Where OP_SELECT is Selected If the value is out of the SELECT_TYPE setting range when the value
269. t in the regulator for air supply will be directly output to the actuator regardless of the control signal Before changing the mode from auto to manual check and confirm thoroughly that there will be no effect which may cause a danger in process or personal injury by changing the mode e Do not change the mode by using auto manual switch during the operation If the mode is changed from auto to manual or manual to auto the valve stem will happnen to move to the position which is different from the control signal the input signal to the positioner and thus dangerous e As soon as the manual operation is finished make it sure to change the mode to auto by moving the A M selection switch to Auto A side IM 21B04C01 01E 1 8 EMC Conformity Standards EN61326 1 Class A Table 2 For use in industrial locations A caution This instrument is a Class A product and it is designed for use in the industrial environment Please use this instrument in the industrial environment only 1 9 Installation of Explosion Protected Type Positioner A caution To preserve the safety of explosionproof equipment requires great care during mounting wiring and piping Safety requirements also place restrictions on maintenance and repair activities Please read the following section very carefully 1 9 1 FM Certification A FM Intrinsically Safe Type Cautions for FM Intrinsically safe type Following cotents refer Doc No IF
270. t them to the LM devices While the parameters in Table 9 2 are to be set the worst case value of all the devices to be connected to the same Fieldbus must be used Refer to the specification of each device for details Table 9 2 lists YVP110 specification values Table 9 2 Operation Parameter Values of the YVP110 to be Set to LM Devices Symbol Parameters V ST Slot Time Description and Settings Indicates the time necessary for immediate reply of the device Unit of time is in octets 256 us Set maximum specification for all devices For YVP seta value of 4 or greater V MID Minimum Minimum value of Inter PDU communication data Delay intervals Unit of time is in octets 256 us Set the maximum specification for all devices For YVP set a value of 4 or greater V MRD Maximum The worst case time elapsed Reply Delay until a reply is recorded The unit is Slottime set the value so that V MRD 3V ST is the maximum value of the specification for all devices For YVP the setting must be a value of 12 or greater 9 3 Definition of Combining Function Blocks The input output parameters for function blocks are combined Practically setting is written to the YVP110 link object with reference to Block setting in Section 9 6 for details For the YVP110 in order to minimize the delay in data transfer between Transducer block and AO function block transducer block are des
271. t to zero when the power is turned off or measurement of a new signature is performed 100 2100 SIGN_DATA_SAVE 1 Saves the measurements of the standard actuator signature to non volatile memory as record data 1 off 101 2101 SIGN_UPLOAD_ 1 Parameter used to specify the measured data to DATABASE be uploaded Set this parameter and the related parameters will be read 102 2102 SIGN_UPLOAD_ 0 Pointer that indicates the leading position of the POINTER data to be uploaded from SIGN_DATA_X or SIGN_DATA_Y and used when there are 20 or more data values measured 103 2103 SIGN_DATA_X 0 Parameter used to upload the measured signature data input data IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 1 Function Block Parameters gt A 8 Relative Default z ogi index Index Parameter Name factory setting Write Description Setting range 104 2104 SIGN_DATA_Y 0 Parameter used to upload the measured signature data output data 105 2105 SIGN_MEAS_DATE 01 01 00 Parameter used to upload the date and time of 00 00 00 000 signature measurement 106 2106 SIGN_HEADER_ inf Parameter used to upload the ambient DATA temperature and settings at signature measurement 107 2107 STD_ACT_SIGN_ 180 180 50 Settings of the standard actuator signature SET 108 2108 EXT_ACT_SIGN_ 0 100 180 180 Settings of the extended actuator signature and SET 50 200 high resolu
272. ta eyxerpidia Aerrovpyias Tov TpotdvTwv pe ATEX Ex StaTibevtat ota AyyAuKa Teptouus kar TohAusg Ye nepintoon Tov xperaleote o nyies Ower pe Ex OTNV TOTLKY YAWTTR TAPAKAAOVLE ETLKOLVOV OTE pE TO TyoveotEpo ypageto THs Yokogawa 1 avtiTpoTwTo THs 06 V etky n vody na obsluhu pre pr stroje s ATEX Ex s k dispoz cii v jazyku anglickom nemeckom a franc zskom V pr pade potreby n vodu pre Ex pr stroje vo Va om n rodnom jazyku skontaktujte pros m miestnu kancel riu firmy Yokogawa V echny u ivatelsk p ru ky pro v robky na n se vztahuje nev bu n schv len ATEX Ex jsou dostupn v angli tin n m in a francouz tin Po adujete li pokyny t kaj c se v robk s nev bu n m schv len m ve va em lok ln m jazyku kancel Yokogawa Visos gamini ATEX Ex kategorijos Eksploatavimo instrukcijos teikiami angl vokie i ir pranc z kalbomis Nor dami gauti prietais Ex dokumentacij kitomis kalbomis susisiekite su artimiausiu bendrov s Yokogawa biuru arba atstovu Visas ATEX Ex kategorijas izstradajumu Lieto anas instrukcijas tiek piegadatas ang u vacu un fran u valod s Ja v laties sa emt Ex ieri u dokumentaciju cit valoda Jums ir jasazinas ar firmas Jokogava Yokogawa tuvako ofisu vai parstavi K ik ATEX Ex toodete kasutamisjuhendid on esitatud inglise saksa ja prantsuse keeles Ex seadmete muukeelse dokumentatsiooni saa
273. tatus of output 1 9 14009 OUT_2 Indicates the value and status of output 2 10 14010 OUT_1_ RANGE Defines the range of OUT_1 output 1 11 14011 OUT_2 RANGE Defines the range of OUT_2 output 2 12 14012 GRANT_DENY Option to control access from the host computer and local control panel to tuning and alarm parameters 13 14013 STATUS_OPTS Defines block actions depending on block status conditions 14 14014 CAS_IN Cascade input 15 14015 BKCAL_OUT Value returned to BLCAL_IN of the upstream block used by the upstream block to prevent reset windup and perform bumpless transfer to closed loop control 16 14016 IN ARRAY 0 0 0 0 O S Settings used to convert SP to OUT_1 17 14017 OUT_ARRAY 0 0 0 0 O S Settings used to convert SP to OUT 2 18 14018 LOCKVAL 2 Defines the value of OUT_1 outside the set endpoints of operation characteristic 2 Lock 19 14019 BKCAL_IN_1 Read back value of OUT_1 returned from the downstream block 20 14020 BKCAL_IN_2 Read back value of OUT_2 returned from the downstream block 21 14021 BAL TIME 0 Defines the balancing time After the cascade connection to one downstream block has already been established the cascade connection to the other downstream block will be established over the time period defined by this parameter 22 14022 HYSTVAL 0 Defines the hysteresis for LOCKVAL When it is set to No Lock 23 14023 UPDATE_EVT Shows the contents of an update event a change to th
274. te the revision level of the settings and used to see whether there is a change in parameter settings 2 5002 TAG_DESC Universal parameter storing the description of the tag 3 5003 STRATEGY Universal parameter used by an upper level system to classify the function blocks 4 5004 ALERT_KEY 1 Universal parameter used as a key to identify the point from which an alert is issued normally used by an upper level system to select alerts to provide to a particular operator who covers a specific area of the plant 5 5005 MODE_BLK O S Universal parameter that indicates the block operation conditions and is composed of actual mode target mode permitted modes and normal mode 6 5006 BLOCK_ERR Indicates the error statuses related to the block itself 7 5007 PV Indicates the primary analog value or the corresponding process value used to execute the specified actions and the status of that value IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 1 Function Block Parameters gt A 9 Relative Default z ar index Index Parameter Name factory setting Write Description 8 5008 SP Indicates the setpoint for the block 5009 OUT Indicates the output value and its status 10 5010 SIMULATE Used to simulate the output from the Transducer block allows the user to set the value and status input from the specified channel 11 5011 PV_SCALE
275. ters ae Function block execution schedule Function Block VFD AR Function S IS Function D o e OS Function Ke Ka 2 S PID Function KE OH oO OI o e E 2 2 DI Function 5 lS DI Function 2 E Transducer AO Function 5 5 block block O A pat Block tag Block tag 2 eng Parameters raramen E B ES OUT 6 2 amp Resource block S e O Block tag 5 Parameters z Q F0801 ai Figure 8 1 Logical Structure of Each Block Setting of various parameters node addresses and PD Tags shown in Figure 8 1 is required before starting operation 8 4 System Configuration The following instruments are required for use with Fieldbus devices IM 21B04C01 01E lt 8 About Fieldbus gt 8 2 e Power supply Fieldbus requires a dedicated power supply It is recommended that current capacity be well over the total value of the maximum current consumed by all devices including the host Conventional DC current cannot be used as is e Terminator Fieldbus requires two terminators Refer to the supplier for details of terminators that are attached to the host e Field devices Connect the field devices necessary for instrumentation YVP110 has passed the interoperability test conducted by The Fieldbus Foundation In order to properly start Fieldbus it is recommended that the devices used satisfy the requir
276. the resource block are set on Table 11 2 to 11 4 show the codes and indication corresponding to the individual bits in DEVICE_STATUS_1 to _3 as well as the meanings represented Table 11 2 DEVICE_STATUS_1 without EE Indication 11 2 Alarm Processing Hexadecimal when Device Meaning Indication Description is The resource block generates a block alarm in the installed following cases 0x80000000 Ge 0x40000000 e An error represented by a bit in BLOCK 0x20000000 ERROR shown in the table below has 0x10000000 occurred identified as a Block alarm 0x08000000 e Astatic parameter has been written identified 0x04000000 as an update event 0x92000900 e The value of a write locked parameter has been 9x01000009 SS SC 0x00800000 Sim enable The SIM ENABLE switch on the modified identified as Write alarm Jmpr On amplifier is set to ON P 0x00400000 RB in O S The Resource block is in O S Table 11 1 BLOCK_ERROR in Resource Block l j e mode mode Bit Name of Error Cause 0x00200000 Represented 0x00100000 3 Simulate Active SIMULATE is active 0x00080000 EEPROM EEPROM failure 5 Device Fail Safe Set Fail safe function is set Failure 10 Lost Static Data 0x00040000 11 Lost NV Data 0x00020000 13 Device Needs Needs servicing urgently 0x000 10900 Maintenance Now 0x00008000 Link Obj 1 17 The VCR 1 to which link object 1 15 Out of
277. the host uses the node address in place of the PD Tag for communication A range of 20 to 247 or hexadecimal 0x14 to OxF7 can be set Generally the device LM device with bus control function Link Master function is allocated from a smaller address number 20 side and other devices BASIC device without bus control function allocated from a larger address number 247 side respectively IM 21B04C01 01E lt 9 Configuration gt 9 2 Table 9 1 Parameters for Setting Address Range Symbol Parameters Description V FUN First Unpolled Indicates the address Node next to the address range used for the host or other LM device V NUN Number of consecutive Unpolled Node Unused address range The devices within the address range written as Unused in Figure 9 1 cannot be used on a Fieldbus For other address ranges the range is periodically checked to identify when a new device is mounted Care must be taken not to allow the address range to become wider which can lead to exhaustive consumption of Fieldbus communication performance 0x00 Not used Ox0F 0x10 Bridge device 0x13 0x14 LM device V FUN Unused V NUN V FUN 1V NUN BASIC device OxF7 OxF8 Default address OxFB OxFC Portable device address OxFF F0901 ai Figure 9 1 Available Range of Node Addresses To ensure stable operation of Fieldbus determine the operation parameters and se
278. the target mode the AO block automatically enters the Man or LO mode when a specified condition is met such as when another function block enters a specific status depending on the parameter settings 13 3 Forward Path The following describes the signal input from the upstream block to the AO block and then passed to the transducer block The upstream block is typically the PID controller block and the control signal from the PID block is input as the source of computing the setpoint SP for the AO block The path for computing the SP differs depending on the mode In Cas mode CAS _IN is used for SP In RCas mode RCAS_IN is used for SP Ifthe value of CAS_IN or RCAS_IN whichever is used is greater than SP_HI_LIM high limit or less than SP_LO_LIM low limit the internal SP is set to the respective limits Also if the rate of change in the value of CAS_IN or RCAS_IN whichever is used is greater than SP_RATE_UP rate of increase limit in the increasing direction or than SP_RATE_ DN rate of decrease limit in the decreasing direction the change in internal SP is limited by the corresponding rate of change limit setting In RCas Cas or Auto mode the SP value is used for the AO block s output OUT whose value is then passed to the transducer block via channel 1 13 3 1 As for Fieldbus enabled positioners including the YVP110 not only a power failure but also other errors such as a communication error can cause th
279. tion actuator signature 109 2109 STEP_RESP_SET 45 55 100 600 Settings of step levels for step response test 110 2110 POSITIONER_ 0 100 10 30 Settings of the positioner signature SIGN_SET 30 111 2111 SERVO_WARN_HI_ 80 of MV High limit alarm setting for Servo Output Drift LIM warning 112 2112 SERVO_WARN_LO_ 20 of MV Low limit alarm setting for Servo Output Drift LIM warning 113 2113 SERVO_TIME_TH 10 sec High limit alarm setting for total time of Servo Output Drift warning 114 2114 SERVO_WARN_ 0 O S Total number of times of Servo Output Drift COUNT warning To reset the count write 0 115 2115 X_BST_ON_ 0 0 O S The addition value to threshold for switching on THRESHOLD boost action a control parameter for exhaust 10 to 10 Applicable for Double Acting Type 116 2116 X_BST_OFF_ 0 0 O S The addition value to threshold for switching off THRESHOLD boost action a control parameter for exhaust 10 to 10 Applicable for Double Acting Type 117 2117 X_BOOST_VALUE 0 0 of MV O S The addition Boost value a control parameter for exhaust 50 to 50 Applicable for Double Acting Type AT 3 Parameters of AO Block Relative Default e ZS Reeg Index Parameter Name factory setting Write Description 0 5000 BLOCK HEADER Block tag Information about this block including the block O S tag DD revision execution time 1 5001 Incremented when a change is made to the parameter settings for the AO block to indica
280. tions in which a PID block changes mode to IMan initialization manual and suspends the control action Initialization and manual fallback takes place only when the following condition is met e The quality component of BKCAL_IN status data status of BKCAL_IN is Bad OR e The quality component of BKCAL_IN status is Good c AND The sub status component of BKCAL_IN status is FSA LO NI or IR 16 14 Manual Fallback Manual fallback denotes an abnormality handling action in which a PID block changes mode to Man manual and suspends the control action The manual fallback action is enabled to take place if the Target to Manual if BAD IN option in STATUS OPTS is set as true and it takes place when the following condition is met e IN status data status of IN is Bad except when the control action bypass is on 16 14 1 STATUS_OPTS The table below shows the options in STATUS _ OPTS Table 16 4 STATUS_OPTS of PID Block Options in Bit STATUS_ Description OPTS 0 IFSifBADIN Sets the sub status component of OUT status to IFS if IN status is Bad except when PID control bypass is on 1 IFSif BAD Sets the sub status component of CAS IN OUT status to IFS if CAS_IN status is Bad 2 Use Uncertain Does not regard IN as being in Bad as Good status when IN status is Uncertain to prevent mode transitions from being affected when it is Uncertain 5 Target to Automatically changes the
281. tive scheduler There must be at least one LM ona segment When the LAS on a segment has failed another LM on the same segment starts working as the LAS Node address 0x14 There are 3 LMs on this segment SlotTime 5 LM LM Basic device Basic device Basic device Basic device Node address 0x15 Node address 0x16 Node address OxF1 Node address OxF2 Node address OxF3 Node address 0xF4 SlotTime 5 SlotTime 5 FA0201 ai Figure 1 Example of Fieldbus configuration 3 LMs on Same Segment A2 3 Transfer of LAS There are two procedures for an LM to become the LAS e Ifthe LM whose value of V ST xV TN is the smallest on a segment with the exception of the current LAS judges that there is no LAS on the segment in such a case as when the segment has started up or when the current LAS has failed the LM declares itself as the LAS then becomes the LAS With this procedure an LM backs up the LAS as shown in the following figure e The LM whose value of V ST xV TN is the smallest on a segment with the exception of the current LAS requests the LAS on the same segment to transfer the right of being the LAS then becomes the LAS LM In the event that the current LAS in this segment Node address 0x14 node address 0x14 fails the LM with the address SlotTime 5 of 0x15 takes its place to become the LAS LM LM Basic device Basic device Basic device Basic device Node address 0x15 Node address 0x16 Node
282. truzzjonijiet marbuta ma Ex fil lingwa lokali tieg ek g andek tikkuntattja lill eqreb rappre entan jew uffi ju ta Yokogawa IM 21B04C01 01E lt 1 Notes on Handling gt 1 1 1 Notes on Handling The YVP110 advanced valve positioner is fully factory tested upon shipment When the YVP110 is delivered visually check that no damage occured during the shipment 1 1 Nameplate The model name and configuration are indicated on the nameplate Verify that the configuration indicated in the Model and Suffix Code in Chapter 7 is in compliance with the specifications written on the order sheet C 3 t E gen e CE VALVE POSITIONER YVP110 STYLE c10 D E 140 700 kPa NO INPUT Foundation Fieldbus YOKOGAWA A O Sa Figure 1 1 Nameplate 1 2 Transport To prevent damage while in transit leave the positioner in the original shipping container until it reaches the installation site 1 3 Storage When an extended storage period is expected observe the following precautions 1 If atall possible store the positioner in factory shipped condition that is in the original shipping container 2 Choose a storage location that satisfies the following requirements e Alocation that is not exposed to rain or water e Alocation subject to a minimum of vibration or impact e The following temperature and humidity range is recommended Ordinary temperature and humidity 25 C 65
283. tus of generating a discrete alarm 24 6024 6124 DISC_ALM Status of discrete alarm IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 1 Function Block Parameters gt A1 5 Parameters of OS Block A 11 Relative Default a Index Index Parameter Name factory setting Write Description 0 14000 Block Header Block tag Information about this block including the block O S tag DD revision execution time 1 14001 ST_REV Incremented when a change in made to the parameter settings for the OS block to indicate the revision level of the settings and used to see whether or not there is a change in parameter settings 2 14002 TAG_DESC Universal parameter storing the description of the tag 3 14003 STRATEGY Universal parameter used by an upper level system to classify the function blocks 4 14004 ALERT_KEY Universal parameter used as a key to identify the point from which an alert is issued normally used by an upper level system to select alerts to provide to a particular operator who covers a specific area of the plant 5 14005 MODE_BLK Universal parameter that indicates the block operation conditions and is composed of actual mode target mode permitted modes and normal mode 6 14006 BLOCK ERR Indicates the error statuses related to the block itself 7 14007 SP Indicates the setpoint for the block 8 14008 OUT_1 Indicates the value and s
284. umentation This procedure is only applicable to the countries in European Union 0 0 0 00 All instruction manuals for ATEX Ex related products are available in English German and French Should you require Ex related instructions in your local language you are to contact your nearest Yokogawa office or representative Alle brugervejledninger for produkter relateret til ATEX Ex er tilg ngelige p engelsk tysk og fransk Skulle De nske yderligere oplysninger om h ndtering af Ex produkter p eget sprog kan De rette henvendelse herom til den n rmeste Yokogawa afdeling eller forhandler Tutti i manuali operativi di prodotti ATEX contrassegnati con Ex sono disponibili in inglese tedesco e francese Se si desidera ricevere i manuali operativi di prodotti Ex in lingua locale mettersi in contatto con l ufficio Yokogawa pi vicino o con un rappresentante Todos los manuales de instrucciones para los productos antiexplosivos de ATEX est n disponibles en ingl s alem n y franc s Si desea solicitar las instrucciones de estos art culos antiexplosivos en su idioma local deber ponerse en contacto con la oficina o el representante de Yokogawa m s cercano Alle handleidingen voor producten die te maken hebben met ATEX explosiebeveiliging Ex zijn verkrijgbaar in het Engels Duits en Frans Neem indien u aanwijzingen op het gebied van explosiebeveiliging nodig hebt in uw eigen taal contact op met de dichtst
285. unting bracket to the positioner e Nominal 10 mm open end or box end wrench for M6 bolt used to fix the feedback lever to the shaft 3 2 1 Installing YVP110 on Linear motion Control Valve The following shows the general installation procedure when assembling a YVP110 with a linear motion control valve e g a globe valve combined with a diaphragm actuator or cylinder actuator Note that the most suitable procedure may differ depending on the shapes of the bracket and valve actuator and the structure of the mounting position F0301 ai YVP Installed on Linear motion Valve Actuator Figure 3 1 1 Fixing Bracket to YVP110 Use the four M8 bolts that come with the YVP110 to tightly fix the mounting bracket to the YVP110 See Part Names on page 2 1 The installation method is determined by the combination of the control valve and positioner as well as by the valve manufacturer who performs the adjustment For details consult the control valve manufacturer IM 21B04C01 01E lt 3 Installing YVP110 on Actuator gt 2 Fixing the YVP110 to Actuator with Bracket After fixing the bracket to the YVP110 attach it to the actuator with the specified bolts Depending on the shapes of the bracket and actuator the working space at the rear of the YVP110 where the feedback shaft is positioned may be quite narrow making installation work tricky In such
286. urrentLinkSettingRecord and ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord have the same values Sub Size Descrip index Element bytes tion j 1 SlotTime 2 V ST 2 PerDlpduPhlOverhead V PhLO 3 MaxResponseDelay 1 V MRD 4 FirstUnpolledNodeld 1 V FUN 5 ThisLink 2 V TL 6 MinInterPduDelay 1 V MID 7 NumConsecUnpolledNodeld 1 V NUN 8 PreambleExtension 1 V PhPE 9 PostTransGapExtension 1 V PhGE 10 MaxInterChanSignalSkew 1 V PhIS 11 TimeSyncClass 1 V TSC 8 DlmeBasiclnfo ae Element i Description 1 SlotTime Indicates the capability value for V ST of the device 2 _ PerDipduPhlOverhead V PhLO 3 MaxResponseDelay Indicates the capability value for V MRD of the device 4 ThisNode V TN node address D ThisLink V TL link id 6 MinInterPduDelay Indicates the capability value for V MID of the device 7 TimeSyncClass Indicates the capability value for V TSC of the device 8 PreambleExtension V PhPE 9 PostTransGapExtension 1 V PhGE 10 MaxinterChanSignalSkew 41 V PhIS IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 2 Link Master Functions gt A 24 9 PlmeBasicCharacteristics 12 LinkScheduleActivationVariable Sub e Size B Writing the version number of an LAS schedule eme
287. ut characteristic only Uo 14 to 24 V I S maximum value lo according to spark test result or other assessment e g 133 mAfor Uo 15 V Group IIC rectangular characteristic No specification of Lo and Co in the certificate and on the label Cable or The cable used to interconnect the devices needs to comply with the following parameters loop resistance R 15 to 150 O km inductance per unit length L 0 4 to 1 mH km capacitance per unit length C 80 to 200 nF km C C line line 0 5 C line screen if both lines are floating C C line line C line screen if the screen is connected to one line length of spur cable max 30 m Group IIC or 120 m Group IIB length of trunk cable max 1 km Group IIC or 1 9 km Group IIB Terminators At each end of the trunk cable an approved line terminator with the following parameters is suitable R 90 to 100 Q C 0to 2 2 uF The resistor must be infallible according to IEC 60079 11 One of the two allowed terminators might already be integrated in the associated apparatus bus supply unit System evaluation The number of passive devices like transmitters actuators hand held terminals connected to a single bus segment is not limited due to l S reasons Furthermore if the above rules are respected the inductance and capacitance of the cable need not to be considered and will not impair the intrinsic safety of the installation IM 21B04C01 01
288. ware download method 0x01 Standard 55 1055 SOFTDWN_COUNT 0 _ Indicates the number of times the internal FlashROM was erased 56 1056 SOFTDWN_ACT_AREA JO _ Indicates the ROM number of the currently working FlashROM 0 FlashROM 0 working 1 FlashROM 1 working 57 1057 SOFTDWN_MOD_REV 1 0 0 0 0 0 Indicates the software module revision 0 0 0 58 1058 SOFTDWN_ERROR 0 _ Indicates an error during a software download See Table 4 IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 4 Software Downloads A 33 Table AAA Download Error Codes Error Code Detail 0 No error 32768 Unsupported header version 32769 Abnormal header size 32770 Abnormal manufacturer ID 32771 Abnormal device family 32772 Abnormal device revision 32773 Abnormal vendor specification version 32774 Abnormal number of modules 32775 Abnormal number of bytes in module 1 32776 Abnormal number of bytes in module 2 32777 Device error in module 1 32778 Checksum error in module 1 32779 Checksum error in file 32780 Unused 32781 Write prohibited area in FlashROM 32782 Verification error during FlashROM writing 32783 Polling error during FlashROM erasing 32784 Polling time out during FlashROM erasing 32785 Polling error during FlashROM writing 32786 Polling time out during FlashROM writing 32787 FlashROM driver undefined number error
289. ways indicates the results of calculation After elapse of BAL_TIME OUT PRE_OUT is established Note that if the value of BAL_TIME is changed during linear change of the OUT value it is not reflected The value of BAL_TIME will be reflected only after the mode is changed the next time IM 21B04C01 01E 18 5 lt 18 AR Function Block gt PRE_OUT OUT Case of BAL_TIME 5 sec F1804 ai The value of OUT is represented by the following equation yn yn 1 xn yn 1 a n a T tc 1 The value of T tc truncates digits to the right of the decimal point where y OUT x PRE_OUT tc period of execution T BAL TIME n period 18 4 2 Status Handling The setting of INPUT_OPTS is applied to the input status When INPUT_OPTS is applied there are cases where the PV status becomes good even if the status of main inputs is uncertain or the status of auxiliary inputs is uncertain or bad The PV status is classified by the following e Ifthe statuses of two main inputs are both good or anything other than good See 18 2 1 Main Inputs e lf only one of the statuses of two main inputs is good e Ifthe status of IN is good and that of IN_LO is anything other than good IN gt RANGE_LO The status of IN applies IN lt RANGE LO See 18 2 1 Main Inputs e Ifthe status of IN is anything
290. wirings the general purpose equipment must have nonincendive field wiring terminal approved by FM Approvals The nonincendive field wiring circuit concept allows interconection of nonincendive field wiring apparatus with associated nonincendive field wiring apparatus using any of the wiring methods permitted for unclassified locations Installation requirements Vmax 2 Voc or Vt Imax see note 10 Ca 2 Ci Ccable La 2 Li Lcable 10 For this current controlled circuit the parameter Imax is not required and need not be aligned with parameter Isc or It of the barrier or associated nonincendive field wiring apparatus Electrical Data Maximum Input Voltage Vmax 32 V Maximum Internal Capacitance Ci 1 76 nF Maximum Internal Inductance Li 0 yH B FM Explosionproof Type Caution for FM explosionproof type Note 1 Model YVP 110 Valve Positioner with optional code FF1 are applicable for use in hazardous locations e Applicable standard FM3600 FM3615 FM3810 ANSI NEMA250 e Explosionproof for Class l Division 1 Groups A B C and D e Dust ignitionproof for Class II III Division 1 Groups E F and G e Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X e Temperature Class T6 e Ambient Temperature 40 to 80 C IM 21B04C01 01E lt 1 Notes on Handling gt 1 6 Note 2 Wiring e All wiring shall comply with National Electrical Code ANSI NEPA70 and Local Electrical Codes e FACTORY SEALED CONDUIT SEAL NOT REQUIRED
291. xcessively rapid response Verify the 10 step response and increment the value by 0 2 IM 21B04C01 01E A 40 lt Appendix 6 Manual Tuning Guideline gt e If necessary increment the value for SERVO_ RESET by 5 e The same boost value is set on both the air delivery and exhaust sides by Auto Tuning If the overshoot on the exhaust side is larger than that on the air delivery side for a double acting model input a negative value in X_BOOST_ VALUE 1 2 without changing the value of 0 in X_BST_ON_THRESHOLD 1 2 and 4 Improving the response time e Increment or decrement the value for BOOST _ VALUE 1 2 and X_BOOST_VALUE 1 2 by 2 respectively e f necessary increment the value for SERVO _ GAIN by 30 5 Checking hunting operation Input a value in a large step of approx 80 to X_BST_OFF_THRESHOLD 1 2 First try to input a negative value of half that of BOOST_ VALUE 1 2 and if necessary increment or decrement the value by 1 3 Improving the stabilization time and slow overshoot Decrease the value for SERVO_RESET to improve the capability of tracking the target value However if the value is too small the hunting operation or limit cycle may occur Verify the 10 step response and decrement the value by 2 to 3 ensure the hunting operation does not occur If the hunting operaion does occur decrease the value for SERVO_GAIN to 2 3 or 1 2 of the originally entered value Then
292. xecuted successfully 10 17010 STATUS_ Use 0 O S_ A user selectable option available for status handling OPTS Uncertain as in the block good and Uncertain if Manual only 11 17011 IN_1 0 Input 1 12 17012 IN _2 0 Input 2 13 17013 IN_3 0 Input 3 14 17014 IN_4 0 Input 4 15 17015 DISABLE _1 0 1 0 Selector switch to disable input 1 from being selected 16 17016 DISABLE _2 O 1 0 Selector switch to disable input 2 from being selected 17 17017 DISABLE_3 0 1 0 Selector switch to disable input 3 from being selected 18 17018 DISABLE_4 0 1 0 Selector switch to disable input 4 from being selected 19 17019 SELECT_ 1 6 0 Specifies the input selection algorithm TYPE 20 17020 MIN_GOOD 0 8 0 Parameter specifying the minimum required number of inputs with good status If the number of inputs with good status is less than the value of MIN_ GOOD input selection is canceled 21 17021 SELECTED 0 8 0 Indicates the number of the selected input However it indicates the number of inputs used to calculate the average it SELECT_TYPE Average If no input is selectable or if there are multiple inputs it became 0 none IM 21B04C01 01E lt Appendix 1 Function Block Parameters gt A 15 Relative Index Parameter Valid Range GE Write Description Index Name setting 22 17022 OP_ 0 8 0 A parameter to forcibly employ the i
293. yclically done 24 1024 FREE_SPACE Shows the free space memory for configurations as a percent value YVP110 shows zero which means the pre configured resource 25 1025 FREE_TIME 0 Shows the free time that can be used for computations by resources but not supported by the YVP110 26 1026 SHED_RCAS 640000 Communication time out setting for communications with the device from which the remote cascade setpoint is sent 27 1027 SHED_ROUT 640000 Communication time out setting for communications with the device from which the remote output setting is sent not used in the YVP110 however 28 1028 FAULT_STATE 1 Indicates the fault state 29 1029 SET_FSTATE 1 Sets the fault state 30 1030 CLR_FSTATE 1 Clears the fault state 31 1031 MAX_NOTIFY 3 Maximum number of alerts retained in the device YVP110 32 1032 LIM_NOTIFY 3 Maximum number of alerts to be held by the device YVP110 used by the user to restrict the number of alert notifications to the host to prevent overflow of alert receptions in the host 33 1033 CONFIRM_TIM 20000 ms Defines the time to wait for confirmation for an alert 34 1034 WRITE_LOCK Unlocked Prohibits write access from outside the device to the settings 35 1035 UPDATE_EVT Shows the contents of an update event upon occurrence 36 1036 BLOCK_ALM Shows the contents of an alarm event upon occurrence 37 1037 ALARM_SUM Enable Shows the alarm summary for all bl

YVP110 Advanced Valve Positioner

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents